Operação M64

CNC
60/60S Series
SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL
BNP-B2210F(ENG)
MELDAS and MELSEC are registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of
the respective company.
Introduction
This manual describes the specifications of MELDAS 60/60S Series.

To safely use this CNC unit, thoroughly study the "Precautions for Safety" on the next
page before use.
Details described in this manual
At the beginning of each item, a table indicating its specification according to the model.
{ : Standard
∆ : Option
: Selection
: Special option
CAUTION
The items that are not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not
possible".
This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added.
Some functions may differ or some functions may not be usable depending on the
NC system (software) version.
General precautions
(1) When the contents of this manual is updated, the version (*, A, B, …) on the cover
will be incremented.
Precautions for Safety
Always read the specifications issued by the machine maker, this manual, related manuals and
attached documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to
ensure correct use.
Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit.
This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
When there is a great risk that the user could be subject to

DANGER fatalities or serious injuries if handling is mistaken.
When the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries

WARNING if handling is mistaken.
When the user could be subject to injuries or when physical

CAUTION damage could occur if handling is mistaken.
Note that even items ranked as " CAUTION", may lead to major results depending on the
situation. In any case, important information that must always be observed is described.
DANGER
Not applicable in this manual.
WARNING
Not applicable in this manual.
CAUTION
1. Items related to product and manual
The items that are not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".
This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added.
Some functions may differ or some functions may not be usable depending on the NC
system (software) version.
2. Items related to start up and maintenance
Follow the power specifications (input voltage range, frequency range, momentary
power failure time range) described in this manual.
Follow the environment conditions (ambient temperature, humidity, vibration,
atmosphere) described in this manual.
! Follow the remote type machine contact input/output interface described in this manual.
(Connect a diode in parallel with the inductive load or connect a protective resistor in
serial with the capacitive load, etc.)
If the parameter is used to set the temperature rise detection function to invalid,
overheating may occur, thereby disabling control and possibly resulting in the axes
running out of control, which in turn may result in machine damage and/or bodily injury
or destruction of the unit. It is for this reason that the detection function is normally left
"valid" for operation.
CONTENTS
1 Control Axes ...................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Control Axes ................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.1 Number of Basic Control Axes (NC axes)............................................................ 1
1.1.2 Max. Number of Control Axes
(NC axes + Spindles + PLC axes + Auxiliary axes)............................................. 1
1.1.3 Number of Simultaneous Contouring Control Axes ............................................. 3
1.1.4 Max. Number of NC Axes in a Part System (Part System 1/Part System 2) ...... 3
1.2 Control Part System...................................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 Standard Number of Part Systems....................................................................... 3
1.2.2 Max. Number of Part Systems.............................................................................. 3
1.3 Control Axes and Operation Modes ............................................................................. 4
1.3.1 Tape (RS-232C Input) Mode ................................................................................ 4
1.3.2 Memory Mode ....................................................................................................... 4
1.3.3 MDI Mode.............................................................................................................. 4
1.3.4 High-Speed Program Server Mode ...................................................................... 4
1.3.5 IC Card Mode........................................................................................................ 4
1.3.5.1 IC Card in Control Unit............................................................................... 4
2 Input Command .................................................................................................................. 5

2.1 Data Increment ............................................................................................................. 5
2.2 Unit System................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.1 Inch/Metric Changeover........................................................................................ 6
2.3 Program Format............................................................................................................ 7
2.3.1 Character Code..................................................................................................... 7
2.3.2 Program Format.................................................................................................... 8
2.3.2.1 Format 1 for Lathe ..................................................................................... 8
2.3.2.3 Special Format for Lathe .......................................................................... 8
2.3.2.4 Format 1 for Machining Center.................................................................. 8
2.3.2.7 Special Format for MELDAS ..................................................................... 8
2.4 Command Value ........................................................................................................... 9
2.4.1 Decimal Point Input I, II......................................................................................... 9
2.4.2 Absolute / Incremental Command ........................................................................ 10
2.4.3 Diameter/Radius Designation............................................................................... 12
2.5 Command Value and Setting Value Range ................................................................. 13
2.5.1 Command Value and Setting Value Range ......................................................... 13
3 Positioning / Interpolation ................................................................................................. 17

3.1 Positioning .................................................................................................................... 17
3.1.1 Positioning............................................................................................................. 17
3.1.2 Unidirectional Positioning ..................................................................................... 18
3.2 Linear/Circular Interpolation ......................................................................................... 19
3.2.1 Linear Interpolation ............................................................................................... 19
3.2.2 Circular Interpolation (Center / Radius Designation) ........................................... 20
3.2.3 Helical Interpolation .............................................................................................. 22
3.2.4 Spiral / Conical Interpolation................................................................................. 24
3.2.5 Cylindrical Interpolation......................................................................................... 26
3.2.6 Polar coordinate interpolation ............................................................................... 27
3.2.7 Milling Interpolation ............................................................................................... 28
3.3 Curve Interpolation ....................................................................................................... 29
3.3.2 Exponential Interpolation ...................................................................................... 29
3.3.3 Spline Interpolation ............................................................................................... 30
i
4 Feed...................................................................................................................................... 31
4.1 Feed Rate ..................................................................................................................... 31
4.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate (m/min) ............................................................................... 31
4.1.2 Cutting Feed Rate (m/min) ................................................................................... 32
4.1.3 Manual Feed Rate (m/min)................................................................................... 33
4.2 Feed Rate Input Methods ............................................................................................. 34
4.2.1 Feed per Minute.................................................................................................... 34
4.2.2 Feed per Revolution.............................................................................................. 36
4.2.4 F 1-digit Feed ........................................................................................................ 37
4.3 Override ........................................................................................................................ 38
4.3.1 Rapid Traverse Override ...................................................................................... 38
4.3.2 Cutting Feed Override .......................................................................................... 38
4.3.3 2nd Cutting Feed Override ................................................................................... 39
4.3.4 Override Cancel .................................................................................................... 39
4.4 Acceleration / Deceleration........................................................................................... 40
4.4.1 Automatic Acceleration / Deceleration after Interpolation .................................... 40
4.4.2 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Acceleration / Deceleration ....................... 41
4.4.3 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination 3-step Acceleration / Deceleration ............ 44
4.5 Thread Cutting .............................................................................................................. 45
4.5.1 Thread Cutting (Lead/Thread Number Designation)............................................ 45
4.5.2 Variable Lead Thread Cutting............................................................................... 47
4.5.3 Synchronous Tapping........................................................................................... 48
4.5.3.1 Synchronous Tapping Cycle...................................................................... 48
4.5.3.2 Pecking Tapping Cycle.............................................................................. 50
4.5.3.3 Deep-hole Tapping Cycle .......................................................................... 51
4.5.4 Chamfering............................................................................................................ 52
4.5.6 Circular Thread Cutting......................................................................................... 53
4.6 Manual Feed ................................................................................................................. 54
4.6.1 Manual Rapid Traverse ........................................................................................ 54
4.6.2 Jog Feed ............................................................................................................... 54
4.6.3 Incremental Feed .................................................................................................. 55
4.6.4 Handle Feed.......................................................................................................... 55
4.6.5 Manual Feed Rate B............................................................................................. 56
4.7 Dwell ............................................................................................................................. 57
4.7.1 Dwell (Time-based Designation) .......................................................................... 57
5 Program Memory / Editing................................................................................................. 58

5.1 Memory Capacity.......................................................................................................... 58
5.1.1 Memory Capacity (Number of Programs Stored)................................................. 58
5.2 Editing Method .............................................................................................................. 59
5.2.1 Program Editing .................................................................................................... 59
5.2.2 Background Editing............................................................................................... 60
5.2.3 Buffer Correction................................................................................................... 61
5.2.4 Word Editing.......................................................................................................... 62
6 Operation and Display ....................................................................................................... 63

6.1 Structure of Operation / Display Panel ......................................................................... 63
6.2 Operation Methods and Functions ............................................................................... 63
6.2.1 Memory Switch (PLC Switch) ............................................................................... 63
6.3 Display Methods and Contents .................................................................................... 64
6.3.1 Status Display ....................................................................................................... 64
6.3.2 Position Display .................................................................................................... 64
6.3.3 Program Running State Display ........................................................................... 66
6.3.4 Parameter Setting and Display............................................................................. 66
6.3.5 MDI Data Setting and Display .............................................................................. 66
6.3.6 Specification List Display ...................................................................................... 66
ii
6.3.7 Clock ..................................................................................................................... 66
6.3.8 Hardware / Software Configuration Display ......................................................... 67
6.3.9 Integrated Time Display........................................................................................ 67
6.3.10 Available Languages .......................................................................................... 67
6.3.11 Additional Languages ......................................................................................... 68
6.3.11.1 Japanese ................................................................................................. 68
6.3.11.2 English ..................................................................................................... 68
6.3.11.3 German .................................................................................................... 68
6.3.11.4 Italian........................................................................................................ 68
6.3.11.5 French ...................................................................................................... 68
6.3.11.6 Spanish .................................................................................................... 68
6.3.11.7 Chinese .................................................................................................... 69
6.3.11.8 Korean...................................................................................................... 69
6.3.11.9 Portuguese............................................................................................... 69
6.3.11.10 Hungarian .............................................................................................. 69
6.3.11.11 Dutch...................................................................................................... 69
6.3.11.12 Swedish ................................................................................................. 69
6.3.12 Screen Saver, Backlight OFF ............................................................................. 70
6.3.13 Screen Deletion .................................................................................................. 70
7 Input / Output Functions and Devices ............................................................................. 71

7.1 Input / Output Data ....................................................................................................... 71
7.2 Input / Output I/F ........................................................................................................... 72
7.2.1 RS-232C I/F .......................................................................................................... 72
7.2.2 IC Card I/F............................................................................................................. 72
7.2.2.1 I/F for IC Card in Control Unit .................................................................... 72
7.2.3 Data Server I/F...................................................................................................... 72
7.2.4 Ethernet I/F ........................................................................................................... 72
7.3 Computer Link............................................................................................................... 73
7.3.1 Computer Link B ................................................................................................... 73
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions ................................................................... 74

8.1 Spindle Functions (S) ................................................................................................... 74
8.1.1 Command / Output ............................................................................................... 74
8.1.1.1 Spindle Functions ...................................................................................... 74
8.1.1.2 Spindle Serial I/F........................................................................................ 75
8.1.1.3 Spindle Analog I/F...................................................................................... 75
8.1.1.4 Coil Change ............................................................................................... 75
8.1.1.5 Automatic Coil Change.............................................................................. 75
8.1.2 Speed Control ....................................................................................................... 76
8.1.2.1 Constant Surface Speed Control............................................................... 76
8.1.2.2 Spindle Override ........................................................................................ 77
8.1.2.3 Multiple-spindle Control ............................................................................. 77
8.1.2.3.1 Multiple-spindle Control I .......................................................... 78
8.1.2.3.2 Multiple-spindle Control II............................................................. 78
8.1.3 Position Control..................................................................................................... 79
8.1.3.1 Spindle Orientation .................................................................................... 79
8.1.3.2 Spindle Position Control (Spindle / C Axis Control) .................................. 79
8.1.3.3 Spindle Synchronization ............................................................................ 80
8.1.3.3.1 Spindle Synchronization I............................................................. 80
8.1.3.3.2 Spindle Synchronization II............................................................ 81
8.1.3.4 Tool Spindle Synchronization I (Polygon) ................................................. 81
8.1.3.4.1 Tool Spindle Synchronization IA (Spindle-Spindle, Polygon)...... 81
8.1.3.4.2 Tool Spindle Synchronization IB (Spindle-Spindle, Polygon)...... 82
8.1.3.4.3 Tool Spindle Synchronization IC (Spindle-NC axis, Polygon)..... 83
iii
8.2 Tool Functions (T)......................................................................................................... 84
8.2.1 Tool Functions....................................................................................................... 84
8.3 Miscellaneous Functions (M)........................................................................................ 85
8.3.1 Miscellaneous Functions ...................................................................................... 85
8.3.2 Multiple M Codes in 1 Block ................................................................................. 85
8.3.3 M Code Independent Output ................................................................................ 86
8.3.4 Miscellaneous Function Finish ............................................................................. 86
8.3.5 M Code Output during Axis Positioning................................................................ 87
8.4 2nd Miscellaneous Functions (B) ................................................................................. 88
8.4.1 2nd Miscellaneous Functions ............................................................................... 88
9 Tool Compensation ............................................................................................................ 89

9.1 Tool Length / Position Offset ........................................................................................ 89
9.1.1 Tool Length Offset ................................................................................................ 89
9.1.2 Tool Position Offset............................................................................................... 92
9.1.3 Tool Offset for Additional Axes ............................................................................. 92
9.2 Tool Radius................................................................................................................... 93
9.2.1 Tool radius Compensation.................................................................................... 93
9.2.2 3-dimensional Tool Radius Compensation .......................................................... 96
9.2.3 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G40/41/42) .................................................... 97
9.2.4 Automatic Decision of Nose Radius Compensation Direction (G46/40) ............. 98
9.3 Tool Offset Amount....................................................................................................... 99
9.3.1 Number of Tool Offset Sets .................................................................................. 99
9.3.1.1 20 .............................................................................................................. 99
9.3.1.2 40 .............................................................................................................. 99
9.3.1.3 80 .............................................................................................................. 99
9.3.1.5 200 ............................................................................................................ 99
9.3.1.6 400 ............................................................................................................ 99
9.3.1.7 999 ............................................................................................................ 99
9.3.2 Offset Memory ...................................................................................................... 100
9.3.2.1 Tool Shape/Wear Offset Amount .............................................................. 100
10 Coordinate System...................................................................................................... 103

10.1 Coordinate System Type and Setting ........................................................................ 103
10.1.1 Machine Coordinate System .............................................................................. 104
10.1.2 Coordinate System Setting................................................................................. 105
10.1.3 Automatic Coordinate System Setting................................................................ 106
10.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Selection (6 sets).............................................. 107
10.1.5 Extended Workpiece Coordinates System Selection ........................................ 108
10.1.6 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1).................................................. 109
10.1.7 Local Coordinate System ................................................................................... 110
10.1.8 Coordinate System for Rotary Axis .................................................................... 111
10.1.9 Plane Selection ................................................................................................... 111
10.1.10 Origin Set .......................................................................................................... 112
10.1.11 Counter Set....................................................................................................... 112
10.2 Return ......................................................................................................................... 113
10.2.1 Manual Reference Position Return .................................................................... 113
10.2.2 Automatic 1st Reference Position Return .......................................................... 114
10.2.3 2nd, 3rd, 4th Reference Position Return ............................................................ 116
10.2.4 Reference Position Verification .......................................................................... 117
10.2.5 Absolute position detection................................................................................. 118
10.2.6 Tool Exchange Position Return .......................................................................... 119
10.2.7 C Axis Reference Position Return...................................................................... 120
iv
11 Operation Support Functions .................................................................................... 122
11.1 Program Control ......................................................................................................... 122
11.1.1 Optional Block Skip............................................................................................. 122
11.1.3 Single Block ........................................................................................................ 123
11.2 Program Test .............................................................................................................. 124
11.2.1 Dry Run ............................................................................................................... 124
11.2.2 Machine Lock...................................................................................................... 124
11.2.3 Miscellaneous Function Lock ............................................................................. 125
11.2.4 Graphic Check .................................................................................................... 125
11.2.5 Graphic Trace ..................................................................................................... 125
11.3 Program Search / Start / Stop .................................................................................... 126
11.3.1 Program Search.................................................................................................. 126
11.3.2 Sequence Number Search ................................................................................. 126
11.3.3 Collation Stop...................................................................................................... 127
11.3.4 Program Restart.................................................................................................. 128
11.3.5 Automatic Operation Start .................................................................................. 129
11.3.6 NC Reset............................................................................................................. 129
11.3.7 Feed Hold............................................................................................................ 130
11.3.8 Search & Start..................................................................................................... 130
11.4 Interrupt Operation...................................................................................................... 131
11.4.1 Manual Interruption............................................................................................. 131
11.4.2 Automatic Operation Handle Interruption........................................................... 132
11.4.3 Manual Absolute Mode ON / OFF ...................................................................... 133
11.4.4 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract ............................................................................. 134
11.4.5 Tapping Retract .................................................................................................. 135
11.4.6 Manual Numerical value Command ................................................................... 136
11.4.8 MDI Interruption .................................................................................................. 136
11.4.9 Simultaneous Operation of Manual and Automatic Modes ............................... 137
11.4.10 Simultaneous Operation of Jog and Handle Modes ........................................ 137
11.4.11 Reference Position Retract............................................................................... 138
11.4.13 Tool Escape and Return................................................................................... 138
11.4.14 Skip Retract....................................................................................................... 138
12 Program Support Functions...................................................................................... 139

12.1 Machining Method Support Functions........................................................................ 139
12.1.1 Program .............................................................................................................. 139
12.1.1.1 Subprogram Control ................................................................................ 139
12.1.1.3 Scaling ..................................................................................................... 141
12.1.2 Macro Program ................................................................................................... 142
12.1.2.1 User Macro .............................................................................................. 142
12.1.2.2 Machine Tool Builder Macro.................................................................... 144
12.1.2.2.1 Machine Tool Builder Macro SRAM........................................... 144
12.1.2.3 Macro Interruption.................................................................................... 145
12.1.2.4 Variable Command .................................................................................. 146
12.1.2.4.1 100 sets ...................................................................................... 146
12.1.2.4.2 200 sets ...................................................................................... 146
12.1.2.4.3 300 sets ...................................................................................... 147
12.1.2.4.4 600 sets ...................................................................................... 147
12.1.2.4.5 700 sets ...................................................................................... 147
12.1.2.4.6 (50+50 x number of part systems) sets ..................................... 147
12.1.2.4.7 (100+100 x number of part systems) sets ................................. 147
12.1.2.4.10 (500+100 x number of part systems) sets ............................... 147
v
12.1.3 Fixed Cycle ......................................................................................................... 148
12.1.3.1 Fixed Cycle for Drilling............................................................................. 149
12.1.3.2 Special Fixed Cycle ................................................................................. 155
12.1.3.3 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining.......................................................... 159
12.1.3.4 Multiple Repetitive Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining........................... 164
12.1.3.5 Multiple Repetitive Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining (Type II) ............ 172
12.1.3.6 Small-diameter Deep-Hole Drilling Cycle................................................ 173
12.1.3.7 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (Type II) .............................................................. 174
12.1.4 Mirror Image........................................................................................................ 175
12.1.4.1 Mirror Image by Parameter Setting ......................................................... 175
12.1.4.2 External Input Mirror Image ..................................................................... 175
12.1.4.3 G Code Mirror Image ............................................................................... 176
12.1.4.4 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ......................................................... 177
12.1.4.5 T Code Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts............................................ 177
12.1.5 Coordinate System Operation ............................................................................ 178
12.1.5.1 Coordinate Rotation by Program............................................................. 178
12.1.6 Dimension Input .................................................................................................. 180
12.1.6.1 Corner Chamfering / Corner R ................................................................ 180
12.1.6.2 Linear Angle Command .......................................................................... 186
12.1.6.3 Geometric Command .............................................................................. 187
12.1.6.4 Polar Coordinate Command.................................................................... 191
12.1.7 Axis Control......................................................................................................... 192
12.1.7.1 High-speed Machining............................................................................. 192
12.1.7.1.3 High-speed Machining Mode III ................................................. 192
12.1.7.1.4 High-speed High-accuracy Control 1......................................... 193
12.1.7.1.5 High-speed High-accuracy Control 2......................................... 194
12.1.7.1.7 SSS Control................................................................................ 196
12.1.7.2 Chopping.................................................................................................. 197
12.1.7.2.1 Chopping .................................................................................... 197
12.1.7.4 Normal Line Control................................................................................. 199
12.1.7.5 Circular Cutting ........................................................................................ 200
12.1.8 Multi-part System Control ................................................................................... 201
12.1.8.1 Synchronization between Part Systems.................................................. 201
12.1.8.2 Start Point Designation Synchronization................................................. 202
12.1.8.3 Cross Machining Command ................................................................... 204
12.1.8.5 Control Axis Synchronization................................................................... 205
12.1.8.6 Balance Cut ............................................................................................. 206
12.1.8.7 Common Memory between Tool Posts................................................... 207
12.1.8.9 2-part System Program Management ..................................................... 207
12.1.9 Data Input by Program........................................................................................ 208
12.1.9.1 Parameter Input by Program ................................................................... 208
12.1.9.2 Compensation Data Input by Program.................................................... 209
12.1.10 Machining Modal............................................................................................... 211
12.1.10.1 Tapping Mode........................................................................................ 211
12.1.10.2 Cutting Mode.......................................................................................... 211
12.2 Machining Accuracy Support Functions..................................................................... 212
12.2.1 Automatic Corner Override................................................................................. 212
12.2.2 Deceleration Check ............................................................................................ 213
12.2.2.1 Exact Stop Mode ..................................................................................... 214
12.2.2.2 Exact Stop Check .................................................................................... 214
12.2.2.3 Error Detect.............................................................................................. 214
12.2.2.4 Programmable Inposition Check ............................................................. 215
12.2.3 High-Accuracy Control (G61.1) .......................................................................... 216
12.3 Programming Support Functions ............................................................................... 219
12.3.1 Playback.............................................................................................................. 219
12.3.2 Address Check.................................................................................................... 219
vi
13 Machine Accuracy Compensation............................................................................. 220
13.1 Static Accuracy Compensation .................................................................................. 220
13.1.1 Backlash Compensation..................................................................................... 220
13.1.2 Memory-type Pitch Error Compensation ............................................................ 221
13.1.3 Memory-type Relative Position Error Compensation......................................... 222
13.1.4 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation ....................................... 223
13.1.5 Circular Radius Error Compensation.................................................................. 223
13.2 Dynamic Accuracy Compensation ............................................................................. 224
13.2.1 Smooth High-gain Control (SHG Control) .......................................................... 224
13.2.2 Dual Feedback.................................................................................................... 225
13.2.3 Lost Motion Compensation................................................................................. 225
14 Automation Support Functions ...................................................................................... 226

14.1 External Data Input ..................................................................................................... 226
14.1.1 External Search .................................................................................................. 226
14.1.2 External Workpiece Coordinate Offset ............................................................... 227
14.1.3 External Tool Offset ............................................................................................ 228
14.2 Measurement.............................................................................................................. 229
14.2.1 Skip ..................................................................................................................... 229
14.2.1.1 Skip .......................................................................................................... 229
14.2.1.2 Multiple-step Skip .................................................................................... 230
14.2.1.4 PLC Skip .................................................................................................. 231
14.2.1.5 Speed Change Skip................................................................................. 232
14.2.5 Automatic Tool Length Measurement ................................................................ 233
14.2.6 Manual Tool Length Measurement 1.................................................................. 236
14.2.7 Manual Tool Length Measurement 2.................................................................. 237
14.2.8 Workpiece Coordinate Offset Measurement...................................................... 238
14.2.9 Workpiece Position Measurement...................................................................... 239
14.3 Monitoring ................................................................................................................... 241
14.3.1 Tool Life Management ........................................................................................ 241
14.3.2 Number of Tool Life Management Sets ............................................................. 242
14.3.3 Display of Integrated Time/Number of Parts ...................................................... 242
14.3.4 Load Meter .......................................................................................................... 242
14.3.5 Position Switch.................................................................................................... 243
14.5 Others ......................................................................................................................... 244
14.5.1 Programmable Current Limitation ...................................................................... 244
15 Safety and Maintenance .................................................................................................. 245

15.1 Safety Switches .......................................................................................................... 245
15.1.1 Emergency Stop ................................................................................................. 245
15.1.2 Data Protection Key............................................................................................ 245
15.2 Display for Ensuring Safety ........................................................................................ 246
15.2.1 NC Warning ........................................................................................................ 246
15.2.2 NC Alarm............................................................................................................. 246
15.2.3 Operation Stop Cause ........................................................................................ 247
15.2.4 Emergency Stop Cause...................................................................................... 247
15.2.5 Temperature Detection ....................................................................................... 248
15.3 Protection.................................................................................................................... 249
15.3.1 Stroke End (Over Travel).................................................................................... 249
15.3.2 Stored Stroke Limit ............................................................................................. 249
15.3.2.1 Stored Stroke Limit I/II ............................................................................ 250
15.3.2.2 Stored Stroke Limit IB............................................................................. 252
15.3.2.3 Stored Stroke Limit IIB............................................................................ 253
15.3.2.4 Stored Stroke Limit IC............................................................................. 253
15.3.4 Chuck/Tail Stock Barrier Check.......................................................................... 254
15.3.5 Interlock............................................................................................................... 255
15.3.6 External Deceleration ......................................................................................... 255
vii
15.3.8 Door Interlock..................................................................................................... 256
15.3.8.1 Door Interlock I........................................................................................ 256
15.3.8.2 Door Interlock II....................................................................................... 257
15.3.9 Parameter Lock.................................................................................................. 258
15.3.10 Program Protect (Edit Lock B, C) ..................................................................... 258
15.3.11 Program Display Lock....................................................................................... 259
15.4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting............................................................................. 260
15.4.1 History Diagnosis ................................................................................................ 260
15.4.2 Setup / Monitor for Servo and Spindle ............................................................... 260
15.4.3 Data Sampling .................................................................................................... 260
15.4.4 Waveform Display............................................................................................... 261
15.4.5 Machine Operation History Monitor.................................................................... 261
15.4.6 NC Data Backup ................................................................................................. 262
15.4.7 PLC I/F Diagnosis ............................................................................................... 263
15.4.8 MELDASNET ...................................................................................................... 264
15.4.8.1 Machine Builder Network System .......................................................... 264
15.4.8.2 Anshin-net............................................................................................... 264
16 Cabinet and Installation ................................................................................................... 265

16.1 Cabinet Construction .................................................................................................. 265
16.2 Power Supply, Environment and Installation Conditions ........................................... 269
17 Servo/Spindle System...................................................................................................... 272

17.1 Feed Axis .................................................................................................................... 272
17.1.1 MDS-C1-V1/C1-V2 (200V) ................................................................................. 272
17.1.2 MDS-B-V14L (200V)........................................................................................... 272
17.1.3 MDS-CH-V1/CH-V2 (400V) ................................................................................ 272
17.1.4 MDS-B-SVJ2 (Compact and Small Capacity).................................................... 273
17.2 Spindle ........................................................................................................................ 274
17.2.1 MDS-C1-SP/C1-SPM/B-SP (200V).................................................................... 274
17.2.2 MDS-CH-SP/CH-SPH (400V) ............................................................................ 274
17.2.3 MDS-B-SPJ2 (Compact and Small Capacity).................................................... 274
17.3 Auxiliary Axis............................................................................................................... 274
17.3.1 Index/Positioning Servo: MR-J2-CT ................................................................... 274
17.4 Power Supply.............................................................................................................. 275
17.4.1 Power Supply: MDS-C1-CV/B-CVE ................................................................... 275
17.4.2 AC Reactor for Power Supply............................................................................. 275
17.4.3 Ground plate ....................................................................................................... 275
17.4.4 Power Supply: MDS-A-CR (Resistance Regeneration)..................................... 275
18 Machine Support Functions............................................................................................ 276

18.1 PLC ............................................................................................................................. 276
18.1.1 PLC Basic Function ............................................................................................ 276
18.1.1.1 Built-in PLC Basic Function ..................................................................... 276
18.1.2 Built-in PLC Processing Mode............................................................................ 281
18.1.2.1 PLC4B I/F .............................................................................................. 281
18.1.2.2 MELSEC Development Tool I/F .............................................................. 281
18.1.3 Built-in PLC Capacity (Number of Steps)........................................................... 282
18.1.4 Machine Contact Input/Output I/F....................................................................... 282
18.1.5 Ladder Monitor.................................................................................................... 287
18.1.6 PLC Development............................................................................................... 287
18.1.6.1 On-board Development ........................................................................... 287
18.1.6.2 MELSEC Development Tool ................................................................... 287
18.1.6.3 PLC4B...................................................................................................... 287
18.1.7 C Language Function ......................................................................................... 287
18.1.8 PLC Protect......................................................................................................... 288
18.1.9 PLC Password Lock ........................................................................................... 289
viii
18.1.12 GOT Connection............................................................................................... 290
18.1.12.2 CC-Link Connection (Remote Device) .................................................. 290
18.1.13 PLC Message ................................................................................................... 291
18.1.13.1 Japanese ............................................................................................... 291
18.1.13.2 English ................................................................................................... 291
18.1.13.3 German .................................................................................................. 291
18.1.13.4 Italian...................................................................................................... 291
18.1.13.5 French .................................................................................................... 291
18.1.13.6 Spanish .................................................................................................. 291
18.1.13.9 Portuguese............................................................................................. 291
18.1.13.10 Hungarian ............................................................................................ 292
18.1.13.11 Dutch.................................................................................................... 292
18.1.13.12 Swedish ............................................................................................... 292
18.2 Machine Construction................................................................................................. 293
18.2.1 Servo OFF........................................................................................................... 293
18.2.2 Axis Detach ......................................................................................................... 294
18.2.3 Synchronous Control .......................................................................................... 295
18.2.3.1 Position Tandem...................................................................................... 295
18.2.4 Inclined Axis Control ........................................................................................... 297
18.2.5 Index Table Indexing .......................................................................................... 298
18.2.6 NSK Table Connection Control .......................................................................... 299
18.2.7 Auxiliary Axis Control .......................................................................................... 300
18.3 PLC Operation ............................................................................................................ 301
18.3.1 Arbitrary Feed in Manual Mode .......................................................................... 301
18.3.3 PLC Axis Control................................................................................................. 302
18.4 PLC Interface .............................................................................................................. 303
18.4.1 CNC Control Signal ............................................................................................ 303
18.4.2 CNC Status Signal .............................................................................................. 304
18.4.5 DDB..................................................................................................................... 306
18.5 Machine Contact I / O................................................................................................. 307
18.6 External PLC Link ....................................................................................................... 308
18.6.1 External PLC link I (M-NET) ............................................................................... 308
18.6.2 External PLC Link II (Bus Connection)............................................................... 310
18.6.2.1 MELSEC-A, QnA Series.......................................................................... 310
18.6.3 IO Link................................................................................................................. 311
18.6.4 CC-Link ............................................................................................................... 312
18.7 Installing S/W for Machine Tools................................................................................ 316
18.7.1 APLC................................................................................................................... 316
Appendix 1 List of Specifications........................................................................................ 317

Appendix 2 Outline and installation dimension drawings of units ................................. 318
Appendix 2.1 Outline drawing of control unit...................................................................... 318
Appendix 2.1 Outline Drawing of Control Unit.................................................................... 318
Appendix 2.1.1 M64A/M64 Control Unit Outline Drawing ............................................ 318
Appendix 2.1.2 M64AS/64S/65/65S/66/66S Control Unit Outline Drawing................. 319
Appendix 2.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing ................................................. 320
Appendix 2.2.1 FCUA-CT100/CT120........................................................................... 320
Appendix 2.2.2 FCUA-CR10......................................................................................... 321
Appendix 2.2.3 FCUA-LD100 ....................................................................................... 322
Appendix 2.2.4 FCUA-LD10 ......................................................................................... 323
Appendix 2.2.5 FCU6-DUT32....................................................................................... 324
Appendix 2.2.6 FCU6-DUT33....................................................................................... 325
Appendix 2.2.7 FCUA-KB20/KB30 ............................................................................... 326
Appendix 2.2.8 FCU6-KB021/KB031 ........................................................................... 327
Appendix 2.2.9 FCUA-KB10/KB12 ............................................................................... 328
Appendix 2.2.10 Key Arrangement .............................................................................. 329
Appendix 2.3 Base I/O Unit Outline Drawing .................................................................... 330
Appendix 2.4 Remote I/O Unit Outline Drawing................................................................ 331
ix
1 Control Axes
1.1 Control Axes
1 Control Axes
The NC axis, spindle, PLC axis are generically called the control axis.
The NC axis is an axis that can be manually operated, or automatically operated with the machining
program.
The PLC axis is an axis that can be controlled from the PLC ladder.
1.1 Control Axes
1.1.1 Number of Basic Control Axes (NC axes)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M/L system M64A M64 M65 M66 M64AS M64S M65S M66S
M system {3 {3 {3 {3 {3 {3 {3 {3
L system {2 {2 {2 {2 {2 {2 {2 {2
1.1.2 Max. Number of Control Axes (NC axes + Spindles + PLC axes + Auxiliary axes)
Max. number of control axes (NC axes + spindles + PLC axes + auxiliary axes)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

M system 9 11 11 11 9 11 11 11
L system 9 11 11 11 9 11 14 14
A number of axes that are within the maximum number of control axes, and that does not exceed
the maximum number given for the NC axis, spindle, PLC axis and auxiliary axis can be used.
Connection specifications of NC axis, PLC axis, spindle and auxiliary axis

There are two channels with which the servo and spindle are connected.
Maximum 7 axes can be connected with each channel.
NC axis, PLC axis, spindle : They can be connected with the channel 1 and channel 2. The
connection number of first axis to seventh axis are assigned to
each channel. Connect them from the first axis in order. More than
one axis must be connected with the channel 1.
Auxiliary axis (J2-CT) : They can be connected with the channel 2.

The connection order is the NC axis, PLC axis, spindle and
auxiliary axis.
-1-
1 Control Axes
1.1 Control Axes
Max. number of axes (NC axes + spindles + PLC axes)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

M system 5 7 7 7 5 7 7 7
L system 5 7 7 7 5 7 14 14
Max number of servo axes (NC axes + PLC axes)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

M system 5 6 6 6 5 7 7 7
L system 5 6 6 6 5 7 14 14
Max. number of NC axes (in total for all the part systems)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

M system 4 6 6 6 4 6 6 6
L system 4 6 6 6 4 7 12 12
Max. number of spindles

Includes analog spindles.
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

M system 1 2 2 2 1 2 4 4
L system 1 2 2 2 1 2 4 4
Max. number of PLC axes
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

M system 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
L system 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Max. number of auxiliary axes
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

M system 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
L system 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
-2-
1 Control Axes
1.1 Control Axes
1.1.3 Number of Simultaneous Contouring Control Axes

Simultaneous control of all axes is possible as a principle in the same part system.
However, for actual use, the machine maker specification will apply.
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

M system 4 4 4 6 4 4 4 6
L system 4 4 4 6 4 4 4 6
1.1.4 Max. Number of NC Axes in a Part System

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system 4 6 6 6 4 6 6 6
L system 4 6 6 6 4 6 6 6
1.2 Control Part System

1.2.1 Standard Number of Part Systems
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
L system 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1.2.2 Max. Number of Part Systems

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system 1∆ 2∆ 2∆ 2∆ 1∆ 1∆ 1∆ 1∆
L system 1∆ 2∆ 2∆ 2∆ 1∆ 2∆ 2∆ 2∆
For actual use, the machine maker specification will apply.
-3-
1 Control Axes
1.3 Control Axes and Operation Modes
1.3 Control Axes and Operation Modes

1.3.1 Tape (RS-232C Input) Mode
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
In this mode, operation is performed using the machining program data from the RS-232C interface
built in the NC unit. A paper tape reader must be provided if machining programs on paper tape
are to be run.
1.3.2 Memory Mode

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The machining programs stored in the memory of the NC unit are run.
1.3.3 MDI Mode

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The MDI data stored in the memory of the NC unit is executed. Once executed, the MDI data is set
to the "setting incomplete" status, and the data will not be executed unless the "setting completed"
status is established by performing screen operations.
1.3.4 High-Speed Program Server Mode

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – ∆ ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
In this mode, the NC unit is hooked up to a host computer using an Ethernet connection, and the
programs are transferred to either the NC unit's memory or the IC card inside the NC unit. This
function is executed with the transferred programs and memory operation (IC card operation) mode.
1.3.5 IC Card Mode
1.3.5.1 IC Card in Control Unit

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – ∆ ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
The machine programs stored in the IC card of the NC unit are run.
-4-
2 Input Command
2.1 Data Increment
2 Input Command
2.1 Data Increment
Least command increment: 1 µm
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Least command increment: 0.1 µm
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
Least command increment: 0.01 µm (10nm)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

M system – – – – – – – –
L system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
(Note 1) The drive unit must be compatible to use the least command increment 0.01µm
(10nm). The relation of the control unit setting and usable drive unit compliance is
shown below.
Last command increment MDS-B series MDS-C1 series
1 µm/0.1 µm { {
0.01 µm (10nm) – {
(May be incompatible depending on
servo drive unit version)
The data increment handled in the controller include the least input increment, least command
increment and least detection increment. Each type is set with parameters.
(1) The least input increment indicates the increment handled in the internal processing of the
controller. The counter and tool offset data, etc., input from the screen is handled with this
increment. This increment is applied per part system (1st part system, 2nd part system).
(2) The least command increment indicates the command increment of the movement command
in the machining program. This can be set per axis.
Metric unit system Inch unit system

Increment type Type Linear axis Rotary axis Linear axis Rotary axis
(Unit = mm) (Unit = °) (Unit = inch) (Unit = °)
B 0.001 0.001 0.0001 0.001
Least command increment C 0.0001 0.0001 0.00001 0.0001
D 0.00001 0.00001 – –
(Note) The inch and metric systems cannot be used together.
(3) The least detection increment indicates the detection increment of the NC axis and PLC axis
detectors. The increment is determined by the detector being used.
(4) If the least command increment is 0.1µm/0.01µm, the movement amount, movement range
and command speed may be limited compared to the 1µm.
-5-
2 Input Command
2.2 Unit System
2.2 Unit System
2.2.1 Inch/Metric Changeover

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
The unit systems of the data handled in the controller include the metric unit system and inch unit
system. The type can be designated with the parameters and machining program. The unit system
can be set independently for the (1) Program command, (2) Setting data such as offset amount and
(3) Parameters.
Unit system Length data Meaning

Metric unit system 1.0 1.0 mm
Inch unit system 1.0 1.0 inch
(Note) For the angle data, 1.0 means 1 degree (°) regardless of the unit system.
Data
Screen data
Machining program (Offset amount, etc.) Parameter
Parameter
G20 Inch unit system
0 Metric unit system
G21 Metric unit system
I_inch Not affected
G20 Inch unit system
1 Inch unit system
G21 Metric unit system
0 Metric unit system
M_inch Not affected Not affected
1 Inch unit system
(Note 1) The parameter changeover is valid after the power is turned ON again.
(Note 2) Even if parameter "I_inch" is changed, the screen data (offset amount, etc.) will not be
automatically converted.
(Note 3) When the power is turned ON or resetting is performed, the status of the G20/G21 modal
depends on the "I_G20" parameter setting.
-6-
2 Input Command
2.3 Program Format
2.3 Program Format

2.3.1 Character Code
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The command information used in this CNC system consists of alphanumerics and symbols which
are collectively known as characters.
These characters are expressed as combinations of 8-bit data inside the NC unit.
The expressions formed in this way are called codes, and this CNC system uses shift JIS codes.
The characters which are valid in this CNC system are listed below.
Character Remarks
0 to 9 Always significant
A to Z Always significant
+ Always significant
– Always significant
. Always significant
, Always significant
/ Always significant
% Always significant
CR Always significant
LF/NL Always significant
( Always significant
) Always significant
: Always significant
# Always significant
∗ Always significant
= Always significant
[ Always significant
] Always significant
SP Always significant
! Always significant
$ Always significant
BS An error results during operation (except when the character is part of a comment).
HT An error results during operation (except when the character is part of a comment).
& An error results during operation (except when the character is part of a comment).
'(Apostrophe) An error results during operation (except when the character is part of a comment).
; An error results during operation (except when the character is part of a comment).
< An error results during operation (except when the character is part of a comment).
> An error results during operation (except when the character is part of a comment).
? An error results during operation (except when the character is part of a comment).
@ An error results during operation (except when the character is part of a comment).
" An error results during operation (except when the character is part of a comment).
DEL Always ignored
NULL Always ignored
-7-
2 Input Command
2.3 Program Format
2.3.2 Program Format
2.3.2.1 Format 1 for Lathe

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system { { { { { { { {
The G-code of L system is selected by parameter.

This specification manual explains the G function with G-code series 3 as standard.
2.3.2.3 Special Format for Lathe

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system { { { { { { { {
2.3.2.4 Format 1 for Machining Center

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system – – – – – – – –
2.3.2.7 Special Format for MELDAS

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system { { { { { { { {
The formats of the turning fixed cycles (G77 to G79), multiple repetitive turning fixed cycles (G71 to
G76) and drilling fixed cycles (G80 to G89) can be switched to the MELDAS special formats.
-8-
2 Input Command
2.4 Command Value
2.4 Command Value

2.4.1 Decimal Point Input I, II
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
There are two types of the decimal point input commands and they can be selected by parameter.
(1) Decimal point input type I (When parameter #1078 Decpt2 is 0.)
When axis coordinates and other data are supplied in machining program commands, the
assignment of the program data can be simplified by using the decimal point input. The minimum
digit of a command not using a decimal point is the same as the least command unit.
Usable addresses can be applied not only to axis coordinate values but also to speed commands
and dwell commands.
The decimal point position serves as the millimeter unit in the metric mode, as the inch unit in the
inch mode and as the second unit in a time designation of dwell command.
(2) Decimal point input type II (When parameter #1078 Decpt2 is 1.)
As opposed to type I, when there is no decimal point, the final digit serves as the millimeter unit in
the metric mode, as the inch unit in the inch mode and as the second unit in the time designation.
The "." (point) must be added when commands below the decimal point are required.
Unit interpretation (for metric system)

Type I Type II
G00 X100. Y-200.5 X100mm, Y-200.5mm ←
G1 X100 F20. X100µm, F20mm/min X100mm, F20mm/min
Y200 F100 (*1) Y200µm, F100mm/min Y200mm, F100mm/min
G4 X1.5 Dwell 1.5 s ←
X2 2ms 2s
(*1) The F unit is mm/min for either type (inch system : inch/min).
-9-
2 Input Command
2.4 Command Value
2.4.2 Absolute / Incremental Command

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
(1) M system
When axis coordinate data is issued in a machining program command, either the incremental
command method (G91) that commands a relative distance from the current position or the
absolute command method (G90) that moves to a designated position in a predetermined
coordinate system can be selected.
The absolute and incremental commands can be both used in one block, and are switched with
G90 or G91. However, the arc radius designation (R) and arc center designation (I, J, K) always
use incremental designations.
G90 ... Absolute command (absolute value command)
G91 ... Incremental command (incremental value command)
These G codes can be commanded multiple times in one block.
Example G90 X100. G91 Y200. G90 Z300. ;

Absolute value Incremental value Absolute value
(Note 1) As with the memory command, if there is no G90/G91 designation in the MDI command,
the previously executed modal will be followed.
(Incremental value command) (Absolute value command)
G 91 X 100. Y100. ; G 90 X 100. Y100. ;

End
point
Y100. Y100. End point
Y100.
Current position X 100. Current position
Program coordinate
(0, 0) X 100. (0, 0) X100.
- 10 -
2 Input Command
2.4 Command Value
(2) L system
When axis coordinate data is issued in a machining program command, either the incremental
command method that commands a relative distance from the current position or the absolute
command method that moves to a designated position in a predetermined coordinate system can
be selected.
When issuing an incremental value command, the axis address to be commanded as the
incremental axis name is registered in the parameter. However, the arc radius designation (R) and
arc center designation (I, J, K) always use incremental designations.
Absolute command (absolute value command) ... X, Z
Incremental command (incremental value command) ... U, W
Example G00 X100. W200. ;

Absolute value Incremental value
(Incremental value command) (Absolute value command)
G 00 U – u1 W – w1 ; G 00 X x1 Z z1 ;
Current position
X X Current position
End point
u1
2 x1
Z
End point w1
z1
Z
(0,0)
The above drawing shows the case The above drawing shows the case
for the diameter command. for the diameter command.
(Note) In addition to the above command method using axis addresses, to switch the absolute
value command/incremental value command, the command method using G90/91 can
also be selected using a parameter.
- 11 -
2 Input Command
2.4 Command Value
2.4.3 Diameter/Radius Designation

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system { { { { { { { {
For command value, the radius designation or diameter designation can be changed over with
parameters.
When the diameter designation is selected, the scale of the length of the selected axis is doubled.
(For instance, an actual length of 1 mm will be treated as 2 mm.)
This function is used when programming the work dimensions on a lathe as diameters. Changing
over from the diameter designation to the radius designation or vice versa can be set separately for
each axis.
X-axis radius designation X-axis diameter designation

X X
u4
x6
u4
x6
Z Z
Coordinate zero point Coordinate zero point
The difference in the diameter designation and radius designation is shown below.
Absolute value command Incremental value command

Radius designation Diameter designation Radius designation Diameter designation
Actual movement Actual movement Actual movement Actual movement
amount = x1 amount = 2 x1 amount = u1 amount = 2 u1
- 12 -
2 Input Command
2.5 Command Value and Setting Value Range

2.5.1 Command Value and Setting Value Range
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
<Brief summary of format details>

[M system]
Rotary axis Rotary axis
Metric command Inch command
(Metric command) (Inch command)
Program number 08 ← ← ←
Sequence number N5 ← ← ←
Preparatory function G3/G21 ← ← ←
0.001(°) mm/
X+53 Y+53 Z+53 α+53 X+44 Y+44 Z+44 α+44 X+53 Y+53 Z+53 α+53 X+53 Y+53 Z+53 α+53
Movement 0.0001 inch
axis 0.0001(°) mm/
X+44 Y+44 Z+44 α+44 X+35 Y+35 Z+35 α+35 X+44 Y+44 Z+44 α+44 X+44 Y+44 Z+44 α+44
0.00001 inch
0.001(°) mm/ I+44 J+44 K+44 R+44
Arc and I+53 J+53 K+53 R+53 I+44 J+44 K+44 R+44 I+53 J+53 K+53 R+53
0.0001 inch (Note 5)
cutter
0.0001(°) mm/ I+35 J+35 K+35 R+35
radius I+44 J+44 K+44 R+44 I+35 J+35 K+35 R+35 I+44 J+44 K+44 R+44
0.00001 inch (Note 5)
0.001(°) mm/
X+53/P+8 ← ← ←
0.0001 inch
Dwell
0.0001(°) mm/
X+53/P+8 ← ← ←
0.00001 inch
F44(Feed per minute)
0.001(°) mm/ F63(Feed per minute) F44(Feed per minute) F63(Feed per minute)
F34(Feed per revolution)
0.0001 inch F43(Feed per revolution) F34(Feed per revolution) F43(Feed per revolution)
Feed (Note 6)
function F35(Feed per minute)
0.0001 (°) mm/ F54(Feed per minute) F35(Feed per minute) F54(Feed per minute)
(Note 6)
Tool offset H3 D3 ← ← ←
Miscellaneous function (M) M8 ← ← ←
Spindle function (S) S8 ← ← ←
Tool function (T) T8 ← ← ←
2nd miscellaneous function A8/B8/C8 ← ← ←
Subprogram P8 H5 L4 ← ← ←
0.001(°) mm/
R+53 Q53 P8 L4 ← ← ←
Fixed 0.0001 inch
cycle 0.0001(°) mm/
R+44 Q44 P8 L4 ← ← ←
0.00001 inch
- 13 -
2 Input Command
[L system]
Rotary axis Rotary axis
(Metric command) (Inch command)
Program number 08 ← ← ←
Sequence number N5 ← ← ←
Preparatory function G3/G21 ← ← ←
0.001(°) mm/
X+53 Z+53 α+53 X+44 Z+44 α+44 X+53 Z+53 α+53 X+53 Z+53 α+53
0.0001 inch
Movement 0.0001(°) mm/
axis X+44 Z+44 α+44 X+35 Z+35 α+35 X+44 Z+44 α+44 X+44 Z+44 α+44
0.00001 inch
0.00001(°) mm/
X+35 Z+35 α+35 – X+35 Z+35 α+35 –
0.000001 inch
0.001(°) mm/ I+44 K+44 R+44
I+53 K+53 R+53 I+44 K+44 R+44 I+53 K+53 R+53
0.0001 inch (Note 5)
Arc and
0.0001(°) mm/ I+35 K+35 R+35
cutter I+44K+44 R+44 I+35 K+35 R+35 I+44 K+44 R+44
0.00001 inch (Note 5)
radius
0.0001(°) mm/
0.00001 inch
I+35 K+35 R+35 – I+35 K+35 R+35 –
0.001(°) mm/
X+53/P+8 ← ← ←
0.0001 inch
0.0001(°) mm/
Dwell X+53/P+8 ← ← ←
0.00001 inch
0.0001(°) mm/
0.00001 inch
X+53/P+8 – X+53/P+8 –
F44(Feed per minute)
(Note 6)
Feed F35(Feed per minute)
function F25(Feed per revolution)
(Note 6)
0.00001(°) mm/ F45(Feed per minute) F45(Feed per minute)
0.000001 inch F25(Feed per revolution) – F25(Feed per revolution) –
Tool offset T1/T2 ← ← ←
Miscellaneous function (M) M8 ← ← ←
Spindle function (S) S8 ← ← ←
Tool function (T) T8 ← ← ←
2nd miscellaneous function A8/B8/C8 ← ← ←
Subprogram P8 H5 L4 ← ← ←
0.001(°) mm/
R+53 Q53 P8 L4 ← ← ←
0.0001 inch
Fixed 0.0001(°) mm/
cycle
R+44 Q44 P8 L4 ← ← ←
0.00001 inch
0.00001(°) mm/
0.000001 inch
R+35 Q35 P8 L4 – R+35 Q35 P8 L4 –
(Note 1) α indicates the additional axis address, such as A, B or C.

(Note 2) The No. of digits check for a word is carried out with the maximum number of digits of
that address.
(Note 3) Numerals can be used without the leading zeros.
(Note 4) The meanings of the details are as follows :
Example 1 : 08 : 8-digit program number
Example 2 : G21 : Dimension G is 2 digits to the left of the decimal point, and 1 digit to
the right.
Example 3 : X+53 : Dimension X uses + or - sign and represents 5 digits to the left of the
decimal point and 3 digits to the right.
For example, the case for when the X axis is positioned (G00) to the
45.123 mm position in the absolute value (G90) mode is as follows :
G00 X45.123 ;
3 digits below the decimal point
5 digits above the decimal point, so it's +00045, but
the leading zeros and the mark (+) have been
omitted.
G0 is possible, too.
- 14 -
2 Input Command
(Note 5) If an arc is commanded using a rotary axis and linear axis while inch commands are
being used, the degrees will be converted into 0.1 inches for interpolation.
(Note 6) While inch commands are being used, the rotary axis speed will be in increments of 10
degrees.
Example : With the F1. (per-minute-feed) command, this will become the 10
degrees/minute command.
(Note 7) The decimal places below the decimal point are ignored when a command, such as an S
command, with an invalid decimal point has been assigned with a decimal point.
(Note 8) This format is the same for the value input from the memory, MDI or setting and display
unit.
(Note 9) Command the program No. in an independent block. Command the program NO. in the
head block of the program.
- 15 -
2 Input Command
<List of Command Value and Setting Value Ranges>

Linear axis Rotary axis
Input unit: mm Input unit: inch Degree (°)
Minimum input setting unit 0.001/0.0001/0.00001 0.0001/0.00001 0.001/0.0001/0.00001
Maximum stroke ±99999.999 mm ±9999.9999 inch ±99999.999 °
(Value on machine coordinate ±9999.9999 mm ±999.99999 inch ±9999.9999 °
system) ±999.99999 mm ±999.99999 °
Maximum command value ±99999.999 mm ±9999.9999 inch ±99999.999 °
±9999.9999 mm ±999.99999 inch ±9999.9999 °
±999.99999 mm ±999.99999 °
Rapid traverse rate 1 to 1000000 mm/min 1 to 39370 inch/min 1 to 1000000 °/min
(Including during dry run) 1 to 100000 mm/min 1 to 3937 inch/min 1 to 100000 °/min
1 to 10000 mm/min 1 to 10000 °/min
M system cutting feed rate 0.01 to 1000000 mm/min 0.001 to 100000 inch/min 0.01 to 1000000 °/min
(Including during dry run) 0.001 to 100000 mm/min 0.0001 to 10000 inch/min 0.001 to 100000 °/min
– –
L system cutting feed rate 0.001 to 1000000 mm/min 0.0001 to 39370.0787 inch/min 0.001 to 1000000 °/min
(Including during dry run) 0.0001 to 100000 mm/min 0.00001 to 3937.00787 inch/min 0.0001 to 100000 °/min
0.00001 to 10000 mm/min 0.00001 to 10000 °/min
M system synchronous feed 0.001 to 999.999 mm/rev 0.0001 to 999.9999 inch/rev 0.01 to 999.99 °/rev
0.0001 to 99.9999 mm/rev 0.00001 to 99.99999 inch/rev 0.001 to 99.999 °/rev
– –
L system synchronous feed 0.0001 to 999.9999 mm/rev 0.000001 to 99.999999 inch/rev 0.0001 to 999.9999 °/rev
0.00001 to 99.99999 mm/rev 0.0000001 to 9.9999999 inch/rev 0.00001 to 99.99999 °/rev
0.000001 to 9.999999 mm/rev 0.000001 to 9.999999 °/rev
2nd to 4th reference point ±99999.999 mm ±9999.9999 inch ±99999.999 °
offset (value on machine ±9999.9999 mm ±999.99999 inch ±9999.9999 °
coordinate system) ±999.99999 mm ±999.99999 °
Tool offset amount (shape) ±999.999 mm ±99.9999 inch
±99.9999 mm ±9.99999 inch
±9.99999 mm
Tool offset amount (wear) ±9999.999 mm ±9.9999 inch
±999.9999 mm ±0.99999 inch
±99.99999 mm
Incremental feed amount 0.001 mm/pulse 0.0001 inch/pulse 0.001 °/pulse
0.0001 mm/pulse 0.00001 inch/pulse 0.0001 °/pulse
0.00001 mm/pulse 0.00001 °/pulse
Handle feed amount 0.001 mm/pulse 0.0001 inch/pulse 0.001 °/pulse
0.0001 mm/pulse 0.00001 inch/pulse 0.0001 °/pulse
0.00001 mm/pulse 0.00001 °/pulse
Soft limit range –99999.999 mm to +99999.999 mm –9999.9999 inch to +9999.9999 inch 1 to 359.999 °
(value on machine coordinate –9999.9999 mm to +9999.9999 mm –999.99999 inch to +999.99999 inch 1 to 359.9999 °
system) –999.99999 mm to +999.99999 mm 1 to 359.99999 °
Dwell time 0 to 99999.999 s 0 to 99999.999 s
Backlash compensation 0 to ±9999 pulse 0 to ±9999 pulse 0 to ±9999 pulse
amount
Pitch error compensation 0 to ±9999 pulse 0 to ±9999 pulse 0 to ±9999 pulse
M system thread lead (F) 0.001 to 999.999 mm/rev 0.0001 to 99.9999 inch/rev
0.0001 to 99.9999 mm/rev 0.00001 to 9.99999 inch/rev
–
M system thread lead 0.00001 to 999.99999 mm/rev 0.000001 to 39.370078 inch/rev
(Precise E) 0.000001 to 99.999999 mm/rev 0.000001 to 3.937007 inch/rev
–
L system thread lead (F) 0.0001 to 999.9999 mm/rev 0.000001 to 99.999999 inch/rev
0.00001 to 99.99999 mm/rev 0.0000001 to 9.9999999 inch/rev
0.000001 to 9.999999 mm/rev
L system thread lead 0.00001 to 999.99999 mm/rev 0.000010 to 9.9999999 inch/rev
(Precise E) 0.000001 to 99.999999 mm/rev 0.0000010 to 0.99999999 inch/rev
0.0000001 to 99.9999999 mm/rev
(Note 1) The second line in the table applies when the least setting increment is 0.001, 0.0001
from the first line. The third line applies when the least setting increment is 0.001, 0.0001,
0.00001 from the first line.
- 16 -
3 Positioning / Interpolation
3.1 Positioning
3.1 Positioning
3.1.1 Positioning
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function carries out positioning at high speed using rapid traverse with the movement
command value given in the program.
G00 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ; (Also possible for additional axes A, B, C, U, V, W simultaneously)
(x1, y1, z1: numerical values denoting the position data)
The above command positions the tool by rapid traverse. The tool path takes the shortest distance
to the end point in the form of a straight line.
For details on the rapid traverse feed rate of the NC, refer to the section entitled "Rapid Traverse
Rate". Since the actual rapid traverse feed rate depends on the machine, refer to the specifications
of the machine concerned.
(1) The rapid traverse feed rate for each axis can be set independently with parameters.
(2) The number of axes which can be driven simultaneously depends on the specifications
(number of simultaneously controlled axes). The axes can be used in any combination within
this range.
(3) The feed rate is controlled within the range that it does not exceed the rapid traverse rate of
each axis and so that the shortest time is taken. (Linear type)
Parameter setting enables movement at the rapid traverse rates of the respective axes
independently for each axis. In this case, the tool path does not take the form of a straight line
to the end point. (Non-Linear type)
(Example) Linear type (Moves lineary (Example) Non-linear type (Each axis moves
to the end point.) with each parameter speed.)
G 00 G 91 X 100. Y 100. ; G 00 G 91 X 100. Y 100. ;
Y End point Y
End point
100. 100.
Current position 100. Current position 100.
X
X
(4) The tool is always accelerated at the start of the program command block and decelerated at
the end of the block.
- 17 -
3.1 Positioning
3.1.2 Unidirectional Positioning

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
The G60 command always moves the tool to the final position in a direction determined with
parameters.
The tool can be positioned without backlash.
G60 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ; (Also possible for additional axes A, B, C, U, V, W simultaneously)
(x1, y1, z1: numerical values denoting the position data)
With the above command, the tool is first moved to a position distanced from the end point position
by an amount equivalent to the creep distance (parameter setting) and then moved to its final
position.
For details on the rapid traverse feed rate of the NC, refer to the section entitled "Rapid Traverse
Rate". Since the actual rapid traverse feed rate depends on the machine, refer to the specifications
of the machine concerned.
Positioning to the final point is shown below (when this positioning is in the "+" direction.)
+ –
(Example)
G60 G91 X100. Y100. ; 1. The rapid traverse rate for each axis is the value
Interim point set with parameters as the G00 speed.
2. The vector speed to the interim point is the value
End point
produced by combining the distance and
respective speeds.
Y100. 3. The creep distance of the distance between the
interim and end points can be set independently
for each axis by "parameters".
Current position
X100.
- 18 -
3 Positioning/Interpolation
3.2 Linear/Circular Interpolation
(Note 1) The processing of the above pattern will be followed even for the machine lock and Z-
axis command cancel.
(Note 2) The creep distance is moved with rapid traverse.
(Note 3) G60 is valid even for positioning in drilling in the fixed cycle.
(Note 4) When the mirror image function is on, the tool will be moved in the reverse direction by
mirror image as far as the interim position, but operation over the creep distance with the
final advance will not be affected by the mirror image.
3.2.1 Linear Interpolation
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Linear interpolation is a function that moves a tool linearly by the movement command value
supplied in the program at the cutting feed rate designated by the F code.
G01 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ff1 ; (Also possible for additional axes A, B, C, U, V, W
simultaneously)
(x1, y1, z1 : numerical values denoting the position data;
f1 : numerical value denoting the feed rate data)
Linear interpolation is executed by the above command at the f1 feed rate. The tool path takes the
shortest distance to the end point in the form of a straight line.
For details on the f1 command values for NC, refer to the section entitled "Cutting Feed Rate".
Since the actual cutting feed rate depends on the machine, refer to the specifications of the
machine concerned.
(Example)
G01 G91 X100. Y100. F120 ; 1. The cutting feed rate command
moves the tool in the vector direction.
Y 2. The component speeds of each axis
End point are determined by the proportion of
respective command values to the
Feed rate actual movement distance with linear
(120mm/min)
100. interpolation.
(85mm/min)
Current 100. (85mm/min)

position
X
(1) The number of axes which can be driven simultaneously depends on the specifications
(number of simultaneously controlled axes). The axes can be used in any combination within
this range.
(2) The feed rate is controlled so that it does not exceed the cutting feed rate clamp of each axis.
(3) When a rotary axis has been commanded in the same block, it is treated as a linear axis in
degree(°) units (1° = 1mm), and linear interpolation is performed.
- 19 -
3.2.2 Circular Interpolation (Center / Radius Designation)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
(1) Circular interpolation with I, J, K commands

This function moves a tool along a circular arc on the plane selected by the plane selection G code
with movement command value supplied in the program.
G02(G03) Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 Ff1 ; (Also possible for additional axes A, B, C, U, V, W)
G02, G03 : Arc rotation direction
Xx1, Yy1 : End point coordinate values
Ii1, Jj1 : Arc center values
Ff1 : Feed rate
The above commands move the tool along the circular arc at the f1 feed rate. The tool moves along
a circular path, whose center is the position from the start point designated by distance "i1" in the X-
axis direction and distance "j1" in the Y-axis direction, toward the end point.
The direction of the arc rotation is specified by

G02 or G03.
G02: Clockwise (CW)
G03: Counterclockwise (CCW)
The plane is selected by G17, G18 or G19.
G17: XY plane Y G17 X G18
G18: ZX plane
G02 G02
G19: YZ plane
G03 G03
(Example) See below for examples of circular
X Z
commands.
Y
Z G19
Start point G02
F
G03
I, J End point Y
Center
X
(a) The axes that can be commanded simultaneously are the two axes for the selected plane.
(b) The feed rate is controlled so that the tool always moves at a speed along the circumference
of the circle.
(c) Circular interpolation can be commanded within a range extending from 0° to 360°.
(d) The max. value of the radius can be set up to six digits above the decimal point.
(Note 1) The arc plane is always based on the G17, G18 or G19 command. If a command is
issued with two addresses which do not match the plane, an alarm will occur.
(Note 2) The axes configuring a plane can be designated by parameters. Refer to the section
entitled "Plane Selection".
- 20 -
(2) R-specified circular interpolation

Besides the designation of the arc center coordinates using the above-mentioned I, J and K
commands, arc commands can also be issued by designating the arc radius directly.
G02(G03) Xx1 Yy1 Rr1 Ff1 ; (Also possible for additional axes A, B, C, U, V, W )
Xx1, Yy1 : End point coordinate values
Rr1 : Arc radius
Ff1 : Feed rate
G02 or G03 is used to designate the direction of the arc rotation.

The arc plane is designated by G17, G18 or G19.
The arc center is on the bisector which orthogonally intersects the segment connecting the start
and end points, and the point of intersection with the circle, whose radius has been designated with
the start point serving as the center, is the center coordinate of the arc command.
When the sign of the value of R in the command program is positive, the command will be for an
arc of 180° or less; when it is negative, it will be for an arc exceeding 180°.
(Example)
G02 G91 X100. Y100. R100. F120 ;
Y
Arc end point coordinates

Feed rate: (X, Y)
120mm/min
R100.
Current position
(arc start point)
(a) The axes that can be commanded simultaneously are the two axes for the selected plane.
(b) The feed rate is controlled so that the tool always moves at a speed along the circumference
of the circle.
(Note 1) The arc plane is always based on the G17, G18 or G19 command. If a command is
issued with two addresses which do not match the plane, an alarm will occur.
- 21 -
3.2.3 Helical Interpolation

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – –
With this function, any two of three axes intersecting orthogonally are made to perform circular
interpolation while the third axis performs linear interpolation in synchronization with the arc rotation.
This simultaneous 3-axis control can be exercised to machine large-diameter screws or 3-
dimensional cams.
G17 G02(G03) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Pp1 Ff1 ;

G17 : Arc plane
Xx1, Yy1 : End point coordinate values for arc
Zz1 : End point coordinate of linear axis
Ii1, Jj1 : Arc center coordinates
Pp1 : Pitch No.
Ff1 : Feed rate
(1) The arc plane is designated by G17, G18 or G19.

(2) G02 or G03 is used to designate the direction of the arc rotation.
(3) Absolute or incremental values can be assigned for the arc end point coordinates and the end
point coordinates of the linear axis, but incremental values must be assigned for the arc center
coordinates.
(4) The linear interpolation axis is the other axis which is not included in the plane selection.
(5) Command the speed in the component direction that represents all the axes combined for the
feed rate.
Pitch l1 is obtained by the formula below.

l1 = z1/((2π • p1 + θ)/2π)
θ = θe – θs = arctan (ye/xe) – arctan (ys/xs)
Where xs, ys are the start point coordinates (0 ≤ θ < 2π)
xe, ye are the end point coordinates
The combination of the axes which can be commanded simultaneously depends on the
specifications. The axes can be used in any combination within this range. The feed rate is
controlled so that the tool always moves at a speed along the circumference of the circle.
- 22 -
(Example)
G91 G17 G02 X0. Y200. Z100. I–100. J100. F120 ;
Z
Command program path
Y
End
point
End point
X
W
J100 I-100
Start point Y
Start point
X XY plane projection path in command program
(Note 1) Helical sharps are machined by assigning linear commands for one axis which is not a
circular interpolation axis using an orthogonal coordinate system. It is also possible to
assign these commands to two or more axes which are not circular interpolation axes.
Z
When a simultaneous 4-axis command is used with ●
V End
the V axis as the axis parallel to the Y axis, helical point
interpolation will result for a cylinder which is
inclined as shown in the figure on the right. In other
words, linear interpolation of the Z and V axes is
carried out in synchronization with the circular
interpolation on the XY plane.
● Y
Start point
X
- 23 -
3.2.4 Spiral / Conical Interpolation

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
This function interpolates arcs where the start point and endpoint are not on the circumference of
the same circle into spiral shapes.
G17 G02.1(G03.1) Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 Pp1 Ff1 ;

G17 : Arc plane
G02.1, G03.1 : Arc rotation direction
Xx1, Yy1 : End point coordinate
Ii1, Jj1 : Arc center value
Pp1 : Pitch number
Ff1 : Feed rate
The circular interpolation operation is performed at the feed rate f1 by the commands listed above.
The tool draws a spiral arc path whose center is at the position from the start point which is
designated by distance i1 for the X-axis direction and distance j1 for the Y-axis direction as the tool
moves toward the end point.
The arc plane is designated by G17, G18 or G19.

G17: XY plane
G18: ZX plane
G19: YZ plane
The direction of the arc rotation is designated by G2.1 or G3.1.

G2.1: Clockwise (CW)
G3.1: Counterclockwise (CCW)
The pitch number (number of rotations) is designated by p1.

By assigning zero to p1, the pitch number designation can be omitted in this case, the
interpolation is obtained as a spiral rotation of less than one full turn. Assigning 1 to p1 yields
a spiral rotation of more than one full turn but less than two full turns.
Y
Example: G91 G17 G01 X60. F500 ;
Y140. ;
G2.1 X60. Y0 I100. P1 F300 ;
End
G01 X-120 ; 140. point Center
G90 Start
point
G17 G01 X60. F500 ;
Y140.;
G2.1 X120. Y140. I100. P1 F300 ; X60.
G01 X0 ;
I100.
W 60. 160. X
- 24 -
(1) The combination of the axes which can be commanded simultaneously depends on the
specifications. Any combination can be used within the specified range.
(2) The feed rate is a constant tangential rate.
(Note 1) This function cannot be used in combination with a tool radius compensation command
(G41, G42).
(Note 2) The arc plane is always based on the G17, G18 or G19 command. Arc control is
performed on a plane by the G17, G18 or G19 command even when two addresses
which are not on any one plane are designated.
Example: Y
XY plane
When an axis other than the ones for
the spiral interpolation plane has been
X
designated at the same time, the other W
axis will also be interpolated in
synchronization with the spiral
interpolation.
G17 G91 G2.1 X100. Z150. I150. Z Z XZ plane
P3 F500 ;
In the example given above, truncated X
X
cone interpolation is performed. W
In the case of command format type 2

Spiral interpolation
G17 G02(G03) Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 Qq1/Ll1 Ff1 ;

G17 : Arc plane
Xx1, Yy1 : End point coordinate
Ii1, Jj1 : Arc center values
Qq1 : Incremental/decremental amount of radius per spiral rotation
Ll1 : Pitch number
Ff1 : Feed rate
• Relation between Q and L

L = ⎜(arc end point radius – arc start point radius) ⎜/ ⎜Q ⎜
• Q takes precedence if both Q and L have been designated at the same time.
Conical interpolation
G17 G02(G03) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 /Qq /Ll1 Ff1 ;
Zz1 : End point coordinate in height direction
Kk1 : Amount by which height is incremented or decremented per spiral rotation
Qq1 : Amount by which radius is incremented or decremented per spiral rotation
Ll1 : Pitch number
Ff1 : Feed rate
• Relation between L and (I, J) K

L = | Height | / | Amount by which height is incremented or decremented (I, J, K) |
• Q takes precedence over K which in turn takes precedence over L if Q, K and L have been
designated at the same time.
- 25 -
3.2.5 Cylindrical Interpolation

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆
This function transfers the shape that is on the cylinder's side surface (shape yielded by the
cylindrical coordinate system) onto a plane, and when the transferred shape is designated in the
program in the form of plane coordinates, the shape is converted into a movement along the linear
and rotary axes of the original cylinder coordinates, and the contours are controlled by means of
the CNC unit during machining.
Since the programming can be performed for the shapes produced by transferring the side surfaces
of the cylinders, this function is useful when it comes to machining cylindrical cams and other such
parts.
Program coordinate plane
Z axis
C axis
X axis
C axis
Cylindrical interpolation
machining
Z axis
Cylinder radius value
(1) Cylindrical interpolation mode start

(G07.1 name of rotary axis cylinder radius value;)
Cylindrical interpolation is performed between the rotary axis designated in the G07.1 block
and any other linear axis.
(a) Linear interpolation or circular interpolation can be designated in the cylindrical

interpolation mode. However, assign the G19 command (plane selection command)
immediately before the G07.1 block.
(b) The coordinates can be designated either in absolute values or incremental values.
(c) Tool radius compensation can be applied to the program commands. Cylindrical
interpolation is performed for the path after tool radius compensation.
(d) For the feed rate, designate a tangential rate over the cylinder transfer surface using the F
command.
The F rate is in either mm/min or inch/mm units.
(2) Cylindrical interpolation mode cancel

(G07.1 name of rotary axis 0;)
If "C" is the name of the rotary axis, the cylindrical interpolation cancel mode is established
with the command below.
G07.1 C0 ;
- 26 -
3.2.6 Polar Coordinate Interpolation

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆
This function converts the commands programmed by the orthogonal coordinate axes into
rectilinear axis movements (tool movements) and rotary axis movements (workpiece rotation) to
control the contours. It is useful for cutting linear cutouts on the outside diameter of the workpiece,
grinding cam shafts, etc.
X axis
C axis
Z axis
Hypothetical axis Polar coordinate interpolation

plane (G17 plane)
Fig. 1 Diagram explaining polar coordinate interpolation axes
(1) Polar coordinate interpolation mode

(G12.1)
The polar coordinate interpolation mode is established by designating the G12.1 command.
The plane (hereafter referred to as the "polar coordinate interpolation plane"), for which the
linear axis will be first orthogonal axis and the hypothetical axis at right angles to the linear axis
will be the second axis, is selected.
Polar coordinate interpolation is performed on this plane.
(a) Linear interpolation and circular interpolation can be designated in the polar coordinate
interpolation mode.
(b) Either absolute values or incremental values can be designated.
(c) Tool radius compensation can be applied to the program commands. Polar coordinate
interpolation is performed for the path after tool radius compensation.
(d) For the feed rate, designate a tangential rate on the polar coordinate interpolation plane
(orthogonal coordinate system) using the F command.
The F rate is in either mm/min or inch/mm units.
(2) Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode

(G13.1)
The polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode is established by designating the G13.1
command.
- 27 -
3.2.7 Milling Interpolation

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
When a lathe with linear axes (X, Z axes) and rotary axis (C axis) serving as the control axes is to
perform milling at a workpiece end face or in the longitudinal direction of the workpiece, this
function uses the hypothetical axis Y which is at right angles to both the X and Z axes to enables
the milling shape to be programmed as the X, Y and Z orthogonal coordinate system commands.
With this function, the workpiece can be treated as a cylinder with radius X, and commands can be
designated on the plane formed by transferring the cylinder side surface instead. With milling
interpolation, the commands programmed by the orthogonal coordinate system are converted into
linear axis and rotary axis movements (workpiece rotation) to control the contours.
Z
C
Y (Hypothetical axis)
G12.1 ; Milling mode ON

G13.1 ; Milling mode OFF (Turning mode)
G16 (Y-Z cylindrical plane) G17 (X-Y plane) G19 (Y-Z plane)
X X
X
Z Z Z
Y Y
Y
Plane on which radius X cylinder X-Y plane in XYZ orthogonal Y-Z plane in XYZ orthogonal
is developed. coordinate system. coordinate system.
Select to machine the cylindrical Use this to machine the Select this to machine a plane of a
plane of a workpiece. workpiece end face. cylinder cut in the longitudinal
direction.
- 28 -
3.3 Curve Interpolation
3.3.2 Exponential Interpolation

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
With this function, the rotary axis is changed into exponential functions vis-a-vis the linear axis
movements to achieve interpolation.
When exponential function interpolation is performed, linear interpolation is performed between the
other axes and the linear axis.
This makes it possible to machine tapered grooves (equal helix machining of tapered shapes)
whose helix angle is always constant.
The function can be used for slotting and grinding end mills and other tools.
[Equal helix machining of tapered shapes]
Z axis
(G00)
(G01)
(G01)
(G02.3/G03.3)
A axis
(rotary axis)
J1 J2 J3
X axis
(linear axis)
Helix angle : J1=J2=J3
[Relationship between linear and rotary axes)

X axis (linear axis)
CA
X=B (e -1)
{B, C = constants}
A axis
(rotary axis)
- 29 -
3.3.3 Spline Interpolation

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
This function automatically generates spline curves that smoothly pass through rows of dots
designated by a fine-segment machining program, and performs interpolation for the paths along
the curves. This enables high-speed and high-accuracy machining to be achieved.
To use this function, the high-accuracy control function (G08P1) is required.
- 30 -
4 Feed
4.1 Feed Rate
4 Feed
4.1 Feed Rate
4.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate (m/min)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
L system 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
[M system]
The rapid traverse rate can be set independently for each axis.
G00, G27, G28, G29, G30 and G60 are the effective commands for the rapid traverse rate.
Override can be applied to the rapid traverse rate using the external signal supplied.
• Rapid Traverse Rate setting range

Least input increment B C
Metric input 1~1000000 (mm/min, °/min) 1~100000 (mm/min, °/min)
Inch input 1~39370 (inch/min) 1~3937 (inch/min)
Least input increment B : 0.001 mm (0.0001 inch)
Least input increment C : 0.0001 mm (0.00001 inch)
[L system]
The rapid traverse rate can be set independently for each axis.
G00, G27, G28, G29, G30 and G53 are the effective commands for the rapid traverse rate.
Override can be applied to the rapid traverse rate using the external signal supplied.
• Rapid Traverse Rate setting range

Least input
B C D
increment
1~1000000 1~100000 1~10000
Metric input
(mm/min, °/min) (mm/min, °/min) (mm/min, °/min)
Inch input 1~39370 (inch/min) 1~3937 (inch/min) –
Least input increment D : 0.00001 mm
- 31 -
4 Feed
4.1 Feed Rate
4.1.2 Cutting Feed Rate (m/min)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
L system 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
[M system]
This function specifies the feed rate of the cutting commands, and a feed amount per spindle
rotation or feed amount per minute is commanded.
Once commanded, it is stored in the memory as a modal value. The feed rate modal value is
cleared to zero only when the power is turned ON.
The maximum cutting feed rate is clamped by the cutting feed rate clamp parameter (whose setting
range is the same as that for the cutting feed rate).
• Cutting Feed Rate setting range

Least input increment B C
Metric input 1~1000000 (mm/min, °/min) 1~100000 (mm/min, °/min)
Inch input 1~39370 (inch/min) 1~3937 (inch/min)
• Effective G-code commands for the cutting feed

G01, G02, G03, G2.1 G3.1 G33, etc. As to others, refer to the interpolation specifications.
[L system]
This function specifies the feed rate of the cutting commands, and a feed amount per spindle
rotation or feed amount per minute is commanded.
Once commanded, it is stored in the memory as a modal value. The feed rate modal is cleared to
zero only when the power is turned ON.
The maximum cutting feed rate is clamped by the cutting feed rate clamp parameter (whose setting
range is the same as that for the cutting feed rate).
• Cutting Feed Rate setting range

Least input
B C D
increment
1~1000000 1~100000 1~10000
Metric input
(mm/min, °/min) (mm/min, °/min) (mm/min, °/min)
Inch input 1~39370 (inch/min) 1~3937 (inch/min) –
Least input increment D : 0.00001 mm
• Effective G-code commands for the cutting feed

G01, G02, G03, G33, etc. As to others, refer to interpolation specifications.
- 32 -
4 Feed
4.1 Feed Rate
4.1.3 Manual Feed Rate (m/min)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
L system 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
The manual feed rates are designated as the feed rate in the jog mode or incremental feed mode
for manual operation and the feed rate during dry run ON for automatic operation. The manual feed
rates are set with external signals.
The manual feed rate signals from the PLC includes two methods, the code method and numerical
value method.
Which method to be applied is determined with a signal common to the entire system.
The signals used by these methods are common to all axes.
• Setting range under the code method
Metric input 0.00 to 14000.00 mm/min (31 steps)
Inch input 0.000 to 551.000 inch/min (31 steps)
• Setting range under the numerical value method

Metric input 0 to 1000000.00 mm/min in 0.01 mm/min increments
Inch input 0 to 39370 inch/min in 0.001 inch/min increments
Multiplication factor PCF1 and PCF2 are available with the numerical value setting method.
- 33 -
4 Feed
4.2 Feed Rate Input Methods

4.2.1 Feed per Minute
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
[M system]
By issuing the G94 command, the commands from that block are issued directly by the numerical
value following F as the feed rate per minute (mm/min, inch/min).
Metric input (mm)

Least input increment (B) 0.001 mm (C) 0.0001 mm
F command
without decimal point F1 = 1 mm/min F1 = 1 mm/min
increment
with decimal point F1. = 1 mm/min F1. = 1 mm/min
(mm/min)
Command range (mm/min) 0.01~1000000.000 0.001~100000.000
Inch input (inch)

Least input increment (B) 0.0001 inch (C) 0.00001 inch
F command
without decimal point F1 = 1 inch/min F1 = 1 inch/min
increment
with decimal point F1. = 1 inch/min F1. = 1 inch/min
(inch/min)
Command range (inch/min) 0.001~100000.0000 0.001~10000.0000
• When commands without a decimal point have been assigned, it is not possible to assign
commands under 1 mm/min (or 1 inch/min). To assign commands under 1 mm/min (or 1
inch/min), ensure that commands are assigned with a decimal point.
• The initial status after power-ON can be set to asynchronous feed (per-minute-feed) by setting
the "Initial synchronous feed" parameter (I_Sync) to OFF.
• The F command increments are common to the entire part system.
- 34 -
4 Feed
[L system]
value following F as the feed rate per minute (mm/min, inch/min).
Metric input (mm)

Least input increment (B) 0.001 mm (C) 0.0001 mm (D) 0.00001 mm
F without
command decimal point F1 = 1 mm/min F1 = 1 mm/min F1 = 1 mm/min
increment with decimal F1. = 1 mm/min F1. = 1 mm/min F1. = 1 mm/min
(mm/min) point
Command range 0.0001 0.00001
0.001~1000000.000
(mm/min) ~100000.0000 ~10000.00000
Inch input (inch)

F command
without decimal point F1 = 1 inch/min F1 = 1 inch/min
increment
with decimal point F1. = 1 inch/min F1. = 1 inch/min
(inch/min)
Command range (inch/min) 0.0001~39370.0787 0.00001~3937.00787
commands under 1 mm/min (or 1 inch/min). To assign commands under 1 mm/min (or 1
inch/min), ensure that commands are assigned with a decimal point.
- 35 -
4 Feed
4.2.2 Feed per Revolution

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ { { { {
value following F as the feed rate per spindle revolution (mm/revolution or inch/revolution).
The least command increment and command range of the feed rate designation F are as follows.
[M system]
Metric input (mm)
Least input increment (B) 0.001 mm (C) 0.0001 mm
F command
without decimal point F1 = 0.01 F1 = 0.01
increment
with decimal point F1. = 1 F1. = 1
(mm/rev)
Command range (mm/rev) 0.001~999.999 0.0001~99.9999
Inch input (inch)

F command
increment
(inch/rev)
Command range (inch/rev) 0.0001~999.9999 0.00001~99.99999
commands under 1 mm/min (or 1 inch/min).
• The F command increments are common to the entire part system.
[L system]
Metric input (mm)
Least input increment (B) 0.001 mm (C) 0.0001 mm (D) 0.00001 mm
F without
command decimal point F1 = 0.0001 F1 = 0.0001 F1 = 0.0001
increment with decimal F1. = 1 F1. = 1 F1. = 1
(mm/rev) point
Command range (mm/rev) 0.0001~999.999 0.00001~99.99999 0.000001~9.999999
Inch input (inch)

F command
increment
(inch/rev)
Command range (inch/rev) 0.000001~99.999999 0.0000001~9.9999999
commands under 1 mm/min (or 1 inch/min).
- 36 -
4 Feed
4.2.4 F 1-digit Feed

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When the "F1digt" parameter is ON, the feed rate registered by parameter in advance can be
assigned by designating a single digit following address F.
There are six F codes: F0 and F1 to F5. The rapid traverse rate is established when F0 is
designated which is the same as the G00 command. When one of the codes F1 to F5 is
designated, the cutting feed rate set to support the code serves as the valid rate command. When
a command higher than F5 is designated, it serves as a regular direct command with feed rate
value of 5 digits following address F.
When an F 1-digit command has been designated, the "In F 1-digit" external output signal is output.
When the programmed feed rate has been designated as an F 1-digit command, the feed rate can
be increased or reduced by turning the manual handle.
(Note) When using M64 and M64A, the feed rate cannot be increased or decreased using the
manual handle.
(1) Amount by which speed is varied by manual handle

Speed variation amount ∆F is expressed by the equation below:
FM ∆P : Handle pulses (±)

∆F = ∆P × FM : F1 to F5 upper limit (parameter setting)
K
K : Speed variation constant (parameter setting)
Example: When the feed rate is to be increased or reduced by 10 mm/min per manual handle
scale increment
If Fmax is 3600 mm/min, then: ∆F = 10 = 1 × 3600
K
Therefore, K = 360.
(2) Conditions under which F1-digit feed is valid

(a) The automatic operation must be selected.
(b) Automatic start must be underway.
(c) Cutting feed must be underway, and the F 1-digit feed rate must be designated.
(d) The F 1-digit valid parameter must be ON.
(e) The F 1-digit feed rate change valid signal must be ON.
(f) A dry run must not be in progress.
- 37 -
4 Feed
4.3 Override
4.3 Override
4.3.1 Rapid Traverse Override
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
(1) Type 1 (code method)

Four levels of override (1%, 25%, 50% and 100%) can be applied to manual or automatic rapid
traverse using the external input signal supplied.
(2) Type 2 (value setting method)

Override can be applied in 1% steps from 0% to 100% to manual or automatic rapid traverse
using the external input signal supplied.
(Note 1) Type 1 and type 2 can be selected by PLC processing.

(Note 2) A PLC must be built into the unit for type 2.
4.3.2 Cutting Feed Override

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {

Override can be applied in 10% steps from 0% to 300% to the feed rate command designated
in the machining program using the external input signal supplied.
Code method commands are assigned as combinations of Y bit signals from the PLC.
(2) Type 2 (value setting method)

Override can be applied in 1% steps from 0% to 327% to the feed rate command designated in
the machining program using the external input signal supplied.
(Note 1) A PLC must be built into the unit for type 2.
- 38 -
4 Feed
4.3 Override
4.3.3 2nd Cutting Feed Override

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Override can be further applied in 0.01% steps from 0% to 327.67% as a second stage override to
the feed rate after the cutting feed override has been applied.
(Note 1) A PLC must be built into the unit for this function.
4.3.4 Override Cancel

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
By turning on the override cancel external signal, the override is automatically set to 100% for the
cutting feed during an automatic operation mode (tape, memory and MDI).
(Note 1) The override cancel signal is not valid for manual operation.
(Note 2) When the cutting feed override or second cutting feed override is 0%, the 0% override
takes precedence and the override is not canceled.
(Note 3) The override cancel signal is not valid for rapid traverse.
- 39 -
4 Feed
4.4 Acceleration / Deceleration

4.4.1 Automatic Acceleration / Deceleration after Interpolation
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Acceleration/deceleration is applied to all commands automatically. The acceleration/deceleration

patterns are linear acceleration/deceleration, soft acceleration/deceleration, exponent function
acceleration/deceleration, exponent function acceleration/linear deceleration and any of which can
be selected by using a parameter.
For rapid traverse feed or manual feed, acceleration/deceleration is always made for each block,
and the time constant can be set for each axis separately.
Linear acceleration/deceleration Soft Exponential Exponential acceleration / linear

acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration deceleration
F F FC F
Tsr Tsr Tss Tss Tsc Tsc Tsc Tsr
(Note 1) The rapid traverse feed acceleration/deceleration patterns are also effective for the
following:
G00, G27, G28, G29, G30, rapid traverse feed in manual run, JOG, incremental feed,
return to reference position.
(Note 2) Acceleration/deceleration in handle feed mode is usually performed according to the
acceleration/deceleration pattern for cutting feed. However, a parameter can be specified
to select a pattern with no acceleration/deceleration (step).
- 40 -
4 Feed
Acceleration / Deceleration during Continuing Blocks
(1) Continuous G1 blocks
f2 f1
G1
0 The tool does not decelerate
f1 between blocks.
Tsc G1
Tsc
0 f2
Ts c G1 Tsc G1
(2) Continuous G1-G0 blocks
Tsr Tsr
G0 G0
G1 G1 G1 G1
Tsr Tsc Tsr Tsc G0

G0
If the G0 command direction is the same as that for G1, whether G1 is to be decelerated is selected
using a parameter.
If no deceleration is set, superposition is performed even when G0 is in the constant inclination
acceleration/deceleration state.
If the G0 command direction is the opposite of that for G1, G0 will be executed after G1 has
decelerated.
(In the case of two or more simultaneous axes, G0 will also be executed after G1 has decelerated
when the G0 command direction is the opposite of that for G1 for even one axis.)
4.4.2 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination Acceleration / Deceleration

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function performs acceleration and deceleration at a constant inclination during linear
acceleration/deceleration in the rapid traverse mode. Compared to the method of
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, the constant inclination acceleration/deceleration
method makes for improved cycle time.
Rapid traverse constant inclination acceleration/deceleration are valid only for a rapid traverse
command. Also, this function is effective only when the rapid traverse command
acceleration/deceleration mode is linear acceleration and linear deceleration.
The acceleration/deceleration patterns in the case where rapid traverse constant inclination
acceleration/deceleration are performed are as follows.
- 41 -
4 Feed
(1) When the interpolation distance is longer than the acceleration and deceleration distance
rapid
L
Next block
Ts Ts
Td
T
rapid : Rapid traverse rate L

T= +Ts
Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time rapid
constant
Td : Command deceleration check time Td = Ts + (0~1.7 ms)
θ : Acceleration/deceleration inclination
T : Interpolation time rapid
L : Interpolation distance θ = tan-1 ( )
Ts
(2) When the interpolation distance is shorter than the acceleration and deceleration distance
rapid: Rapid traverse rate

rapid Ts: Acceleration/deceleration time constant
Td: Command deceleration check time
θ : Acceleration/deceleration inclination
T: Interpolation time
L: Interpolation distance
Next block
L T = 2×√ Ts × L / rapid
θ Td =
T
2 + (0 ~ 1.7 ms)
Ts
rapid
Td θ = tan-1 ( )
Ts
T
The time required to perform a command deceleration check during rapid traverse constant
inclination acceleration/deceleration is the longest value among the rapid traverse deceleration
check times determined for each axis by the rapid traverse rate of commands executed
simultaneously, the rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant, and the interpolation
distance, respectively.
- 42 -
4 Feed
(3) 2-axis simultaneous interpolation (When linear interpolation is used, Tsx < Tsz, and Lx ≠ Lz)
When 2-axis simultaneous interpolation (linear interpolations) is performed during rapid traverse
constant inclination acceleration and deceleration, the acceleration (deceleration) time is the
longest value of the acceleration (deceleration) times determined for each axis by the rapid traverse
rate of commands executed simultaneously, the rapid traverse acceleration and deceleration time
constant, and the interpolation distance, respectively. Consequently, linear interpolation is
performed even when the axes have different acceleration and deceleration time constants.
rapid X
Lx Next block
θx
X axis
Tsx Tsx
Tdx
Tx
rapid Z
Lz
Next block
θZ
Z axis
Tsz Tsz
Tdz
Tz
When Tsz is greater than Tsx, Tdz is
also greater than Tdx, and Td = Tdz in
this block.
The program format of G0 (rapid traverse command) when rapid traverse constant inclination
acceleration/deceleration are executed is the same as when this function is invalid (time constant
acceleration/deceleration).
This function is valid only for G0 (rapid traverse).
- 43 -
4 Feed
4.4.3 Rapid Traverse Constant Inclination 3-Step Acceleration / Deceleration

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { – – – – – –
L system { { – – – – – –
The acceleration is normally calculated on the basis of speed/time when acceleration or

deceleration is to be performed. In actual fact, however, the time taken for the desired positioning
may increase due to changes (such as a reduction in the acceleration capability due to reduced
torque at high-speed rotation) in the acceleration caused by the characteristics of the motor.
To offset this, the acceleration in the high rotation speed range is set separately from what is set for
the low rotation speed range for a multi-step acceleration configuration. By so doing, the speed is
controlled to match the characteristics of the motor so that acceleration can be performed up to the
high rotation speed range while holding down the increase in the positioning time. This function is
valid only during rapid traverse inclined constant linear acceleration/deceleration and G0
interpolation.
(a) Case with 2-step

acceleration/deceleration
Motor
operation
Com-
mand v
Time which can
v be shortened
Acceleration/decele
ration that factors in
the motor operation t
(b) Case with 3-step

t
Case without 2- or 3-step

v Time which can
be shortened
- 44 -
4 Feed
4.5 Thread Cutting
4.5 Thread Cutting

4.5.1 Thread Cutting (Lead/Thread Number Designation)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system { { { { { { { {
(1) Lead designation

The thread cutting with designated lead are performed based on the synchronization signals from
the spindle encoder.
G33 Zz1 Qq1 Ff1/Ee1 ;
G33 : Thread command

Zz1 : Thread length
Qq1 : Shift angle ("q1" is the shift angle at thread cutting start 0 to 360°)
Ff1 : Thread lead
Ee1 : Thread lead (precise lead threads)
The tables below indicate the thread lead ranges.
[M system]

Command Command
increment F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) increment F (inch/rev) E (inch/rev)
(mm) (inch)
0.001 0.00001 0.0001 0.000001
0.001 0.0001
~999.999 ~999.99999 ~39.3700 ~39.370078
0.0001 0.000001 0.00001 0.000001
0.0001 0.00001
~99.9999 ~99.999999 ~3.93700 ~3.937007
[L system]

Command Command
increment F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) increment F (inch/rev) E (inch/rev)
(mm) (inch)
0.0001 0.00001 0.00001 0.000010
0.001 0.0001
~999.9999 ~999.99999 ~99.999999 ~9.9999999
0.00001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000010
0.0001 0.00001
~99.99999 ~99.99999 ~9.9999999 ~0.99999999
The axis direction characterized by a large movement serves as the reference for the lead.
- 45 -
4 Feed
4.5 Thread Cutting
(2) Thread number designation

Inch threads are cut by designating the number of threads per inch with the E address.
Whether the E command is a thread number designation or lead designation is selected with the
parameters.
G33 Zz1 Qq1 Ee1 ;
G33 : Thread command

Zz1 : Thread length
Qq1 : Shift angle ("q1" is the shift angle at thread cutting start 0 to 360°)
Ee1 : Thread number per inch
The tables below indicate the thread leads.
[M system]

Command Thread number Command Thread number
increment command range increment command range
(mm) (thread/inch) (inch) (thread/inch)
0.001 0.03~999.99 0.0001 0.0255~9999.9999
0.0001 255~9999.999 0.00001 0.25401~999.9999
[L system]

Command Thread number Command Thread number
increment command range increment command range
(mm) (thread/inch) (inch) (thread/inch)
0.001 0.03~999.99 0.0001 0.0101~9999.9999
0.0001 0.255~9999.999 0.00001 0.10001~999.99999
The number of thread per inch is commanded for both metric and inch systems, and the direction of
the axis with a high movement serves as the reference.
- 46 -
4 Feed
4.5 Thread Cutting
4.5.2 Variable Lead Thread Cutting

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system { { { { { { { {
By commanding the lead increment/decrement amount per thread rotation, variable lead thread
cutting can be done.
The machining program is commanded in the following manner.
G34 X/U__Z/W__F/E__K__;
G34 : Variable lead thread cutting command
X/U : Thread end point X coordinate
Z/W : Thread end point Z coordinate
F/E : Thread’s basic lead
K : Lead increment/decrement amount per thread rotation
Non-lead axis
Lead axis
F+3.5K F+2.5K F+1.5K F+0.5K
Lead speed F+3K F+2K F+K F

F+4K
- 47 -
4 Feed
4.5 Thread Cutting
4.5.3 Synchronous Tapping
4.5.3.1 Synchronous Tapping Cycle

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
This function performs tapping through the synchronized control of the spindle and servo. This
eliminates the need for floating taps and enables tapping to be conducted at a highly precise tap
depth.
(1) Tapping pitch assignment
G84(G74) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Pp1 Ff1 Ss1 , R1 ;

G84 : Mode, forward tapping
G74 : Mode, reverse tapping
Xx1, Yy1 : Hole position data, hole drilling coordinate position
Zz1 : Hole machining data, hole bottom position
Rr1 : Hole machining data, hole R position
Pp1 : Hole machining data, dwell time at hole bottom
Ff1 : Z-axis feed amount (tapping pitch) per spindle rotation
Ss1 : Spindle speed
,R1 : Synchronous system selection
(2) Tapping thread number assignment
G84(G74) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Pp1 Ee1 Ss1 , R1 ;

G84 : Mode, forward tapping
G74 : Mode, reverse tapping
Xx1, Yy1 : Hole position data, hole drilling coordinate position
Zz1 : Hole machining data, hole bottom position
Rr1 : Hole machining data, hole R position
Pp1 : Hole machining data, dwell time at hole bottom
Ee1 : Tap thread number per 1-inch feed of Z axis
Ss1 : Spindle speed
,R1 : Synchronous system selection
- 48 -
4 Feed
4.5 Thread Cutting
The control state will be as described below when a tapping mode command (G74, G84) is
commanded.
1. Cutting override Fixed to 100%

2. Feed hold invalid
3. "In tapping mode" signal is output
4. Deceleration command between blocks invalid
5. Single block invalid
The tapping mode will be canceled with the following G commands.

G61 ....... Exact stop check mode
G61.1 .... High-accuracy control mode
G62 ....... Automatic corner override
G64 ....... Cutting mode
(Note) The synchronous tapping cycle can be used for axes other than the Z axis with the plane
selection.
Furthermore, in-position checks can be performed at the hole bottom or point R, etc.
using the parameters. The figure below shows the correlation between the in-position
width and the movement of the tapping axis of the synchronous tapping in-position check.
FIN
Hole bottom Point R
→
Feed
rate
Time T →
G0 feed start
to point R→
In-position finish G1 decelera- G1 deceleration

for G0 feed from tion start during start with tap
point R tap cutting return
(4) (2) (3) (1)
(1) Section where in-position check is performed using servo in-position width
(2) Section where in-position check is performed using in-position width for tapping
(3) Section where in-position check is performed using in-position width for cutting
feed (G1, G2, G3)
(4) Section where in-position check is performed using in-position width for rapid
traverse (G0)
- 49 -
4 Feed
4.5 Thread Cutting
4.5.3.2 Pecking Tapping Cycle

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
G84(G74) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Ff1 Pp1 Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 ,Rr2 ;
G : G84 forward tapping cycle, G74 reverse tapping cycle
X, Y : Hole drilling point position
Z : Hole bottom position
R : Point R position
Q : Depth of cut per pass (designated as an incremental value)
F : Cutting feed rate
P : Dwell time at hole bottom position
S : Rotation speed of spindle
,S : Rotation speed of spindle during retract
,I : In-position width of positioning axis
,J : In-position width of hole drilling axis
,R : r2=1 synchronous tapping mode, r2=0 asynchronous tapping mode
①
(1) G0 Xx1
G0 Xx1 Yy1
Yy1 , Ii1
,Ii1
(1)
① x1 ,y1 ②
(2) G0 Zr1
G0 Zr1
③
(3) G1 Zq1
G1 Zq1 Ff1
Ff1
④
(4) M4
M4
(2) n
(n7)
7
② r1 ⑤
(5) G1 Z-m Ff1
G1 Ff1
⑥
(6) M3
M3
n n
(n5) (n6)
5 6 n n
(n5)
5 (n6)
6
(7) G1
⑦ G1 Z(q1+m)
Z(q1+m) Ff1Ff1
(8)
⑧ M4
M4
q1 (3)
③ (6)
⑥ (9) G1
m ⑨ G1 Z-m
Z-m Ff1
Ff1
⑤
(5)
⑦
(7) (10) M3
⑩ M3
④
(4) (11) G1 Z(q1+m) Ff1
(10)
⑩ ⑪ G1 Z(q1+m) Ff1
q1 :
:
m ⑨
(9) (n4)
n (n4)
n :
(8) ⑪
(11) 4 4
z1 :
⑧ (n1) G1 Z(z1-q1*n) Ff1
　n1 G1 Z(z1-q1*n) Ff1
q1 n2 G4G4Pp1
(n2) Pp1
　
(n3) M4
　n3 M4
(n4) G1 Z-z1 Ff1 Ss2
n
(n1)
1 　n4 G1 Z-z1 Ff1 Ss2
(n5) G4 Pp1
n
　5 G4 Pp1
(n6) M3
　n6 M3
G98 mode G0 Z-r1 , Ij1
n n G98
M98 M99
G99 (n7) G98モード　G0 Z-r1 ,Ij1
モード
モード
(n2)2(n3)3
mode mode n7 G99 mode No movement
G99モード　移動なし
* 1. m:
*1. "#8018 G84/G74
m: "#8018 G84/G74 return" parameter
return" parameter M3: Spindle forward rotation
2. This program is for the G84 command. The spindle forward rotation (M3)
2. This program is for the G84 command. The spindle forward rotation (M3) M3：主軸正転
M4: Spindle reverse rotation
and reverse rotation (M4) are reversed with the G74 command. M4：主軸逆転
and reverse rotation (M4) are reversed with the G74 command.
Adding this option, the deep-hole tapping cycle option is also added.
Select either the pecking tapping cycle or the deep-hole tapping cycle with parameter.
When the pecking tapping cycle is executed in the synchronous tapping mode, the synchronous
tapping cycle option and pecking tapping cycle option are required.
- 50 -
4 Feed
4.5 Thread Cutting
4.5.3.3 Deep-hole Tapping Cycle

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
In the deep-hole tapping, the load applied to the tool can be reduced by designating the depth of
cut per pass and cutting the workpiece to the hole bottom for a multiple number of passes.
Adding this option, the pecking tapping cycle option is also added.
Select either the pecking tapping cycle or the deep-hole tapping cycle by parameter.
When the deep-hole tapping cycle is executed in the synchronous tapping mode, the synchronous
tapping cycle option and deep-hole tapping cycle option are required.
When "depth of cut per pass Q" is designated in the block containing the G84 or G74 tapping cycle
command in the state when the deep-hole tapping cycle is selected by parameter, the deep-hole
tapping cycle is executed.
In the following cases, the normal tapping cycle is established.
• When Q is not designated
• When the value of Q designated is zero
G84(G74) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Ff1 Pp1 ,Rr2 ；

G : G84 forward tapping cycle, G74 reverse tapping cycle
X,Y : Hole drilling point position
R : Point R position
Q : Depth of cut per pass (designated as an incremental value)
P : Dwell time at hole bottom and point R return
,R : r2=1 synchronous tapping mode, r2=0 asynchronous tapping mode
(1) G0 Xx1 Yy1

x1 ,y1 (2) G0 Zr1
(1)
(3) G9 G1 Zq1 Ff1
(4) M4 (Spindle reverse rotaion)
(n7)
(2) r1 (5) G9 G1 Z-q1 Ff1
(6) G4 Pp1
R point (6)(7) (12)(13) (n5) (n6) (n5) (n6)
(7) M3 (Spindle forward rotation)
(8) (8) G1 Z(q1-c) Ff1
q1 (3) (5)
(14) (9) G9 G1 Z(q1+c) Ff1
c (11)
(10) M4 (Spindle reverse rotaion)
(4) (11) G9 G1 Z-(2･q1) Ff1
q1 (9)
c (n4) (n4)
(12) G4 Pp1
(10)
z1 (13) M3 (Spindle forward rotation)
q1 (15) (14) G1 Z(2･q1-c) Ff1
(15) G9 G1 Z(q1+c) Ff1
:
(n1) G9 G1 Z(z1-q1*n+c) Ff1
(n1) (n2) G4 Pp1
(n3) M4 (Spindle reverse rotaion)
(n2) (n3) G98 G99 (n4) G9 G1 Z-z1 Ff1
mode mode (n5) G4 Pp1
(n6) M3 (Spindle forward rotation)
*1. Clearance amount c : "#8010 G84/G74 return"parameter
2. This program is for the G84 command. The spindle (n7) G98 mode　G0 Z-r1
forward rotation (M3) and reverse rotation (M4) are G99 mode　No movement
reversed with the G74 command.
- 51 -
4 Feed
4.5 Thread Cutting
4.5.4 Chamfering
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system { { { { { { { {
Chamfering can be validated during the thread cutting cycle by using external signals.
The chamfer amount and angle are designated with parameters.
Thread cutting cycle
Chamfer angle
Chamfer amount
- 52 -
4 Feed
4.5 Thread Cutting
4.5.6 Circular Thread Cutting

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
Circular threads in which the leads are in longitudinal direction can be cut.
Command format
Ii Kk
G35 (G36) Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Ff/Ee Qq
Rr
G35 : Clockwise (CW)
G36 : Counterclockwise (CCW)
Xx/Uu : X-axis arc end point coordinate (X: absolute value of workpiece coordinate
system, U: incremental value from present position)
Zz/Ww : Z-axis arc end point coordinate (Z: absolute value of workpiece coordinate
system, W: incremental value from present position)
Ii : X-axis arc center (incremental value of arc center as referenced from start
point)
Kk : Z-axis arc center (incremental value of arc center as referenced from start
point)
Rr : Arc radius
Ff/Ee : Longitudinal axis (axis with most travel) direction lead
(Ff: normal lead thread cutting, Ee: precision lead threads or inch threads)
Qq : Thread cutting start shift angle
X axis
Z W
End point
U/2 Start point
I Z axis
R
Center
- 53 -
4 Feed
4.6 Manual Feed
4.6 Manual Feed

4.6.1 Manual Rapid Traverse
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When the manual rapid traverse mode is selected, the tool can be moved at the rapid traverse rate
for each axis separately. Override can also be applied to the rapid traverse rate by means of the
rapid traverse override function.
Rapid traverse override is common to all part systems.
Rapid traverse Rapid traverse override Machine tool

×25 ×50
×1 ×100 CNC
Tool
Axis
movement
X Y Z PLC control
– – –
Rapid traverse
4.6.2 Jog Feed

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When the jog feed mode is selected, the tool can be moved in the axis direction (+ or –) in which
the machine is to be moved at the per-minute feed. The jog feed rate is common to all part systems.
Jog Feed rate Override

Machine tool
CNC
Tool
0 3000 0 200
Axis
X Y Z movement
PLC control
– + – + – +
Manual cutting feed
- 54 -
4 Feed
4.6 Manual Feed
4.6.3 Incremental Feed

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When the incremental feed mode is selected, the tool can be operated by an amount equivalent to
the designated amount (incremental value) in the axis direction each time the jog switch is pressed.
The incremental feed amount is the amount obtained by multiplying the least input increment that
was set with the parameter by the incremental feed magnification rate.
The incremental feed amount parameter and its magnification rate are common to all part systems.
Incremental Scale factor

Machine tool
1000 CNC
Tool
Axis
X Y Z PLC movement
control
– + – + – +
Step feed
4.6.4 Handle Feed

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
(1-axis)
In the handle feed mode, the machine can be moved in very small amounts by rotating the manual
pulse generator. The scale can be selected from X1, X10, X100, X1000 or random.
(Note 1) The actual movement amount and scale may not match if the manual pulse generator is
rotated quickly.
(3 axes)
In the handle feed mode, individual axes can be moved in very small amounts either separately or
simultaneously by rotating the manual pulse generators installed on each of the axes.
(Note 1) The actual movement amount and scale may not match if the manual pulse generator is
rotated quickly.
- 55 -
4 Feed
4.6 Manual Feed
4.6.5 Manual Feed Rate B

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ { { { {
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ { { { {
"Manual feedrate B" is a function that sets a random axis feedrate from the user PLC separately
from the "manual feedrate". The "manual feedrate B" feedrate setting can be selected from the
feedrate common for all axes and the feedrate independent of reach axis. By combining the
"manual feedrate B" function with the manual/automatic simultaneous function, a random axis can
be moved at the "manual feedrate B" independently of the machining program operation even
during automatic operation. Similarly, if the jog mode and other manual operation mode are set
simultaneously, a random axis can be moved at a speed independent from the "manual feedrate"
even during the manual operation mode.
The "manual feedrate B" function can move an axis at a speed different from the "manual feedrate".
This is not affected by dry run, or by manual or cutting override, so a random axis can be moved
independently even in operations during automatic operation or override during manual axis
movement.
The relation of the "manual feedrate B" and "manual feedrate" is shown below.
Manual override validity

Y229=0
Cutting override Dry run validity
Manual federate Y21D=0
Dry run speed

Y260=0
Y2BC=1
Each axis manual feedrate B R400 X axis speed
speed 1st axis R401
Y261=0
Manual feedrate B speed
Each axis manual feedrate B R402 Y axis speed

speed 2nd axis R403
Y262=0
Each axis manual feedrate B R404 Z axis speed
speed 3rd axis R405
Y263=1
R138 Each axis manual feedrate B R406 B axis speed
R139 speed 4th axis R407
Manual feedrate B valid n-th axis

Validity
Each axis manual feedrate B valid
Validity
- 56 -
4 Feed
4.7 Dwell
4.7 Dwell
4.7.1 Dwell (Time-based Designation)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The G04 command temporarily stops the machine movement and sets the machine standby status
for the time designated in the program.
(G94) G04 Xx1/Uu1 ; or (G94) G04 Pp1 ;

G94 : Asynchronous
G04 : Dwell
Xx1, Uu1, Pp1 : Time
"x1" of the time-based dwell can be designated in the range from 0.001 to 99999.999 seconds.
- 57 -
5 Program Memory / Editing
5.1 Memory Capacity

5.1 Memory Capacity
Machining programs are stored in the NC memory.
5.1.1 Memory Capacity (Number of Programs Stored)
(Note) The tape length will be the total of two part systems when using the 2-part system
specifications.
40 m (64 programs)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
80 m (128 programs)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
160 m (200 programs)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – ∆ ∆

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
5120 m (1000 programs) M65S, M66S: When APLC is added, up to 2560m.

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
- 58 -
5.2 Editing
5.2 Editing Method

5.2.1 Program Editing
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The following editing functions are possible.
(1) Program erasing

(a) Machining programs can be erased individually or totally.
(b) When all machining programs are to be erased, the programs are classified with their No. into
B: 8000 to 8999, C: 9000 to 9999, and A: all others.
(2) Program filing

(a) This function displays a list of the machining programs stored (registered) in the controller
memory.
(b) The programs are displayed in ascending order.
(c) Comments can be added to corresponding program numbers.
(3) Program copying

(a) Machining programs stored in the controller memory can be copied, condensed or merged.
(b) The program No. of the machining programs in the memory can be changed.
(4) Program editing

(a) Overwriting, inserting and erasing can be done per character.
- 59 -
5.2 Editing
5.2.2 Background Editing

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function enables one machining program to be created or editing while another program is
being run.
Prohibited
Program registered
in memory
O1000
O2000
Editing
Memory
O3000 operation
O4000
Program editing Machining with memory operation
(1) The data of the machining programs being used in memory operation can be displayed and
scrolled on the setting and display unit, but data cannot be added, revised or deleted.
(2) The editing functions mentioned in the preceding section can be used at any time for machining
programs which are not being used for memory operation.
This makes it possible to prepare and edit the next program for machining, and so the machining
preparations can be made more efficiently.
(3) The machining program will not be searched as the operation target even when searched in the
edit screen.
- 60 -
5.2 Editing
5.2.3 Buffer Correction

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
During automatic operation (memory or tape operation) or MDI operation, this function initiates
single block stop and enables the next command to be corrected or changed.
When a program error has occurred, the function enables the block in which the error occurred to
be corrected and operation to be resumed without having to perform NC resetting.
Tape Tape mode

or IC
card
Pre-read Execution
Memory Memory mode block block NC
opera-
tion
MDI mode
MDI
Setting and display unit
Buffer correction
- 61 -
5.2 Editing
5.2.4 Word Editing

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
In addition to the conventional editing 012345678 TEST CUT PROGRAM

EDIT
function, this function enables BACKGROUND EDITING
programs to be edited in word N1 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
increments. N2 G00 X100.0 ;
N3 Z100.0 ;
It is also possible to create programs N4 G01 X200.0 Z200.0 F500 ;
by deleting, replacing and inserting in N5 X300.0 ;
N6 Z300.0 ; <SEARCH DATA>
word increments. N7 ;
N8 ; <EDIT BUFFER>
N9 ; >
N10 ;
N11 ;
N12 ;
SEARCH DELETE REPLACE INSERT MENU
<List of function>
Menu Function
Delete The word on which the cursor is positioned can be deleted. (A deleted word
can also be un-deleted.)
Replace The word on which the cursor is positioned can be replaced with editing
buffer data. (The same word can also be repeatedly replaced.)
Insert The editing buffer data can be inserted after the word on which the cursor is
positioned. (The same word can also be repeatedly inserted.)
Copy The word on which the cursor is positioned can be copied into the editing
buffer. (The copied word can be used for replacement or insertion.)
Program A list of the programs is displayed.
Operation search Program numbers, sequence numbers and block numbers in the foreground
can be searched.
Background search Program numbers, sequence numbers and block numbers for background
editing can be searched. New machining programs can be registered as well.
Background exit Background editing is exited.
Comment Comments can be set in machining programs.
Word ↓ A downward search for a word is conducted, and the cursor is moved to the
word in question. (The same word can be repeatedly searched.)
Word ↑ An upward search for a word is conducted, and the cursor is moved to the
word in question. (The same word can be repeatedly searched.)
String ↓ A downward search for a character string is conducted, and the cursor is
moved to the words in question. (The same character string can be
repeatedly searched.)
String ↑ An upward search for a character string is conducted, and the cursor is
moved to the words in question. (The same character string can be
repeatedly searched.)
Running program The program being run is displayed when the program running display
display request (PLC) is ON.
Program operation The start block can be designated by moving the cursor on the editing screen.
start position setting
- 62 -
6 Operation and Display
6.1 Structure of Operation / Display Panel

6.1 Structure of Operation / Display Panel
The setting and display unit is configured of the setting section and keyboard section. When the key
switches are pressed, a buzzer sounds allowing the operation to be confirmed visually and audibly.
The following display units can be used for the setting and display unit.
Type Function Configuration element Details

FCU6-DUT32 10.4-type monochrome LCD 10.4-type LCD, Escutcheon Used as a set with FCUA-KB20.
display unit (separated type) Control card (RX215) Control card 24VDC input
FCU6-DUN33 10.4-type color LCD display 10.4-type LCD, Escutcheon Used as a set with FCUA-KB20.
unit (separated type) Control card (RX215) Control card 24VDC input
FCUA-LD100 7.2-type monochrome LCD 7.2-type LCD, Escutcheon Control card 24VDC input
liquid crystal (integrated Control card (RX213)
type) Key switches
FCUA-LD10 7.2-type monochrome LCD 7.2-type LCD, Escutcheon Used as a set with FCUA-KB20.
FCUA-CT100 9-type monochrome CRT + 9-type monochrome CRT, Escutcheon Control card 24VDC input
communication terminal Control card (RX211) CRT section 100VAC input
(integrated type, machining Key switches
center system sheet)
(integrated type, lathe Key switches
system sheet)
FCUA-CR10 9-type monochrome CRT 9-type monochrome CRT, Escutcheon Used as a set with
communication terminal FCUA-KB10/KB12.
(separated type) Control card 24VDC input
CRT section 100VAC input
FCUA-KB10 Communication terminal Key switch Used as a set with FCUA-CR10.
(separated type, machining Control card
(separated type, lathe Control card
system sheet)
FCUA-KB20 Communication terminal Key switch Use as a set with FCU6-DUT32/
(separated type, machining DUN33 or FCUA-LD10
(separated type, machining DUN33
center system sheet) KB20 with changed outline
dimensions
(separated type, lathe DUN33 or FCUA-LD10
system sheet)
FCU6-KB031 Communication terminal Key switch Use as a set with FCU6-DUT32/
(separated type, lathe DUN33
system sheet) KB30 with changed outline
dimensions
6.2 Operation Methods and Functions

6.2.1 Memory Switch (PLC Switch)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The toggle switches (PLC switches) can be defined on the screen.

The screen can be operated by turning the switches ON/OFF, and the status can be read from the
PLC ladder. This screen has been prepared in advance, so the switch names (display on screen)
can be defined with the PLC ladder.
There are a total of 32 switch points.
- 63 -
6.3 Display Methods and Contents

6.3.1 Status Display
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The status of the program now being executed is indicated.

(1) Display of G, S, T, M commands and 2nd miscellaneous command modal values
(2) Feed rate display
(3) Tool offset number and offset amount display
(4) Real speed display (*)
(*) The feed rate of each axis is converted from the final speed output to the drive amplifier, and is
displayed. However, during follow up, the speed is converted and displayed with the signals
from the detector installed on the servomotor.
6.3.2 Position Display

Position data such as present positions for tools, coordinate positions and workpiece coordinate
positions can be displayed.
(1) Present position counter
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Each axis’ present value including tool length offset amount, tool radius compensation amount and
workpiece coordinate offset amount is indicated.
Whether the tool reference position (figure below (a)) or the present position of the tool nose
position (figure below (b)) that considers offset, such as tool length offset amount or tool diameter
compensation amount, in the tool reference position is applied to the display of the relative value
can be selected with the parameter.
Tool
Relative value (a)

(Machine position) Workpiece
Displayed by tool reference coordinate
position
Present value B Workpiece
Relative value (b) zero point
Displayed by tool
nose position
Workpiece offset
Machine Tool reference position
zero point Tool nose position
- 64 -
(2) Workpiece coordinate counter

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The workpiece coordinate system modal number from G54 to G59 and the workpiece coordinate
value in the workpiece coordinate system are indicated.
(3) Remaining command counter

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The remaining distance of the movement command during the execution (incremental distance
from the present value to the end point of the block) is indicated during the automatic start and
automatic stop.
(4) Machine position counter

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Each axis’ coordinate value in the basic machine coordinate system whose zero point is the
characteristic position determined depending on the machine is indicated.
(5) Present value B

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Each axis’ value not including tool length offset amount, tool radius compensation amount and
workpiece coordinate offset amount is indicated.
Whether the counter value on the Position screen is expressed with the Present or with the present
value B can be selected using parameter.
The present value B can be selected for the counter value indicated on the coordinate value screen
using parameter.
(6) Manual interrupt amount counter

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – { { { {
L system – – – – { { { {
The amount moved with the manual mode while the manual absolute switch was OFF is indicated.
On the coordinate value screen, in addition to the manual interrupt amount, the MST display, next
command counter and present value B can be selected for the indicated counter using parameter.
- 65 -
6.3.3 Program Running Status display

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Program now being executed is displayed.
6.3.4 Setting and Display

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The parameters used in controller operations can be set and displayed.
6.3.5 MDI Data Setting and Display

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The MDI data having a multiple number of blocks can be set and displayed. As with the editing of
machining programs, the MDI programs can be revised using the delete, change and add functions.
Operation can be repeated using the programs which have been set.
6.3.6 Specification List Display

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – { { { {
L system – – – – { { { {
This function displays a list of the specifications which are currently valid.
6.3.7 Clock
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The clock is built-in, and the date and time are displayed.
Once the time is set, it can be seen as a clock on the screen.
The clock time can be read/written (read/set) from PLC using the DDB function.
- 66 -
6.3.8 Hardware / Software Configuration Display

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function displays the configuration of the installed hardware and software.
6.3.9 Integrated Time Display

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The integrating run time count during each signal of power-ON, automatic operation, automatic start
and external integrating run time is ON can be set and displayed. The maximum time displayed is
9999 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds.
Power-ON: Total of all the integrated run times, each starting when the power of the
NC control unit is turned ON and ending when it is turned OFF.
Automatic operation: Total of the integrated run times for all machining periods, each starting
when the auto start button is pressed in the memory mode and ending
when the reset status is established (usually when the M02 / M30
command is designated or the reset button is pressed). (This differs
according to PLC machining.)
Automatic start: Total of the integrated run times for all automatic start operations, each
starting when the auto start button is pressed in the memory or MDI mode
and ending when the feed hold stop or block stop is established or the reset
button is pressed.
External integration: Based on the PLC sequence, this is the integrated run time of the signal set
by the PLC, and it comes in two types, external integration 1 and external
integration 2.
6.3.10 Available Languages

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
{ { { { { { { {
M system
12 languages 12 languages 12 languages 12 languages 13 languages 13 languages 13 languages 13 languages
{ { { { { { { {
L system
12 languages 12 languages 12 languages 12 languages 13 languages 13 languages 13 languages 13 languages
This function makes it possible to switch between Japanese and English which are the standard
languages used for the screen displays.
Furthermore, under the optional specifications, the display language can be switched to German,
Italian, French, Spanish, Chinese (Traditional Chinese characters, simplified Chinese characters),
Korean, Portuguese, Hungarian, Dutch or Swedish.
- 67 -
6.3.11 Additional Languages

(Japanese, English, German, Italian, French, Spanish, Chinese, Korean, Portuguese, Hungarian,
Dutch, Swedish)
6.3.11.1 Japanese
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
6.3.11.2 English
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
6.3.11.3 German
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
6.3.11.4 Italian
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
6.3.11.5 French
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
6.3.11.6 Spanish
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
- 68 -
6.3.11.7 Chinese
(1) Chinese (Traditional Chinese characters)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
(2) Chinese (Simplified Chinese characters)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
6.3.11.8 Korean
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
6.3.11.9 Portuguese
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
6.3.11.10 Hungarian
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
6.3.11.11 Dutch
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
6.3.11.12 Swedish
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
- 69 -
6.3.12 Screen Saver, Backlight OFF

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – { { { {
L system – – – – { { { {
The screen saver and backlight OFF functions turn off the displays when there is no need to view
the screen.
This function is available only on the LCD.
<Screen saver>
This function protects the screen display unit by blanking the screen after the time set in the
parameter has elapsed.
Inputting any key causes the screen to reappear.
<Backlight OFF>
This function turns off the backlight in order to extend the service life of the LCD
screen's backlight.
6.3.13 Screen Deletion

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When there is no need to use a screen for extended periods, the entire screen can be cleared to
prevent deterioration of the display unit by the following procedures.
- 70 -
7 Input / Output Functions and Devices
7.1 Input / Output Data

7.1 Input / Output Data
Certain kinds of data handled by the NC system can be input and output between the NC system's
memory and external devices.
Machining program input / output (including user macros and fixed cycle macros)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Tool offset data input / output

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Common variable input / output

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Parameter input / output

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
History data output

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Remote program input

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
- 71 -
7.2 Input / Output I/F
7.2 Input / Output I/F

7.2.1 RS-232C I/F
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Port 1 and 2 of the RS-232C interface can be used.
Port Port 1/2

Transmission speed ~ 19.2kbps
Handshake method DC code method, RTS/CTS method possible
Each port can be used for the following application.

Port 1: Input/output, tape operation, Anshin-net
Port 2: Input/output, tape operation, GX Developer communication, computer link, Anshin-net
7.2.2 IC Card I/F
7.2.2.1 I/F for IC card in Control Unit

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
IC cards can be attached inside the NC unit and used.
7.2.3 Data Server I/F

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – ∆ ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
Ethernet I/F cards can be attached onto the NC unit and used.
(The Ethernet for the data server interface is the same as that for the Ethernet interface described
in section 7.2.4.)
7.2.4 Ethernet I/F

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
Ethernet I/F card can be attached onto the NC unit and used.
- 72 -
7.3 Computer Link
7.3 Computer Link

7.3.1 Computer Link B
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
This function sends DC1 to the host computer (hereafter abbreviated to "HOST") at the CNC cycle
start, and it enables operation to be performed while the machining programs are received from the
host.
The computer link has a 32-kbyte reception buffer so that operation will be less susceptible to the
effects of the data transfer status at the HOST end. This means that when the machine is
connected to a HOST capable of transferring data at a high speed (of 38,400 bps), it is possible to
perform
high-speed machining based on fine-segment data.
The high-speed machining mode option is required for high-speed fine-segment machining.
When using the 2-part system, this function cannot be operated in the 2nd part system.
CNC HOST
Operation
Com-
Com- CNC Machining programs munication RS-232C
mands software
32-kbyte
reception Machining programs
buffer
BTR operation
- 73 -
8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions
8.1 Spindle Functions (S)

8.1.1 Command / Output
8.1.1.1 Spindle Functions
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The spindle rotation speed is determined in consideration of the override and gear ratio for the S
command commanded in automatic operation or with manual numerical commands, and the
spindle is rotated. The following diagram shows an outline of the spindle control.
When an 8-digit number following address S (S00000000 to S±99999999) is commanded, a signed

32-bit binary data or 8-digit BCD data and start signal will be output to the PLC.
Only one set of S commands can be commanded in one block.
Processing and complete sequences must be incorporated on the PLC side for all S commands.
NC PLC
S command value
S Command 6-digit S command
(Machining program, analysis Start signal
Manual numerical command)
Spindle rotation 6-digit
command
BIN
Changeover
(Parameter)
Spindle rotation 6-digit BIN
command
Spindle controller Spindle output
MDS-C1-SP command creation Gear selection
series, etc.
Override
Remote I/O unit
D/A converter
Gear ratio
Max. rotation
speed
Analog spindle (Parameter)
- 74 -
(1) The override can be designated as 50% to 120% in 10% increments or 0 to 200% in 1%
increments (with built-in PLC specifications).
The override is not changed while the spindle stop input is ON, during the tapping mode, or
during the thread cutting mode.
(2) The number of gear steps can be commanded up to four steps.
(3) The max. spindle rotation speed can be set for each gear.
8.1.1.2 Spindle Serial I/F

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This I/F is used to connect the digital spindle (AC spindle motor and spindle driver (SP, SPJ2)).
8.1.1.3 Spindle Analog I/F

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
Spindle control can be executed using an analog spindle instead of the digital spindle.
In this case, the remote I/O unit DX120/DX121 is required.
The analog output voltage is calculated from the present rotation speed regarding the voltage at the
max. rotation speed as the maximum analog voltage.
The specifications of the analog voltage output are as follows.
(1) Output voltage ... 0 to 10 V

(2) Resolution ... 1/4095 (–12 multiplier of 2)
(3) Load conditions ... 10 kΩ
(4) Output impedance ... 220 Ω
8.1.1.4 Coil Change

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Constant output characteristics can be achieved across a broad spectrum down to the low-speed
range by switching the spindle motor connections.
This is a system under which commands are assigned from the PLC.
8.1.1.5 Automatic Coil Change

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – { { { {
L system – – – – { { { {
Constant output characteristics can be achieved across a broad spectrum down to the low-speed
range by switching the spindle motor connections.
This is a system under which the NC unit switches the coils automatically in accordance with the
motor speed.
- 75 -
8.1.2 Speed Control

8.1.2.1 Constant Surface Speed Control
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
With radial direction cutting, this function enables the spindle speed to be changed in accordance
with changes in the radial direction coordinate values and the workpiece to be cut with the cutting
point always kept at a constant speed (constant surface speed).
G code Function
G96 Constant surface speed
G97 Constant surface speed cancel
The surface speed is commanded with an S code. For the metric designation, the speed is
commanded with an m/min unit, and for the inch designation, the speed is commanded with a
feet/min unit.
In the constant surface speed cancel mode, the S code is a spindle rotation speed command.
The axis for which constant surface speed is controlled is generally the X axis. However, this can
be changed with the parameter settings or with address P in the G96 block.
(Note) If there is only one spindle, the spindle will not operate normally if the constant surface
speed control command, S command or spindle related M command is commanded
randomly from each part system. These commands must be commanded from only one
certain part system, or commanded simultaneously with standby.
The controller will execute the following control for the constant surface speed control
and S commands. The part system from which an S command was issued last will have
the spindle control rights. That part system will judge whether the constant surface speed
command mode is valid or canceled, and will execute spindle control.
Part system 1 program
G97 S1000 S2000 G96 S200
Part system 2 program
G96 S100
Spindle speed
1000 r/min S2000 r/min S100 m/min S200 m/min
Spindle control rights
Part system 1 Part system 2 Part system 1
- 76 -
8.1.2.2 Spindle Override

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function applies override to the rotation speed of a spindle or mill spindle assigned by the
machining program command during automatic operation or by manual operation. There are two
types of override.

Using an external signal, override can be applied to the commanded rotation speed of a spindle
or mill spindle in 10% increments from 50% to 120%.
(2) Type 2 (number setting method)

Using an external signal, override can be applied to the commanded rotation speed of a spindle
or mill spindle in 1% increments from 0% to 200%.
(Note 1) Selection between type 1 and type 2 can be designated by user PLC processing.
8.1.2.3 Multiple-spindle Control

Multi-spindle control is a function that controls all the spindles except for the first spindle for a
machine tool equipped with second, third and fourth spindles (sub-spindles) in addition to the first
spindle (main spindle).
Multi-spindle control I can be switched to multi-spindle control II or vice versa using a parameter
and, by so doing, the spindle control method changes.
Multi-spindle control I: Control based on a spindle selection command (such as G43.1) and
spindle control command ([S*****;] or [SO=*****;]), etc.
Multi-spindle control II: Control based on an external signal (spindle command selection signal,
spindle selection signal) and spindle control command ([S*****;] only), etc.
Spindle selection commands [SO=*****;] cannot be used for this control.
The figure below shows an example of the configuration for a machine which is equipped with
second and third spindles.
Tool spindle
(third spindle)
Second spindle
First spindle
Tool
post 1
- 77 -
8.1.2.3.1 Multiple-spindle Control I

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆
Spindle selection function

Using the spindle selection command (such as G43.1 [G group 20]), this function makes it
possible to switch the spindle among the first through fourth spindles to which the subsequent
S command (S*****) is to apply.
Command format
G43.1; First spindle control mode ON
G44.1; Selected spindle control mode ON; the selected spindle number is set using a
parameter.
G47.1; All spindles simultaneous control mode ON
Spindle control commands using an extended word address (SO=*****)

In addition to using the "S*****" S commands, it is also possible to assign commands which
differentiate the applicable spindle among the first through fourth spindles by using the SO=*****.
Command format
SO=*****;
O : Number assigned as the spindle number (1: first spindle; 2: second spindle; 3: third
spindle; 4: fourth spindle); variables can be designated.
*****: Rotational speed or surface speed value assigned by 5-digit analog command; variables
can be designated.
8.1.2.3.2 Multiple-spindle Control II

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆
With this function, one S command is used to command to the spindle, and which spindle is
selected is decided depending on a signal from the PLC.
A parameter is used to switch between multi-spindle control II and the conventional multi-spindle
control I function.
Spindle command selection, spindle selection

The S command for the spindle is output as the rotation speed command to the spindle which
has been selected by the spindle selection signal (SWS) ON from the PLC. The selected
spindle rotates at the rotation speed which was output. The spindles which were de-selected
by spindle selection signal (SWS) OFF continue to rotate at the same rotation speed as the
speed immediately before their de-selection. As a result, each of the spindles can be made to
rotate simultaneously at a different rotation speed. The spindle command selection signal is
used to select which of the spindles is to receive the S command from which system.
- 78 -
8.1.3 Position Control

8.1.3.1 Spindle Orientation
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
(a) Orient
This function stops the spindle rotation at a certain position when using the digital spindle.
When the orient command is used, the spindle will rotate several times and then stop at the
orient point. The orient point is the Z-phase position when using encoder orient (PLG and
external encoder/ring sensor).
(b) Multi-point orient

This function performs orientation to a position other than the Z-phase position by inputting a
shift amount with the parameter or PLC. The shift amount is 0 to 4095. (Unit: 360°/4096)
(Note 1) Multi-point orient cannot be executed when using the magnetic sensor.
(Note 2) Orient is possible only when the gear ratio is 1:1 for the PLG orient.
(The orient is completed at the PLG encoder's Z-phase, so when using reduction
gears, the orient points will be generated at several points during one spindle
rotation.)
(c) Pre-positioning orient (spindle orient 2)

When the in-position pre-positioning parameter is valid and the second in-position is valid, this
function turns ON the orient finish signal as soon as the spindle reaches within the pre-
positioning in-position width. It also turns ON the second in-position signal as soon as the
spindle reaches within the orient in-position width. (OINP) actually.
Since orient completion can be predicted using this function, it is possible to eliminate the
sequence delay time, etc. for tool changes and other such operations, thereby achieving a
faster tact time.
8.1.3.2 Spindle Position Control (Spindle / C Axis Control)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆
This function enables one digital spindle (SP) to be used also as the C axis (rotary axis) using an
external signal.
The C axis servo ON signal is used to switch between the spindle and C axis.
Spindle C axis Spindle

Servo ON
At servo OFF: ---------- Spindle (C axis cannot be controlled).

C axis is in the reference position return incomplete status.
At servo ON: ----------- C axis (spindle cannot be controlled).

C axis is in the reference position return incomplete status.
A parameter is used to initiate reference position return (orient) when servo ON is
started.
- 79 -
8.1.3.3 Spindle Synchronization

8.1.3.3.1 Spindle Synchronization I
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆
In a machine with two or more spindles, this function controls the rotation speed and phase of one
selected spindle (synchronized spindle) in synchronization with the rotation of the other selected
spindle (basic spindle).
It is used in cases where, for instance, workpiece clamped to the basic spindle is to be clamped to
the synchronized spindle instead or where the spindle rotation speed is to be changed while one
workpiece remains clamped to both spindles.
The synchronous spindle is designated and the start/end of the synchronization are commanded
with the G command in the machining program.
Command format
Spindle synchronization control cancel (G113)

This command releases the state of synchronization between two spindles whose rotation has
been synchronized by the spindle synchronization command.
G113;
Spindle synchronization control ON (G114.1)

This command is used to designate the basic spindle and the spindle to be synchronized with the
basic spindle, and it places the two designated spindles in the synchronized state.
By designating the synchronized spindle phase shift amount, the phases of the basic spindle and
synchronized spindle can be aligned.
G114.1 H__ D__ R__ A__ ;

H__ : Selects the basic spindle.
D__ : Selects the spindle to be synchronized with the basic spindle.
E__ : Designates the synchronized spindle phase shift amount.
A__ : Designates the spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant.
- 80 -
8.1.3.3.2 Spindle Synchronization II

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – { { {
L system – – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆
In a machine with two or more spindles, this function controls the rotation speed and phase of one
selected spindle (synchronized spindle) in synchronization with the rotation of the other selected
spindle (basic spindle).
It is used in cases where, for instance, workpiece clamped to the basic spindle is to be clamped to
the synchronized spindle instead or where the spindle rotation speed is to be changed while one
workpiece remains clamped to both spindles.
The selection of the spindles to be synchronized, the start of the synchronization and other settings
are all designated from the PLC.
The spindle synchronization control mode is established by inputting the spindle synchronization
control signal. While this mode is established, the synchronized spindle is controlled in
synchronization with the rotation speed assigned for the basic spindle.
8.1.3.4 Tool Spindle Synchronization I (Polygon)

8.1.3.4.1 Tool Spindle Synchronization IA (Spindle-Spindle, Polygon)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – ∆ – – – ∆ ∆ ∆
With a machine equipped with two or more spindles under serial connection control, this function
enables spindle-spindle polygonal machining (IA) by controlling the workpiece spindle rotation in
synchronization with the rotary tool spindle rotation. The rotary tool spindle and workpiece spindle
are designated among the spindles subject to serial connection control.
Serial connection control for the workpiece spindle and rotary tool spindle can be performed by
MDS-*-SP or MDS-*-SPJ2.
Command format
Spindle-spindle polygonal machining mode command (G114.2)

This command establishes the spindle-spindle polygonal machining mode in which two spindles are
rotated in synchronization at two different speeds by designating the rotary tool spindle and
workpiece spindle and by designating the rotational ratios (number of rotary tool teeth and number
of work angles) of the two designated spindles.
G114.2 H__ D__ E__ L__ R__ ;

H__ : Selects the rotary tool spindle.
D__ : Selects the workpiece spindle.
E__ : Designates the rotary tool spindle rotational ratio.
L__ : Designates the workpiece spindle rotational ratio.
R__ : Synchronized spindle phase shift amount
- 81 -
Spindle-spindle polygonal machining mode cancel command (G113)

This command releases the state of synchronization between two spindles whose rotation has
been synchronized by the spindle synchronization command.
G113;
8.1.3.4.2 Tool Spindle Synchronization IB (Spindle-Spindle, Polygon)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – – ∆ ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆
With a machine equipped with two or more spindles under serial connection control, this function
enables spindle-spindle polygonal machining (IB) by controlling the rotary tool spindle rotation in
synchronization with the workpiece spindle rotation. The rotary tool spindle and workpiece spindle
are designated among the spindles subject to serial connection control.
A parameter is used to switch from spindle-spindle polygonal machining (IB) to spindle-NC axis
polygonal machining (IC) or vice versa.
Serial connection control for the workpiece spindle and rotary tool spindle can be performed by
MDS-*-SP or MDS-*-SPJ2.
Command format
Spindle-spindle polygonal machining mode ON (G51.2 or G251)

This command establishes the spindle-spindle the polygonal machining mode in which two spindles
are rotated in synchronization at two different speeds by designating the rotary tool spindle and
workpiece spindle and by designating the rotational ratios (number of work angles and number of
rotary tool teeth) of the two designated spindles.
G51.2 H__ D__ P__ Q__ R__ ;

H__ : Selects the workpiece spindle (spindle).
D__ : Selects the rotary tool spindle (spindle).
P__ : Designates the workpiece spindle rotational ratio.
Q__ : Designates the rotary tool spindle rotational ratio.
R__ : Synchronized spindle phase shift amount
Spindle-spindle polygonal machining cancel command (G50.2)

G50.2:
- 82 -
8.1.3.4.3 Tool Spindle Synchronization IC (Spindle-NC axis, Polygon)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – – ∆ ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆
With a machine equipped with a workpiece spindle subject to serial connection control and also an
NC axis serving as the rotary tool axis, this function enables spindle-NC axis polygonal machining
(IC) by controlling the rotary tool axis rotation in synchronization with the workpiece spindle rotation.
A parameter is used to switch from spindle-spindle polygonal machining (IB) to spindle-NC axis
polygonal machining (IC) or vice versa.
Serial connection control for the workpiece spindle can be performed by MDS-*-SP or MDS-*-
SPJ2.The rotary tool axis can be performed by MDS-*-V1/V2.
Command format
G51.2 P__ Q__ ;
P__ : Selects the workpiece spindle (spindle).
Q__ : Selects the rotary tool axis (NC axis).
Spindle-spindle polygonal machining cancel command (G50.2)

G50.2:
- 83 -
8.2 Tool Functions (T)
8.2 Tool Functions (T)

8.2.1 Tool Functions
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
(1) M system
When an 8-digit number following address T (T00000000 – T99999999) is assigned, 8-digit code
data and start signal will be output to PLC.
Only one set of T commands can be commanded in a block.
Processing and complete sequences must be incorporated on the PLC side for all T commands.
(Note 1) This function requires a built-in PLC.

(Note 2) There are some screens in the setting and display unit that cannot display all eight digits.
(2) L system
The command is issued with an 8-digit number following address T (T0 – T99999999).The high-
order 6 digits or 7 digits are designated as the tool No., and the low-order 2 digits or 1 digit are
designated as the offset No. Which method is to be used is designated with parameters.
Txxxxxxxx
Tool offset No.
Tool No.
Txxxxxxxx
Tool offset No.
Tool No.
The 6-digit (or 7-digit) tool No. code data and start signal will be output to the PLC.
Processing and complete sequences must be incorporated on the PLC side for all T commands.

- 84 -
8.3 Miscellaneous Functions (M)

8.3.1 Miscellaneous Functions
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When an 8-digit number (M00000000~M99999999) is assigned following address M, the 8-digit

code data and start signal are output to PLC.
M2-digit BCD output is used for the standard PLC specifications.

When a 2-digit number following address M (M00 – M97) is assigned, the code data and start
signal will be output to the PLC.
Apart from the above signals, various special independent signals are also output for the following
signals.
M00 : Program stop

M01 : Optional stop
M02 : Program end
M30 : Program end
Respective processing and complete sequences must be incorporated on the PLC side for all
M commands from M00 to M97.
M98 and M99 have specific purposes and can not be used.
8.3.2 Multiple M Codes in 1 Block
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Four sets of M commands can be issued simultaneously in a block.

Apart from the above signals, various special independent signals are also output for the following
signals.
Respective processing and completion sequences are required for all M commands included in a
block (except M98 and M99).
(Note 1) This function requires a built-in PLC. In this case, the code data and start signal are
transferred simultaneously as the M command in the same block from the controller to the
PLC, and so high-speed machine control can be done by the PLC processing sequence.
- 85 -
8.3.3 M Code Independent Output

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When the M00, M01, M02 or M30 command is assigned during an automatic operation (tape,
memory, MDI) or by a manual numerical command, the signal of this function is output. It is turned
OFF after the miscellaneous function finishes or by the reset & rewind signal.
Machining M code output

Response to controller
program Independent
M00 M00 Fin1 or Fin2
M01 M01 Fin1 or Fin2
M02 M02 Reset & rewind
M30 M30 Reset & rewind
If movement or dwell command exists in the same block as these M commands, this signal is
output upon completion of the movement or dwell command.
8.3.4 Miscellaneous Function Finish

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
These signals inform the CNC system that a miscellaneous function (M), spindle function (S), tool
function (T) or 2nd miscellaneous function (A, B, C) has been assigned and that the PLC which has
received it has completed the required operation. They include miscellaneous function finish signal
1 (FIN1) and miscellaneous function finish signal 2 (FIN2).
Miscellaneous function finish signal 1 (FIN1)

When the controller checks that FIN1 is ON, it sets the function strobes OFF. Furthermore, when
the PLC checks that the function strobes are OFF, it sets FIN1 OFF. The controller checks that
FIN1 is OFF and advances to the next block.
Below is an example of a time chart applying when a miscellaneous function has been assigned.
Command
Next block
Miscellaneous function strobe (MF)
Miscellaneous function finish signal

(FIN1)
- 86 -
Miscellaneous function finish signal 2 (FIN2)

When the controller checks that FIN2 is ON, it sets the function strobes OFF and simultaneously
advances to the next block. The PLC checks that the strobe signals are OFF and sets FIN2 OFF.
Below is an example of a time chart applying when a miscellaneous function has been assigned.
Command
Next block
Miscellaneous function strobe (MF)
Miscellaneous function finish signal

(FIN2)
8.3.5 M Code Output during Axis Positioning

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆
This function controls the timing at which miscellaneous functions are output, and it outputs a
miscellaneous function when axis reaches at the designated position movement.
The command format is as follows.
G117 Xx1 Zz1 Cc1 ;

G117 : In-axis-movement miscellaneous function output command
Xx1, Zz1, Cc1 : Movement start points
: Miscellaneous function
(Example) G117 Xx1 Zz1 Mm1 Mm2 Mm3 Mm4 ;

G117 Xx2 Zz2 Mm5 Mm6 Mm7 Mm8 ;
G01 X200 Z200 ;
End point (200, 200)

Mm1
Mm2 (x2, z2)
Mm3
Mm5
Mm4
Mm6
(x1, z1) Mm7
Start point Mm8
- 87 -
8.4 2nd Miscellaneous Functions (B)
8.4 2nd Miscellaneous Function (B)

8.4.1 2nd Miscellaneous Function
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The code data and start signals are output when an 8-digit number is assigned following the
address code A, B or C — whichever does not duplicate the axis name being used.
Processing and complete sequences must be incorporated on the PLC side for all 2nd
miscellaneous commands.

- 88 -
9 Tool Compensation
9.1 Tool Length / Position Offset
9 Tool Compensation
9.1.1 Tool Length Offset
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
These commands make it possible to control the axis movement by offsetting the position of the
end point of the movement command by an offset amount set on the TOOL OFFSET screen.
Using this function, it is possible to offset the difference in distance between the actual position of
the machine's tool nose and the program coordinate position made by the tool length and to
enhance both the programming and operational efficiency.
(1) M system
G43 Zz1 Hh1 ; Tool length offset can be provided not
G44 Zz1 Hh1 ; only for the Z axis but for all other axes
Offset Offset axis Offset No. which can be controlled in the system (X,
direction Y, etc.).
G49 ; Tool length offset cancel
The offset direction is determined by the G command.

G43: Forward direction (z1 + h1)
G44: Reverse direction (z1 – h1)
Offset can be canceled by the following G commands.
G49; (Note) When the tool length offset axis is returned
G43 H0; to the reference position, the offset of that
G44 H0; axis is canceled.
(Example) Example of tool length offset using a combination with tool length measurement type I
G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
T01 ; Z + 2.0
T02 M06 ;
G91 G00 G43 M M H01 =
Z2.0 H01 ; – 450.000
(Note) The tool length offset H01 =

amount is set as a – 450.000
Z 0.0 Z 2.0
negative value such
Workpiece Workpiece
as
H01 = –450.000. Table Table
- 89 -
9 Tool Compensation
(2) L system
(a) Shape offset
Tool length is offset in reference to the programmed base position. The programmed base position
is usually the center of the tool rest or the nose position of the base tool.
The programmed base position is the center The programmed base position is the nose
of the tool rest: of the base tool:
Base position
(base point)
Base tool
X-axis tool Tool used for

length offset machining
X-axis tool
length offset
Z-axis tool
length offset Z-axis tool
length offset
(b) Wear offset

The wear of a tool nose can be offset.
Tool nose
X-axis tool nose wear

offset amount Z
Z-axis tool nose wear

offset amount
- 90 -
9 Tool Compensation
(c) Command format

Tool offset is performed by a T command. It is specified in eight digits following address T. Tool
offset is divided into two types: tool length offset and tool nose wear offset. The Nos. of such two
types of offsets are specified by a parameter. Also a parameter is used to specify whether the offset
Nos. is specified by one or two low-order digits of a T command.
1. Specifying tool length and wear offset Nos. together using one or two low-order digits of the T
command
T********
Tool length offset No. and tool nose wear offset No.
Tool No.
T********
Tool length offset No. and tool nose wear offset No.
Tool No.
2. Specifying tool length and wear offset Nos. separately
T* * * * * * * *
Tool nose wear offset No.
Tool length offset No.
Tool No.
T* * * * * * * *
Tool nose wear offset No.
Tool length offset No.
Tool No.
The tool offset for the lathe is valid only for the X and Z axes. If an additional axis (Y axis) is added,
the tool offset will be validated for the additional axis.
The additional axis is the third or fourth axis which is selected using a parameter.
- 91 -
9 Tool Compensation
9.1.2 Tool Position Offset

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – { { { {
L system – – – – – – – –
This function uses commands to control the movement by changing the positions of the end points
of the movement commands to positions which have been extended or reduced by an amount
equivalent to the tool radius compensation amount.
This function can be used to compensate for the difference in distance between the position where
the tool on the machine is actually mounted and the programmed coordinate position based on the
tool position and thereby improve the efficiency of both machining and operation.
G45 G00 Xx1 Yy1 Dd1 ;

G45 : Offset
Xx1, Yy1 : Movement axes
Dd1 : Offset No.
With tool position offset, the compensation operation is performed only for blocks containing a G45
to G48 command
G45 command G46 command G47 command G48 command

Extension by amount Reduction by amount Extension by twice the offset Reduction by twice the offset
equivalent to offset amount equivalent to offset amount amount amount
Program Program Program Program
command command command command
Actual move- Actual move- Actual move- Actual move-

ment amount ment amount ment amount ment amount
(1) If the start and end points are on an axis, the radius can be extended or reduced only for one-
quarter, one-half and three-quarter arcs.
(2) In the case of absolute value commands, the position is extended or reduced in each axial
direction from the end point of the previous block along the line of the movement toward the
position commanded in the block containing the G45 (or G46, G47 or G48) command.
(3) In the case of simultaneous n axes command, the same amount of offset is applied to all the axes
that have the command within the range of the number of the axes which can be simultaneously
controlled. Tool position offset is also valid for additional axes.
9.1.3 Tool Offset for Additional Axes

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system { { { { { { { {
Tool compensation for the L series is valid for the X and Z axes. If an additional axis (such as the Y
axis) has been added to these axes, tool compensation is valid for the additional axis.
- 92 -
9 Tool Compensation
9.2 Tool Radius
9.2 Tool Radius

9.2.1 Tool Radius Compensation
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system – – – – – – – –
These commands function to provide tool radius compensation. Through a combination with the G
command and D address assignment, they compensate for the actual tool center path either inside
or outside the programmed path by an amount equivalent to the tool radius.
The tool path is calculated by the intersection point arithmetic system and, as a result, excessive cut
amounts on the inside of corners are avoided.
G code Function
G38 Vector change during tool radius compensation
G39 Corner arc during tool radius compensation
G40 Tool radius compensation cancel
G41 Tool radius compensation left command
G42 Tool radius compensation right command
Tool center path
r r
r: Tool radius compensation amount Programmed path
The tool radius compensation command controls the compensation from that block in which G41 or
G42 is commanded. In the tool radius compensation mode, the program is read up to five blocks
ahead including blocks with no movement, and interference check using tool radius is conducted up
to three blocks ahead in any of those blocks with movement.
- 93 -
9 Tool Compensation
9.2 Tool Radius
G17 G01 G41 Xx1 Yy1 Dd1 ;

G17 : Compensation plane
G01 : Cutting
G41 : Left compensation
Xx1.Yy1 : Movement axis
Dd1 : Offset No.
The compensation plane, movement axes and next advance direction vector are based on the
plane selection command designated by G17 to G19.
G17: XY plane, X, Y, I, J
G18: ZX plane, Z, X, K, I
G19: YZ plane, Y, Z, J, K
An arc is inserted at the corner by the following command during tool radius compensation.
G39 Xx1 Yy1 ;

Xx1, Yy1 : Movement amount
Tool center path Arc inserted at corner
Programmed path
The compensation vector can be changed in following two ways.
G38 Xx1 Yy1 ;

The tool radius compensation vector amount and direction are retained.
G38 Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 Dd1 ;

Ii1, Jj1 : Compensation vector direction
Dd1 : Compensation vector length
The tool radius compensation vector direction is updated by I and J.
Tool center path Holding of previous intersection point vector

Vector with length D (i14, j14)
N11G01Xx11;
N12 N13 N12G38Xx12Yy12;
N11 N13G38Xx13Yy13;
N14
N15 N14G38Xx14Ii14Jj14Dd14;
Intersection point vector N15G40Xx15Yy15;
- 94 -
9 Tool Compensation
9.2 Tool Radius
The tool radius compensation is canceled by the following command.
G40 Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 ;

Ii1, Jj1 : Compensation vector direction
The vector prior to canceling is prepared by calculating the intersection point with the I and J
direction.
When i and j commands are

Tool center path
assigned to G40
N14 N11G01Xx11;
N12Xx12Yy12;
N12 N13Xx13Yy13;
N13
N11 N14G40Xx14Ii14Jj14;
(i14,J14)
- 95 -
9 Tool Compensation
9.2 Tool Radius
9.2.2 3-dimensional Tool Radius Compensation

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – ∆ ∆ – – ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
This command serves the function of compensating for the spherical radius of ball end mills. It
corrects the actual tool center path to be either more outside or inside the programmed path by an
amount equivalent to the tool radius amount in accordance with the 3-dimensional vectors.
G code Function
G40 Tool radius compensation cancel
G41 Tool radius compensation left command (compensation in the direction toward
IJK)
G42 Tool radius compensation right command (compensation in the direction away
from IJK)
With 3-dimensional tool radius compensation, the compensation is controlled from the block in
which the block containing the G41 or G42 command has been designated.
G01 G41 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 Dd1 ;

G01 : Cutting
G41 : Left compensation
Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 : Movement axis
Ii1, Jj1, Kk1 : Tool sphere center vectors
Dd1 : Offset No.
The radius from the tool spherical center to the end nose serves as the compensation amount that
corresponds to the tool offset No. designated by d1. The offset Nos. that can be used are limited
by the "number of tool compensation amount sets."
If the compensation vectors (tool spherical center vectors) are to be changed, the G41 and I, J and
K commands must be assigned.
Tool
Tool center
coordinates (I, J, K)
(x’, y’, z’) Normal line vector
r: Tool
Z (K)
radius
Work
Programmed coordinates
(x, y, z) 3-dimensional
compensation vector
Y (J) X (I)
- 96 -
9 Tool Compensation
9.2 Tool Radius
9.2.3 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G40/41/42)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system { { { { { { { {
Corresponding to the tool No., the tool nose is assumed to be a half circle of radius R, and
compensation is made so that the half circle touches the programmed path.
G code Function
G40 Nose R compensation cancel
G41 Nose R compensation left command
G42 Nose R compensation right command
R
Compensated
path
Programmed path
Nose R interference check
In the nose radius compensation mode, the program is read up to five blocks ahead including
blocks with no movement, and an interference check using the nose radius is conducted up to three
blocks ahead in any of those blocks with movement.
- 97 -
9 Tool Compensation
9.2 Tool Radius
9.2.4 Automatic Decision of Nose Radius Compensation Direction (G46/40)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system { { { { { { { {
The nose radius compensation direction is automatically determined from the tool nose point and
the specified movement vector.
G code Function
G40 Nose radius compensation cancel
G46 Nose radius compensation ON
(Automatic decision of compensation direction)
The compensation directions based on the movement vectors at the tool nose points are as follows:
Tool nose Tool nose

direction Tool nose point direction Tool nose point
Tool nose Tool nose
progress 1 2 3 4 progress 5 6 7 8
direction direction
R R L L R L
R L L R R L
L R R L L R
(tool nose points 1 to 4)
(tool nose points 5 to 8)

Mouvement vectors
Mouvement vectors
L R L L R R
L L R R L R
L R R L L R
R L L R R L
R L R R L L
Range of each Range of each
tool nose point tool nose point
(1 to 4) (5 to 8)
- 98 -
9 Tool Compensation
9.3 Tool Offset Amount

9.3.1 Number of Tool Offset Sets
The number of tool offset sets is as follows.
9.3.1.1 20
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system { { { { { { { {
9.3.1.2 40
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system – – – – – – – –
9.3.1.3 80
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
9.3.1.5 200
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
9.3.1.6 400
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – ∆ – – – ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
9.3.1.7 999
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
- 99 -
9 Tool Compensation
9.3.2 Offset Memory
9.3.2.1 Tool Shape/Wear Offset Amount

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function registers the tool shape offset and wear offset amounts among the positions of the
tools moving in the direction parallel to the control axis. Compensation may encompass two or
more axes.
1. Shape offset amount
The tool length offset amount, tool radius compensation amount, nose radius compensation
amount, nose radius imaginary tool tip point or tool width can be set as the shape offset amount.
The compensation amount that can be set and used differs depending on whether offset amount
setting type 1, 2 or 3 is used.
2. Wear offset amount
When the tip of the tool used has become worn, the wear offset amount is used to offset this wear.
Types of wear offset amounts include the tool length wear offset amount, tool radius wear
compensation amount, and nose radius wear compensation amount.
The wear offset amount can be used with offset amount setting types 2 and 3, and it is added to the
shape offset amount for compensation.
(a) Type 1: 1-axis offset amount [M system]

This is the value that is used by rotary tools.
As the tool length offset amount, among the offset amounts for the position of the tool moving
in the direction parallel to the control axis, the offset amount in the longitudinal direction of the
rotary tool is registered. The tool length offset amount is set as a minus value.
As the tool radius compensation amount, among the offset amounts for the position of the
tool moving in the direction parallel to the control axis, the offset amount in the radial direction
of the rotary tool is registered. The tool radius compensation amount is set as a plus value.
One offset amount data is registered in one offset number, and the offset Nos. are assigned
using the address D or H commands. When a No. is assigned by a D address command,
offset is provided in the form of the tool radius; when it is assigned by an H address
command, it is provided in the form of the tool length.
- 100 -
9 Tool Compensation
(b) Type 2: 1-axis offset amounts/with wear offset [M system]

As with type 1, type 2 is for the offset amounts used by rotary tools.
With type 2, four kinds of offset amount data are registered in one offset No.: the tool length
offset amount, tool length wear offset amount, tool radius compensation amount, and tool
radius wear compensation amount.
When an offset No. is assigned by address D as the offset amount, the tool radius is
compensated using the amount obtained by adding the tool radius compensation amount and
tool radius wear compensation amount. Further, the tool length is offset using the amount
obtained by adding the tool length offset amount and tool length wear offset amount.
Figure: Example of how the offset amount is handled when using Wear offset amount when
the type 1 tool length offset amount (Offset types I and II are using type 2
available for handling offset amounts.)
Offset type I Offset type II
M
M M
Tool radius Tool radius
compensation amount compensation amount
Tool length
wear offset
t
Tool length Tool length
offset amount offset amount
Z0.0
Z0.0
Workpiece W Workpiece Tool radius wear
compensation
Table Table amount
(c) Type 3: 2-axis offset amounts [L system]

Type 3 is for the offset amounts used by non-rotary tools.
As the offset amounts, the tool length along the X, Y and Z axes and the wear amount along
each of these axes, the nose radius and nose radius wear amount, tool tip point P and tool
width can be registered.
Offset is provided in the directions of the X, Y and Z axes from the base position in the
program. Generally, the center of the tool rest or the tip of the base tool is used as the
programmed base position.
1. The programmed base position 2. The programmed base position

is the center of the tool rest: is the tip of the base tool:
Base position
Base tool
(base point)
Base position Tool used for
X-axis tool (base point) machining
length offset
amount
X-axis tool length

offset amount
Z-axis tool length offset amount Z-axis tool length offset amount
- 101 -
9 Tool Compensation
The tool tip contour arc radius (nose radius) of a non-rotary tool with an arc (nose radius) at its tip is
registered as the nose radius offset amount.
Tool nose center

Tool nose
X-axis tool length

wear offset
Nose radius compensation Z
amount Z-axis tool length
wear offset
Imaginary tool nose point
The X-axis tool length offset amount, Z-axis tool length offset amount and nose radius
compensation amount are set as plus amounts.
The offset type (1, 2 or 3) is set using a parameter.
- 102 -
10 Coordinate System
10.1 Coordinate System Type and Setting
The coordinate system handled by the NC is shown below.
The points that can be commanded with the movement command are points on the local coordinate
system or machine coordinate system.
L0
G52
L0
W 0－54 G52
G54
G55 W 0－55
G92
EXT
M0
ref
L0 Local coordinate system zero point Offset set with parameters
G52 Local coordinate system offset *1) Offset set with program
W0-54 Workpiece coordinate system zero point (G54) (0 when power is turned ON)
W0-55 Workpiece coordinate system zero point (G55)
G54 Workpiece coordinate system (G54) offset *1)
G55 Workpiece coordinate system (G55) offset
G92 G92 coordinate system shift
EXT External workpiece coordinate offset
M0 Machine coordinate system zero point
ref Reference position
*1)The G52 offset is available independently for G54 to G59.
- 103 -
10.1.1 Machine Coordinate System

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The machine coordinate system is used to express the prescribed positions (such as the tool
change position and stroke end position) characteristic to the machine, and it is automatically set
immediately upon completion of the first dog-type reference position return after the power has
been turned ON or immediately after the power has been turned ON if the absolute position
specifications apply.
The programming format for the commands to move the tool to the machine coordinate system is
given below.
G53 (G90) (G00) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

G53 : Coordinate system selection
G90 : Incremental/absolute commands
G00 : Movement mode [M system]
Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 : End point coordinate on the machine coordinate system
If the incremental or absolute commands and movement mode have been omitted, operation
complies with the modal command that prevails at the time.
G53 (movement on machine coordinate system) is an unmodal command which is effective only in
the block where it is assigned. The workpiece coordinate system being selected is not changed by
this command.
Machine coordinate system (G53) M

1st reference position
Workpiece coordinate system 1
W1
G53 G90 G00 X0 Y0 ;
- 104 -
10.1.2 Coordinate System Setting

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When a coordinate system setting is assigned using the G92 command, the G92 offset amount is
applied so that the machine position in the current workpiece coordinate system is set to the
coordinate values assigned by the G92 command, as shown in the figure below, and the workpiece
coordinate systems are shifted accordingly. The machine does not move, and all the workpiece
coordinate systems from G54 to G59 referenced to the machine coordinate system (or the external
workpiece coordinate system if the external workpiece coordinate offset has been set) are shifted.
Offset of coordinate system by G92 coordinate system setting
Example where W1 is shifted to new W1 when the machine was at the

position (x0, y0) above W1 and the G92 Xx1 Yy1; command was
assigned when the workpiece coordinate system W1 is modal
(external workpiece coordinate system offset = 0; interrupt amount
offset = 0)
G92 offset amount
X : x0–x1
Machine coordinate system Y : y0–y1
M
New W1
y1
W1
y0
x1
x0
Machine position
The shifted coordinate system is returned to its original position by dog-type reference position
return or the program.
- 105 -
When the coordinate system setting is commanded by G92, all the workpiece coordinate systems
from G54 through G59 referenced to the machine coordinate system undergo a shift.
Coordinate system created by automatic Coordinate system after coordinate

coordinate system setting system setting by G92
M M
Machine coordinate Machine
system New W1 coordinate
system
W1 y1
Old W1
y'
G92 x1
x’ Xx1
G92 command
Tool position Yy1
position
1. All the workpiece coordinates from G54 to G59 move in parallel.

2. There are two ways to return a shifted coordinate system to its original position.
a) Dog-type reference position return
b) Move to machine coordinate system zero point and assign G92 and G53 commands in
same block to set the machine coordinate system.
G90 G53 G00 X0 Y0 ; _____ Positioning at machine coordinate system zero point
G92 G53 X0 Y0 ; __________ Coordinate system zero setting in machine coordinate
system
This returns all the workpiece coordinates from G54 to
G59 to their original positions.
10.1.3 Automatic Coordinate System Setting

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When the tool has arrived at the reference position by means of the first manual or automatic dog
type reference position return after the controller power is turned ON, or immediately after the
power is turned ON for the absolute position specifications, this function creates the coordinate
systems in accordance with the parameters settings.
The coordinate systems created are given below.
1. Machine coordinate system corresponding to G53

2. G54 to G59 workpiece coordinate system
3. Local coordinate systems created under G54 to G59 workpiece coordinate systems
The distances from the zero point of G53 machine coordinate system are set to the controller
coordinate related parameters.
- 106 -
10.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Selection (6 sets)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When a multiple number of workpieces with the same shape are to be machined, these commands
enable the same shape to be machined by executing a single machining program in the coordinate
system of each workpiece.
Up to 6 workpiece coordinate systems can be selected.
The G54 workpiece coordinate systems are selected when the power is turned ON or the reset
signal which cancels the modal information is input.
G code Function
G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 (W1)
The command format to select the workpiece coordinate system and to move on the workpiece
coordinate system are given below.
(G90) G54 G00 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

(G90) : (Absolute value command)
G54 : Coordinate system selection
G00 : Movement mode
Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 : Coordinate positions of movement destination
The workpiece coordinate zero points are provided as distances from the zero point of the machine
coordinate system.
Settings can be performed in one of the following three ways:
1.Setting using the setting and display unit
2.Setting using commands assigned from the machining program
3.Setting from the user PLC
Machine coordinate system (G53) M
W2 W1
Workpiece coordinate system 2 Workpiece coordinate
(G55) system 1 (G54)
Start
G90 G56 G00 X0 Y0 ;
W4 W3
Workpiece coordinate system 4 Workpiece coordinate
(G57) system 3 (G56)
- 107 -
10.1.5 Extended Workpiece Coordinates System Selection (48 Sets) G54 1P1 to P48
Extended workpiece coordinate system selection (48 sets) G54. 1P1 to P48
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
In addition to the six workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59, 48 workpiece coordinate systems
can be used by assigning G54.1Pn command.
The command format to select the workpiece coordinate system using the G54.1Pn command and
to move on the workpiece coordinate system are given below.
(G90) G54.1Pn G00 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

(G90) : (Absolute value command)
G54.1Pn : Coordinate system selection
G00 : Movement mode
Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 : Coordinate positions of movement destination
The numerical value n of P following G54.1 indicates each workpiece coordinate system. Specify a
value between 1 and 48.
The workpiece coordinate zero points are provided as distances from the zero point of the machine
coordinate system.
Settings can be performed in one of the following three ways:
1.Setting using the setting and display unit
2.Setting using commands assigned from the machining program
3.Setting from the user PLC
(Note) While the G54.1Pn (extended workpiece coordinate system selection) is modal, the local
coordinate offset is reduced to zero, and the G52 command cannot be used.
- 108 -
10.1.6 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
This function presets the workpiece coordinate system, which has been shifted by the programmed
command or the manual operation, as the workpiece coordinate system which has been offset by
the programmed command (G92.1) from the machine zero point by an amount equivalent to the
workpiece coordinate offset amount.
The workpiece coordinate system is shifted from the machine coordinate system when the such
operations or the programmed commands as below have been performed.
• When manual intervention has occurred in the manual absolute OFF status
• When a movement command was performed in the machine lock status
• When movement was initiated by handle interrupt
• When a movement command was performed in the mirror image mode
• When a local coordinate system was set using the G52 command
• When a workpiece coordinate system was shifted using the G92 command
Just as when manual reference position return has been performed, this function presets the
workpiece coordinate system which has been shifted once to the workpiece coordinate system
which has been offset from the machine zero point by an amount equivalent to the workpiece
coordinate offset amount.
Furthermore, whether to preset relative coordinates as well is selected with a parameter.
Command format
G92.1 (G50.3) X0 Y0 Z0 α0 ; (where α is an additional axis)
Designate the addresses of the axes to be preset.

Axes whose addresses have not designated will not be preset.
Depending on the command type, G50.3 command is used in stead.
A program error results when a value other than 0 is commanded.
- 109 -
10.1.7 Local Coordinate System

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function is for assigning a coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system now being
selected. This enables the workpiece coordinate system to be changed temporarily.
The local coordinate system can be selected independently on each workpiece coordinate system
G54 to G59.
G code Function
G54 G52 Local coordinate system on the workpiece coordinate system 1
The command format of the local coordinate system is given below.
(G54) G52 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

(G54) : Workpiece coordinate system selection
G52 : Local coordinate system setting
Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 : Local coordinate offset amount
The local coordinate zero points are provided as distances from the zero point of the designated
workpiece coordinate system (local coordinate offset).
In the incremental value mode, the position obtained by adding the local coordinate offset amount
to the previously specified offset amount serves as the new local coordinate zero point.
If no workpiece coordinates are designated, the local coordinates will be created on the currently
selected workpiece coordinates.
This command is unmodal but the local coordinate system created by G52 is valid until the next
G52 command is issued.
The local coordinate system is canceled by the input of the reset signal or by manual or automatic
dog-type reference position return.
Machine coordinate system (G53)
M
L1
Local coordinate
G54 G52
y1
W1
x1
Workpiece coordinate 1
(G54)
- 110 -
10.1.8 Coordinate System for Rotary Axis

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The coordinate system of rotary axis ranges from 0 to ±360°. Note that, however, it can be
displayed from 0 to 359.999.
In absolute value command mode, the rotary axis can make a turn or less (not greater than ±360°).
The turning direction depends on the specified sign. A negative sign (–) turns the axis in the
negative direction and a positive sign (+) turns it in the positive (+) direction.
Note that a parameter can be used to move the axis to the end point taking a short cut.
In incremental value command mode, the rotary axis moves the specified distance only.
10.1.9 Plane Selection

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
These G codes are for specifying the planes for the arc, tool radius compensation, coordinate
rotation and other such commands.
G17 ; .................. Xp-Yp plane designation

G18 ; .................. Zp-Xp plane designation
G19 ; .................. Yp-Zp plane designation
(1) A parameter can be used to set either the X, Y or Z axis to which the additional axis is to be
parallel.
(2) A parameter can be used to set the initialization status (when the power has been turned ON or
when the reset status has been entered) to G17, G18 or G19.
(3) The movement commands have no connection with the plane selection.
Example
G19 X100. ; With these program commands, X100. is the axis which
does not exist on the G19 (Yp, Zp) plane, Yp-Zp are
selected by G19 and the X axis moves by 100. mm
separately from the plane selection.
G17 X100. R50. ; With these program commands, the Xp-Yp plane is selected
by G17 and the arc command is controlled on the X-Y plane
by this command.
- 111 -
10.1.10 Origin Set

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Using the setting and display unit, the coordinate system (current position and workpiece
coordinate position) can be set to "0" by operating the screen. This function is the same as the
coordinate system setting command " G92 X0 (Y0 or Z0) ; ".
[POSITION] [WORK(G54)] [POSOTION] [WORK(G54)]

X -150.345 X -150.345 X
C.B X 0.000 X 0.000
CAN
Y - 12.212 Y - 12.212 Y 0.000 Y 0.000
C.B
Y
Z - 1.000 Z - 1.000 CAN
Z 0.000 Z 0.000
A - 0.000 A - 0.000 Z
C.B
CAN
A 0.000 A 0.000
C.B
When axes are set to "0" in order, the Y and Z axis can be set by pressing CAN key successively
without pressing Y and Z keys.
10.1.11 Counter Set

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Using the setting and display unit, the position counter display can be change to "0" by operating
the screen.
C.B
(1) This operation is the same as the operation of "Origin Set", but press INPUT key instead of CAN
key.
(2) Only the [POSITION] counter display is changed to "0", and the other coordinate system counter
displays are not changed.
- 112 -
10.2 Return
10.2 Return
10.2.1 Manual Reference Position Return
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function enables the tool to be returned manually to the position (reference position) which is
characteristic to the machine.
(1) Return pattern to reference position
(a) Dog type
Creep speed
Reference
position return
speed
Dog 1
Dog
R R
When starting in same direction When starting in opposite direction

as final advance direction as final advance direction
(b) High-speed type
Rapid traverse rate
Dog
R
(2) Differences according to detection method
First return after power ON Second return and following

Incremental position detection
Dog-type High-speed
method
Absolute position detection method
High-speed High-speed
- 113 -
10.2 Return
10.2.2 Automatic 1st Reference Position Return

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The machine can be returned to the first reference position by assigning the G28 command during
automatic operation. If the interim point is commanded, the machine is moved up to that point by
rapid traverse so that it is positioned and then returned separately for each axis to the first
reference position.
Alternatively, by assigning the G29 command, the machine can be first positioned separately for
each axis at the G28 or G30 interim point, and then positioned at the command position.
G code Function
G28 Automatic 1st reference position return
G29 Start position return (The tool first returns to the interim position of the 1st reference
position return start from the 1st reference position, and then is positioned at the
position designated in the program.)
The G28 programming format is given below.
G28 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

G28 : Return command
Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 : Return control axes (interim point)
Each axis is first positioned by rapid traverse to the position (interim point) assigned for the
assigned axis and then is returned independently to the 1st reference position.
G29 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 : Return control axes (assigned position)
The tool is first moved by rapid traverse to the interim position which is passed through with G28 or
G30, and is then positioned by rapid traverse at the position assigned by the program.
1st reference point R

–X
Non -
G28 interpolation
movement
G28
Interpolation or
non - interpolation can Interim
point
be selected G29
Interpolation or
non – interpolation can
G29 be selected –Y
- 114 -
10.2 Return
If the position detector is for the incremental detection system, the first reference position return for
the first time after the NC power has been turned ON will be the dog-type. However, whether the
second and subsequent returns are to be the dog type or the high-speed type can be selected by
designating a parameter.
The high-speed type is always used when the position detector is for the absolute position
detection system.
(Note 1) The automatic 1st reference position return pattern is the same as for manual reference
position return.
(Note 2) The number of axes for which reference position return can be performed simultaneously
depends on the number of simultaneously controlled axes.
(Note 3) If, at the time of the first reference position return, the tool radius compensation or nose
radius compensation has not been canceled, it will be temporarily canceled by the
movement to the interim point. The compensation is restored by the next movement after
the return.
(Note 4) If, at the time of the first reference position return, the tool length offset has not been
canceled, the offset will be canceled by the movement from the interim point to the first
reference position, and the offset amount will also be cleared. It is possible to cancel the
tool length offset temporarily using a parameter instead. In this case, however, the offset
is restored by the next movement command.
(Note 5) Interpolation or non-interpolation can be selected using a parameter for the movement up
to the G28 interim point or for the movement from the G29 interim point to the command
point. Non-interpolation applies for movement from the G28 interim point to the reference
position and movement up to the G29 interim point.
(Note 6) The machine will not stop at the interim point even when a single block is selected.
- 115 -
10.2 Return
10.2.3 2nd, 3rd, 4th Reference Position Return

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
As with automatic 1st reference position return, commanding G30Pn during automatic operation
enables the tool to be returned to the set points (2nd, 3rd or 4th reference positions) characteristic
to the machine. The 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference positions can be set by parameters.
G code Function
G30 P2 2nd reference position return
G30 P3 3rd reference position return
G30 P4 4th reference position return
G30 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Pp1 ;

Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 : Return control axes (interim point)
Pp1 : Return position No.
The tool is first positioned by rapid traverse to the interim point commanded for the assigned axis
and then is returned independently to the reference position.
2nd reference point
1st reference point
–X
G30 P2
Start point Interim point
G30 P3
G30 P4
3rd reference point
–Y
4th reference point
(Note 1) The second reference position return is performed if the P address is omitted.
(Note 2) The number of axes for which reference position return can be performed simultaneously
depends on the number of simultaneously controlled axes.
(Note 3) If, at the time of the reference position return, the tool radius compensation has not been
canceled, it will be temporarily canceled by the movement up to the interim point. The
compensation is restored by the next movement command after the return.
- 116 -
10.2 Return
(Note 4) If, at the time of the reference position return, the tool length offset has not been
canceled, it will be canceled and the offset amount also cleared upon completion of
reference position return. The tool length offset can also be canceled temporarily using a
parameter. In this case, however, the tool offset is restored by the next movement
command.
(Note 5) Whether interpolation or non-interpolation is to apply to the movement up to the interim
point can be selected using a parameter. Non-interpolation applies for movement from
the interim point to each of the reference positions.
(Note 6) The machine will not stop at the interim point even when a single block is selected.
10.2.4 Reference Position Verification

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
By commanding G27, a machining program, which has been prepared so that the tool starts off
from the reference position and returns to the reference position, can be checked to see whether
the tool will return properly to the reference position.

G27 : Verification command
Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 : Return control axes
Pp1 : Verification No.
P1 : 1st reference position verification
P2 : 2nd reference position verification
P3 : 3rd reference position verification
P4 : 4th reference position verification
The assigned axis is first positioned by rapid traverse to the commanded position and then, if this is
the reference position, the reference position arrival signal is output.
When the address P is omitted, the first reference position verification will be applied.
(Note 1) The number of axes for which reference position verification can be performed
simultaneously depends on the number of simultaneously controlled axes.
(Note 2) An alarm results unless the tool is positioned at the reference position upon completion of
the command.
(Note 3) Whether interpolation or non-interpolation is to apply to the movement can be selected
using a parameter.
- 117 -
10.2 Return
10.2.5 Absolute Position Detection

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
The absolute position detection function holds the relation of the actual machine position and the
machine coordinates in the controller with a battery even when the power is turned OFF. When the
power is turned ON again, automatic operation can be started without executing reference position
return. (High-speed return will always be used for the reference position return command.)
For the absolute position detection method, there are two method such as the dog-type and dog-
less type according to how the zero point is established.
Establishment of Adjustment of zero

Method Details
zero point point position
Dog-type Same method as Zero point is The data is set in the
incremental detection established with dog- parameter of zero point
dog-type type reference position shift amount.
return completion.
Dog-less Marked The zero point position The zero point is The value equivalent to
type point is set from the screen. established by input the shift amount is set
method from the zero point in the zero point
initialization screen. initialization screen.
Machine The zero point is The zero point is The value equivalent to
stopper established by pressing established when a the shift amount is set
method the machine against a torque limit is applied in the zero point
set point on the on the servo and the initialization screen.
machine. torque limit is reached
by pressing against the
machine stopper.
Diagnosis during absolute position detection
(1) The machine position at power OFF and ON can be confirmed on the absolute position monitor
screen.
(2) If the amount that the axis is moved during power OFF exceeds the tolerable value (parameter),
a warning signal will be output.
(3) An alarm will be output if the absolute position information is lost.
(4) An alarm will be output if the voltage of the battery for backing up the absolute position data
drops.
- 118 -
10.2 Return
10.2.6 Tool Exchange Position Return

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
By specifying the tool change position in a parameter and also assigning a tool exchange position
return command in a machining program, the tool can be changed at the most appropriate position.
The axes for which returning to the tool change position is performed and the order in which the
axes begin to return can be changed by commands.
G30.n ;
n = 1 to 6 : Specify the axes that return to the tool change position and the order in which they
return. (For L system, n = 1 to 5)
Command and return order
[M system]
Command Return order
G30.1 Z axis → X axis • Y axis ( → additional axis)
G30.2 Z axis → X axis → Y axis ( → additional axis)
G30.3 Z axis → Y axis→ X axis ( → additional axis)
G30.4 X axis → Y axis • Z axis ( → additional axis)
G30.5 Y axis → X axis • Z axis ( → additional axis)
G30.6 X axis • Y axis • Z axis ( → additional axis)
[L system]
Command Return order
G30.1 X axis only ( → additional axis)
G30.2 Z axis only ( → additional axis)
G30.3 X axis → Z axis ( → additional axis)
G30.4 Z axis → X axis ( → additional axis)
G30.5 X axis • Z axis ( → additional axis)
(Note1) An arrow ( → ) indicates the order of axes that begin to return. A period ( • )
indicates that the axes begin to return simultaneously.
Example : "Z axis → X axis" indicate that the Z axis returns to the tool
change position, then the X axis does.
(Note2) G30.6 is only for the M system.
The tool exchange position return ON/OFF for the additional axis can be set with parameter for the
additional axis. For the order to return to the tool change position, the axes return after the standard
axis completes the return to the tool change position (refer to above table).
The additional axis cannot return to the tool change position alone.
- 119 -
10.2 Return
10.2.7 C Axis Reference Position Return

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
This function is used to carry out the position control for the spindle with the axis motor, and applied
to the machine which can switch the spindle motor connected with the spindle to the axis motor.
The C axis (rotation axis) is generally used for the axis motor, and the specification will be the same
as the normal C axis control after switching.
As for the reference position return during the C axis connection, either the normal dog-type
reference position return with the C axis or the Z-phase pulse type reference position return with the
spindle encoder can be selected with parameter.
Dog type (with C axis detector)
Reference position return method
Z-phase pulse type
(with spindle encoder)
(Supplements)
(1) Reference position return method
The Z-phase pulse type is applied in the first reference position return after the servo OFF for
the C axis (generally means changing to the spindle). The high-speed type is applied in the
(second or later) reference position return after the Z-phase pulse type reference position
return.
(2) Z-phase pulse type reference position return

When there is the reference position return command, the spindle is rotated until the Z-phase
pulse of the spindle encoder is detected, and then stopped. (Figure 1 (1))
Encoder gear ratio 1:1 The Z-pulse is detected within one rotation.
Encoder gear ratio 1:2 The Z-pulse is detected within two rotations.
Next, in order to catch the change of the pulse position and improve the accuracy of the
remaining distance, the spindle is rotated with G28crp (approach speed) and then stopped
again. (Figure 1 (2))
Set as follows: Standard value G28crp = 8 (°/min) (Encoder gear ratio 1:1)
For the spindle, one rotation to the point where the Z-pulse is detected is made with G28rap
(G28 rapid traverse rate). (Figure 1 (3)) This point is applied to the reference position. If the
reference position shift amount is included, the spindle is rotated to the point of the figure 1 (4)
and then stopped.
Spindle encoder Z-phase pulse
G28crp
G28rap G28rap
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Base shift amount

(one rotation of G28sft
spindle)
Figure 1 Z-phase pulse type reference position return
- 120 -
10.2 Return
(1) (3)
(2) (1)
Spindle (2) Spindle
(3)
(1) G28rap
(2) G28crp
(a) (b) (3) G28rap
Figure 2 Operation of spindle
With the figure 2 (a), the rotation of the spindle that the G28 rapid traverse is performed in the
forward direction (the same direction as the parameter #2030) is looked from the front. With
the figure 2 (b), the rotation of the spindle that the G28 rapid traverse is performed in the
opposite direction (the opposite direction to the parameter #2030) is looked from the front.
(3) High-speed type reference position return

After the Z-phase pulse type reference position return, the high-speed type reference position
return is applied in the second or later reference position return.
G28rap
Figure 3 High-speed type reference position return
- 121 -
11 Operation Support Functions
11.1 Program Control

11.1.1 Optional Block Skip
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When "/" (slant code) is programmed at the head of a block, and the optional block skip input signal
from the external source is turned ON for automatic operation, the block with the "/" code is skipped.
If the optional block skip signal is turned OFF, the block with the "/" code will be executed without
being skipped.
Optional block skip

Programming example Switch OFF Switch ON
N1 N1 N1
N2 N2 N2
N3 N3 N3
/N4 N4
/N5 N5
N6 N6 N6
N7 N7 N7
: : :
- 122 -
11.1.3 Single Block

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The commands for automatic operation can be executed one block at a time (block stop) by turning
ON the single block input signal. When the single block input signal is turned ON temporarily during
continuous operation, the machine will stop after that block has been executed.
When operation is switched to another automatic operation mode (for example, memory operation
mode to MDI operation mode) during continuous operation, the machine will stop after that block
has been executed.
~
~
Single block (SBK)
~
~
Automatic operation
start (ST)
~
~
~
G01 X1000… G01 Z100…
~
G01 Z1000…
~
Movement block
SBK ON at start SBK change SBK ON after

during movement block completion
INVALID
VALID VALID
As with the multi-part system specification, the following function can be selected instead.
Multi-part system single block (L system)

This function is for executing single block operation while maintaining the synchronization
between the part systems when two or more part systems are operated. When one part
system has been stopped by single block stop, the other part systems are stopped by feed
hold.
- 123 -
11.2 Program Test
11.2 Program Test

11.2.1 Dry Run
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
F code feed commands for automatic operation can be switched to the manual feed rate data of the
machine operation board by turning ON the dry run input signal.
Manual rapid traverse Manual rapid traverse

Command
selector switch OFF selector switch ON
G00, G27, G28, G29, G30, G60 Manual feed rate Rapid traverse rate
G01, G02, G03 Manual feed rate Cutting clamp speed
11.2.2 Machine Lock

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When the machine lock input signal is set to ON, the NC operations can be executed without
assigning commands to the NC axes.
The feed rate in the machine lock status is the command speed.
The M, S, T and B commands are executed as usual and operation is completed by returning the
FIN signal.
(1) Reference position return (manual, G28, G29, G30) is controlled as far as the interim point in
the machine lock status but the block is completed when the interim point is reached.
(2) Machine lock is effective in the signal status applying when the axis has stopped.
(3) Block stop will be applied if the machine lock signal is turned ON and OFF or OFF and ON
during automatic operation.
All axes will be simultaneous with the standard PLC.
- 124 -
11.2 Program Test
11.2.3 Miscellaneous Function Lock

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The M, S, T and B (2nd miscellaneous function) output signals are not output to the machine or PLC
when the miscellaneous function lock signal of external input is turned ON. This function can be
used when checking only the movement commands in a program check.
The start signals of the M command are output for the M00, M01, M02 and M30 commands, and so
a completion signal must be returned.
(1) Fixed cycle spindle functions containing an S code and any M, S, T or B function assigned by
a manual numerical command or in automatic operation will not be executed. The code data
and strobe (MF, SF, TF, BF) outputs are stopped.
(2) If this signal is set ON after the code data has already been output, the output is executed as it
would normally be executed until the end (until FIN1 or FIN2 is received and the strobe is
turned OFF).
(3) Even when this signal is ON, the M00, M01, M02 and M30 commands among the
miscellaneous functions are executed, and the decode signal, code data and strobe signals
are also output as they would be normally.
(4) Any miscellaneous functions which are executed only inside the controller and not output (M96,
M97, M98, M99) are executed as they would be normally even if this signal is ON.
11.2.4 Graphic Check

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
The movement path of the machine tool can be monitored and traced, and the path of machining
programs can be traced and checked using the check and tracing functions based on processing
inside the controller.
This function enables the tool path of machining programs to be traced without operating any
functions.
For the display mode, 1-plane, 2-plane and 3-dimensional display are provided. In the 3-
dimensional display mode, cubic shapes can be rotated and tracing of the figure seen from the
desired direction can be assigned.
11.2.5 Graphic Trace

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
The machine position of the machine tool is traced. By this operation, the actual movement path in
automatic operation or manual operation is traced.
For the display mode, 1-plane, 2-plane and 3-dimensional display are provided. In the 3-
dimensional display mode, cubic shapes can be rotated and tracing of the figure seen from the
desired direction can be assigned.
- 125 -
11.3 Program Search / Start / Stop

11.3.1 Program Search
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The program No. of the program to be operated automatically can be designated and called. Upon
completion of search, the head of the program searched is displayed.
Machining programs are stored in the memory inside the NC system.
11.3.2 Sequence Number Search

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Blocks can be indexed by setting the program No., sequence No. and block No. of the program to
be operated automatically.
The searched program is displayed upon completion of the search.
Machining programs are stored in the memory inside the NC system.
- 126 -
11.3.3 Collation Stop

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
This function enables the single block stop status to be established at any block without having to
set the SINGLE BLOCK switch to ON.
It can be used to readily check the machining shape up to the designated block and resume
machining.
(Example)
O100:
G91;
……
G00 Z-150.;
N100 G81 X-100. Z-100. R-50. F100;
N101 X-100.
N102 X-100.
N103 Y100.
N104 X100.
N105 X100.
……
…… Operation
操作手順procedure
Start
開始
SetO100 N101に照合停止を設定します
collation stop in O100 N101.
Auto start
自動起動
4 5 6 Collation stop upon completion of O100 N102 positioning

O100 N102位置決め完了時に照合停止
Measure and1個目の加工形状を計測・確認します
check the machining shape of the first
正常加工か？
Machining OK?
異常
NG
OK
正常
3 2 1
Check
以降の加工 subsequent リセット
Reset
する形状を確認する？
machining shapes?
Yes
Modify machining conditions (tool
加工条件（工具長補正量等）修正
しない
No length offset amount, etc.).
照合停止を再設定します
Set collation stop again. Restart
再スタート
加工形状を再確認する？
Re-check machining shape? する
Restart
再スタート Machining resumes from
前回照合停止位置から加工再開しない
previous collation stop position.
Machining resumes from
前回照合停止位置から加工再開 Auto
自動起動 start
previous collation stop position.
照合停止設定ブロックで照合停止 Machining starts from the
1個目の加工形状から加工開始
Collation stop at block in which machining shape of the first work.
collation stop has been set.
加工形状を計測・確認します
Measure and check the End

終了
machining shape?
- 127 -
11.3.4 Program Restart

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
When a machining program is to be resumed after it has been suspended midway due to tool
damage or for some other reason, this function searches the program and the block to be resumed
and enables machining to be resumed from the block. When multiple part systems are used, only
for 1-part system, the program can be resumed.
There are two resumption methods, type 1 and type 2.
Resumption type 1
Machining is resumed by type 1 if feed hold has been performed due to tool damage, etc. or if
resetting has been performed.
(a) Type A (standard specification)
The designated sequence No. and block No. are searched only in the designated program No..
In the case of the standard specification, the program No. cannot be omitted.
(b) Type B
The program No. cannot be input since the main program which has been searched itself
serves as the target. (A setting error results if the program No. is input.)
The designated sequence No. and block No. are searched in all the programs (including sub-
programs) among the searched programs.
Resumption type 2
(a) Type A (standard specification)
If, before a resume search is initiated for the machining program to be resumed, a machining
program differing from that program was run in the tape or memory mode, the machining
program to be resumed will be resumed using type 2. It is also resumed using type 2 in cases
where the coordinate system to be used when machining is resumed is to be changed from
the coordinate system used during the previous automatic operation.
The operation sequence for type 2 is the same as for type 1. However, the coordinate system
settings and other operations which must be performed before running the machining program
must all be performed before initiating the resume search. The main program to be resumed
should be searched at any time up to the moment immediately prior to starting the resumption
of the machining.
The designated sequence No. and block No. are searched only in the designated program No..
In the case of the standard specification, the program No. cannot be omitted.
(b) Type B
If, before a resume search is initiated for the machining program to be resumed, a machining
program differing from that program was run in the tape or memory mode, the machining
program to be resumed will be resumed using type 2. It is also resumed using type 2 in cases
where the coordinate system to be used when machining is resumed is to be changed from
the coordinate system used during the previous automatic operation.
The operation sequence for type 2 is the same as for type 1. However, the coordinate system
settings and other operations which must be performed before running the machining program
must all be performed before initiating the resume search.
The program No. cannot be input since the main program which has been searched itself
serves as the target. (A setting error results if the program No. is input.)
Therefore, the main program to be resumed must be searched before the resume search is
initiated. The designated sequence No. and block No. are searched in all the programs
(including sub-programs) among the searched programs.
- 128 -
11.3.5 Automatic Operation Start

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
With the input of the automatic operation start signal (change from ON to OFF), the automatic
operation of the program that has been operation searched is started by the controller (or the halted
program is restarted).
Automatic operation
start (ST)
G01 X 100... G01 Z 100...

Movement block
Automatic operation startup is performed on a part system by part system basis.
11.3.6 NC Reset
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function enables the controller to be reset.
Reset 1 Reset 2 Reset & Rewind

1 G command modals Retained Initialized Initialized
Tool compensation data Retained Canceled Canceled
2
(no operations)
3 Memory indexing Executed Not executed Executed
4 Errors/alarms Reset Reset Reset
5 M, S and T code outputs Retained Retained Retained
M code independent OFF OFF OFF
6
output
Control axis moving Decelerated and Decelerated and Decelerated and
7
stopped stopped stopped
Output signals "In reset" signal "In reset" signal "In reset" signal
8
"In rewind" signal
- 129 -
11.3.7 Feed Hold

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When the feed hold signal is set ON during automatic operation, the machine feed is immediately
decelerated and stopped. The machine is started again by the "Automatic operation start (cycle
start)" signal.
(1) When the feed hold mode is entered during automatic start, the machine feed is stopped
immediately, but the M, S, T and B commands in the same block are still executed as
programmed.
(2) When the mode is switched during automatic operation to manual operation (jog feed, handle
feed or incremental feed), the feed hold stop mode is entered.
(3) An interrupt operation based on manual operation (jog feed, handle feed or incremental feed)
can be executed during feed hold.
Atomatic operation
start
Feed hold
Axis movement state
11.3.8 Search & Start

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
If the search & start signal is input in a status where the memory mode is selected, the designated
machining program is searched and executed from its head.
If the search & start signal has been input during automatic operation in the memory mode, search
& start is executed after resetting.
- 130 -
11.4 Interrupt Operation

11.4.1 Manual Interruption
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Manual interrupt is a function that enables manual operations to be performed during automatic
operation. The systems used to select the operation mode are as follows:
• System which initiates the interrupt by switching from the automatic mode to manual mode
• System which initiates the interrupt by selecting the manual mode at the same time as the
automatic mode
(Refer to "11.4.9 Simultaneous Operation of Manual and Automatic Modes".)
Whether the manual interrupt amount is to be retained and automatic operation is to be continued
is determined by setting manual absolute mode ON or OFF (refer to "11.4.3 Manual Absolute Mode
ON/OFF").
- 131 -
11.4.2 Automatic Operation Handle Interruption

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The handle command can interrupt and be superimposed onto a command without suspending
automatic operation and the machine can be moved by rotating the manual pulse generator during
automatic operation.
If the spindle load is greatly exceeded when cutting a workpiece as per the machining program due
to a high rough cutting amount in face machining, for instance, automatic handle interrupt makes it
possible to raise the Z surface and reduce the load easily without suspending feed in the automatic
operation mode.
Automatic handle interrupt is conducted by setting the "automatic handle interrupt" valid switch
which is provided separately from the "manual operation mode". The axis selection and pulse scale
factor operation are conducted as for manual handle feed.
Whether, after an interrupt, to return to the path of the machining program by automatic operation
or remain offset by the amount equivalent to the interrupt amount is determined using a parameter.
Y Z Tool
X
Interrupt
10
1 100
Workpiece
Handle feed
Automatic feed
~
G01 Z_F
X_Y_ ;
X _ Y_ ;
Z_Y_ ;
~
Feed path with automatic feed

and handle feed superimposed
- 132 -
11.4.3 Manual Absolute Mode ON / OFF

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The program absolute values are updated by an amount equivalent to the distance by which the
tool is moved by hand when the manual absolute selection input signal is turned ON.
In other words, the coordinate system based on the original program will not shift even if the tool
(machine) is moved by hand. Thus, if automatic operation is started in this case, the tool will return
to the path before manual movement.
X
W Programmed path
Feed hold stop
(absolute value command)
Manual interrupt
(Program absolute value is updated
by an amount equivalent to traveled value.)
Path after manual interrupt
Tool passes along same path as that programmed.
–Y With manual absolute switch ON
X
W
Programmed path
Feed hold stop
(absolute value command)
Manual interrupt
(Program absolute value is not updated
by an amount equivalent to traveled value.)
Path after manual interrupt
Path is shifted by an amount equivalent to manual interrupt value.

(Zero point moves.)
–Y
With manual absolute switch OFF
The switch ON state will be entered when the power is turned ON.
- 133 -
11.4.4 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
This function suspends the thread cutting cycle if a feed hold signal has been input during
thread cutting in a thread cutting cycle.
If a feed hold signal is input during chamfering or thread cutting without chamfering, operation stops
at the position where the block following the thread cutting is completed.
Position where the block following

the thread cutting is completed
Suspension position
Chamfering angle
Feed hold
Period when thread

cutting is performed
- 134 -
11.4.5 Tapping Retract

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
If tapping is interrupted by a reset or emergency stop signal that is input during tapping and the tap
is left engaged inside the workpiece, the tap tool engaged inside the workpiece can be rotated in
the reverse direction so that it will be disengaged by inputting the tap retract signal.
Z axis (spindle)
Tap feed Tap retract

(spindle forward) (spindle reverse)
Retract signal
Tap bottom
This function can be used by an interruption initiated by reset or emergency stop.

A return is made to the initial point by tap retract.
- 135 -
11.4.6 Manual Numerical Value Command

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
On the screen of the setting and display unit, the M, S and T (and B when 2nd miscellaneous
function is valid) commands can be executed by setting numerical values and pressing [INPUT].
This enables operations such as spindle speed changing, starting, stopping, calling and selecting
assigned tools and replacing of the spindle tools to be done easily without having to prepare or
revise the machining program. Even in an automatic operation mode, these operations can be
conducted with block stop.
Furthermore, the M and T commands can be issued even on the tool offset amount setting and
display screen, therefore at the manual tool length measurement, the tools can be called
successively to the spindle and measured very simply without having to change the screen page.
S command value
S 3600
Manual PLC
T 12 numerical T command value sequence
value processing
M 5
M command value
S 7 8 9
T 4 5 6 (Note) The input operation starts the execution of
the M, S or T command.
M 1 2 3 Input
– 0 •
11.4.8 MDI Interruption

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function enables MDI programs to be executed during automatic operation in the single block
stop status. When the modal status is changed in the MDI program, the modal status in the
automatic operation mode is also changed.
- 136 -
11.4.9 Simultaneous Operation of Manual and Automatic Modes

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function enables manual operations to be performed during automatic operation by selecting
an automatic operation mode (tape, MDI or memory) and manual mode (handle, step, jog or
manual reference position return) simultaneously.
(Arbitrary feed based on the PLC is also possible.)
Axis
switching
Tape
Automatic X
operation X-axis
Automatic mode Memory posi-tion
Y
control
MDI Axis control Z
Simultaneous manual and

automatic operation Y-axis
posi-tion
control
Jog
Manual X
operation
Handle
Y
Z-axis
Manual mode Return Axis control posi-tion
Z control
The feed rates for the axes subject to automatic commands and the feed rates for axes subject to
manual command are set separately. The acceleration/deceleration modes (rapid traverse, cutting
feed) are also set separately. Rapid traverse override, cutting feed override and second cutting
feed override are valid both for axes subject to automatic commands and axes subject to manual
commands. Override cancel is valid for axes subject to automatic commands. Manual interlock is
applied to axes subject to manual commands; automatic interlock is applies to axes subject to
automatic commands.
11.4.10 Simultaneous Operation of JOG and Handle Modes

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When executing the jog feed and handle feed, both these feeds are available without changing the
mode each time by inputting the jog mode signal and simultaneous operation of jog and handle
modes signal to the control unit. However, during moving in one of the two modes, the feed in the
other mode is not valid.
- 137 -
11.4.11 Reference Position Retract

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When the retract signal is turned ON during the automatic and manual operation, this function can
retract the tool immediately to a set reference position.
The reference position to be retracted to can be selected from the 1st reference position to 4th
reference position with 2-bit input signal.
Set the retracting order of axes with parameter (#2019 revnum).
(1) Other operations
(a) When the retract signal is turned ON, the control unit is reset, the operation is interrupted,
and the machining program is indexed.
(b) When the rapid traverse input signal is input, the rapid traverse rate is applied. When the
rapid traverse input signal is not input, the manual feed rate is applied.
(c) If the retract signal is input during execution of a tapping cycle, the operation will be the
tapping retract, and the normal reference position retract will be executed from the end
point of tapping retract operation.
(d) Even if the retract signal is input during the thread cutting cycle, it will be invalid. However,
if the retract signal is input in a block other than the thread cutting block, the retracting
operation will be executed.
(e) If the retract signal is turned OFF midway during retracting, the operation will decelerate
and stop. However, since the machining program is indexed, the block can not be
resumed.
(f) The retract signal is invalid if the coordinate system is not established. An operation error
will occur when the retract signal is input in such case.
11.4.13 Skip Retract

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
This function is used to return to the opposite advance direction when the skip signal is input during
G31 command.
11.4.14 PLC Interruption

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
The interrupt program set with the R register is executed with the signals from the PLC during
single block stop in program operation or during the manual mode.
- 138 -
12 Programming Support Functions
12.1 Machining Method Support Functions
12 Program Support Functions

12.1.1 Program
12.1.1.1 Subprogram Control

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
{ { { { { { { {
M system 8 layers 8 layers 8 layers 8 layers 8 layers 8 layers 8 layers 8 layers
{ { { { { { { {
L system 8 layers 8 layers 8 layers 8 layers 8 layers 8 layers 8 layers 8 layers
When the same pattern is repeated during machining, the machining pattern is registered as one
subprogram and the subprogram is called from the main program as required, thereby realizing the
same machining easily. Efficient use of program can be made. The call is designated with the
program number and sequence number.
M98 Pp1 Hh1 Ll1 ;

M98 : Call command
Pp1 : Subprogram number
Hh1 : Sequence number
Ll1 : Number of repetitions
(Branch to subprogram)
Op1 (Subprogram)
:
Nh1
:
M99 ; (Return to main program)
Subprograms can be nested up to eight levels deep.
Main program: Main program: Main program: Main program:

…
Level 0 (P1000) Level 1 (P1) Level 2 (P2) Level 8 (P8)
P1000 P1 P2 P8
•
8-level nesting
M98 P2
• M99;
M98 P1
•
M98 P3;
M99;
M99;
M02/M30 ;
- 139 -
A subprogram branch destination or repetition of a subprogram can be specified.
Specifying a subprogram branch destination Specifying repetition of a subprogram
Main program Subprogram Main program Subprogram

P1000 P1 P1000 P1
N1;
Five
M98 P1 H1;
M99; repetitions
M98 P1 L5;
N100;
M98 P1 H100;
M99;
M99;
Return after five
M02/M30; M02/M30; repetitions
- 140 -
12.1.1.3 Scaling
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
The shape commanded by the program can be extended or reduced to the desired size by applying
a scale factor to the movement axis command value within the range assigned by the scaling
command.
G code Function
G50 Scaling cancel
G51 Scaling ON
The program format is given below.

G51 : Call command
Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 : Scaling center coordinates
Pp1 : Scale factor
The scale factor ranges from 0.000001 to 99.999999 times.
Y
sc s1 p1
y1
sc : Scaling center
p1,p2,p3 : Programmed shape
s1,s2,s3 : Shape after scaling
s3
s2
p2
p3
X
x1
(Note 1) Scaling cannot be applied to tool radius compensation, tool position offset, tool length
offset or to other such offset amounts.
(Note 2) Scaling applies only to those axes among X, Y and Z which have been commanded; it
does not apply to axes which have not been commanded.
When the scale factor is not assigned, the parameter setting applies instead.
- 141 -
12.1.2 Macro Program
12.1.2.1 User Macro

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
M system
4 layers 4 layers 4 layers 4 layers 4 layers 4 layers 4 layers 4 layers
∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system
4 layers 4 layers 4 layers 4 layers 4 layers 4 layers 4 layers 4 layers
(1) Macro commands (1) ; G65 to G67

In order to carry through one integrated function, a group of control and arithmetic instructions
can be used and registered as a macro program. Furthermore, subprograms with a high
degree of expandability can be configured by setting these macro programs as types which
are capable of conducting control and arithmetic operations using variable commands.
G code Function
G65 Macro call (Sample call)
G66 Macro modal call A
G66.1 Macro modal call B
G67 Macro modal call cancel
The program formats are given below.
G65 Pp1 Ll1 Argument ;

G65 : Call command
Pp1 : Program No.
Ll1 : No. of repetitions
Argument : Variable data assignment
The macro program is called immediately by this command.
G66 Pp1 Ll1 Argument ;

G66 : Call command
Pp1 : Program No.
The macro program is executed from the block with the axis command following this command.
G66.1 Pp1 Ll1 Argument ;

G66.1 : Call command
Pp1 : Program No.
The macro program is executed with the word data of each block as the argument.
- 142 -
The following macro command functions are available.
Arithmetic #1 = <Expression> ;
commands Various arithmetic operations can be conducted between variables by the
above.
"<Expression>" is a combination of constants, variables, functions and
operators.
Assignment The portion in which the operator is to be given priority can be enclosed in [ ].
of priority of Up to five pairs of square parentheses [ ] including the function [ ] can be
arithmetic used.
operations The normal priority of operation is functions and multiplication/division followed
by addition/subtraction.
Control (1) IF [<Conditional expression>] GOTO n ;
commands (2) WHILE [<Conditional expression>] DO m ;
⋅⋅⋅
END m ;
The flow of the program can be controlled by these commands. "n"
denotes the sequence numbers of the branching destination. "m" is an
identification number, and 1 to 127 can be used. Note that only 27
nestings can be used.
(Note) The variable commands are provided under the optional specifications independently of the
user macros. If they are to be used, specify the optional specifications separately.
(2) Macro commands (2)

Specific G commands and the miscellaneous commands (M, S, T, B) can be used for macro
call.
(a) Macro call using G codes

Simply by assigning a G code, it is possible to call user macro programs with the
prescribed program number.
Format
GXX <Argument> ;
GXX : G code for performing macro call
The correspondence between the G×× code which performs macro call and the program
number for the macro to be called is set by a parameter.
• Up to 10 codes from G00 to G255 can be used for this command. (Whether to use
codes such as G00, G01 or G02 which have already been clearly assigned for specific
applications by the EIA standards as macro codes can be changed over using a
parameter. [M system].)
• Up to 800 codes from G200 to G999 can be used in this command. [L system]
- 143 -
(b) Macro call using miscellaneous commands (M, S, T, B code macro call)
Simply by designating an M (or S, T, B) code, it is possible to call user macro programs
with the prescribed program number. (Entered M codes and all S, T and B codes can be
used.)
Mm ; (or Ss;, Tt;, Bb;)

Mm (Ss, Tt, Bb) : M (or S, T, B) code for performing macro call
The correspondence between the Mm code which performs macro call and the program
number for the macro to be called is set by a parameter. Up to 10 M codes from M00 to
M95 can be entered.
Select codes to be entered which are not the codes basically required by the machine and
which are not M codes M0, M1, M2, M30 and M96 through M99.
(Note 1) G commands in G code macro programs are not subject to macro calls but normal G
commands. M commands in M code macro programs are not subject to macro calls but
normal M commands. (The same applies to S, T and B codes.)
(Note 2) The registration of the program number used for calling the G code macro or M code
macro can be done independently for each system. [M system]
12.1.2.2 Machine Tool Builder Macro
12.1.2.2.1 Machine Tool Builder Macro SRAM

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
This function enables macro programs exclusively designed for use by the machine builders to be
registered in addition to the regular macro programs. These macros can be called from user
programs using the same method as the one used for regular macros. Machine builder macros can
be locked, preventing them from being viewed unless the key word is input.
Machine builder macro programs are stored in a dedicated area which means that the user
program registration area is not reduced in the process.
Call format 1
G65 Pp1 Ll ;
P : Machine builder macro program number (0100001000 – 0199999998)
l : Number of repetitions
Note: Machine builder macros cannot be called using the G66, G66.1 or M98 command.
Call format 2
G*** ;
*** : G code defined in macro definition program
- 144 -
12.1.2.3 Macro Interruption

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
By inputting a user macro interrupt signal from the PLC, the program being currently executed is
interrupted and other programs can be called instead.
Retract or return operations when tools have been damaged, for instance, and other kinds of
restoration operations to be conducted when trouble has occurred are programmed in the interrupt
programs. There are two types of interrupts, type 1 and type 2, as described below, and they are
selected using a parameter.
[Interrupt type 1] The block being executed is immediately interrupted, and the interrupt
program is run immediately.
[Interrupt type 2] After the block being executed is complete, the interrupt program is
executed.
The command format is given below.

M96 P__ H__ ; User macro interrupt valid
M97 ; User macro interrupt invalid
P : Interrupt program No.
H : Interrupt sequence No.
Machining program Opm:
:
: Interrupt program Opi
M96Ppi;
: :
: :
The user macro interrupt signal is :
accepted during this period. :
: :
: :
Interrupt :
:
signal :
:
M97 ; :
: M99 ;
:
The user macro interrupt signal is not :
accepted during this period. :
: The modal information is restored
: to the status applying before
: interrupt.
:
M02 ;
- 145 -
12.1.2.4 Variable Command

Programming can be given flexible and general-purpose capabilities by designating variables
instead of directly assigning numbers for addresses in programs and by supplying the values of
those variables as required when running the programs.
Arithmetic operations (adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing) can also be conducted for the
variables.
Number of variable sets specifications

The numbers of common variable sets depend on the options, and are as follows.
Number of variable sets specifications

100 sets #100 ~ #149, #500 ~ #549
System 1
200 sets #100 ~ #199, #500 ~ #599

300 sets #100 ~ #199, #500 ~ #699
600 sets #100 ~ #199, #500 ~ #999
700 sets #100 ~ #199, #400 ~ #999
50 + 50 sets #100 ~ #149 (per part system), #500 ~ #549 (common to part system)
System 2
• Variable names can be set for #500 ~ #519.
Variable expressions
Variable : # Numerical value #100
(Numerical value: 1, 2, 3, .....)
: # [Expression] #100
Expression :Numerical value
: Variable
: Expression Operator Expression #100 + #101
: – (minus) Expression –#120
: [Expression] [#110]
: Function [Expression] SIN [#110]
Variable definition
Variable = expression
(Note 1) Variables cannot be used with addresses "O" and "N".
12.1.2.4.1 100 sets

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
12.1.2.4.2 200 sets

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
- 146 -
12.1.2.4.3 300 sets

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
12.1.2.4.4 600 sets

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ – – – ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ – – – ∆ ∆ ∆
12.1.2.4.5 700 sets

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ – – – – – –
L system ∆ ∆ – – – – – –
12.1.2.4.6 (50+50 x number of part systems) sets

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – { { { – – – –
L system – { { { – { { {

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – – – –
L system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – – – –
L system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – ∆ – – – – – –
L system – ∆ – – – – – –
- 147 -
12.1.3 Fixed Cycle
List of fixed cycles

M system L system
Type of fixed cycle G code G code G code G code G code Remarks
system system system system system
1 2 3 6 7
Fixed cycle for drilling G70 G80 G80 G80 G80 Refer to 12.1.3.1.
: : : : : Refer to 4.5.3.
G89 G89 G89 G89 G89

G79 G83.2 G79 G83.2
G98 G98 G98 G98 G98
G99 G99 G99 G99 G99
Special fixed cycles G34 Refer to 12.1.3.2.
G35 ― ― ― ―
G36
Fixed cycles for turning G90 G77 G90 G77 Refer to 12.1.3.3.
machining ― G92 G78 G92 G78
G94 G79 G94 G79
Multiple repetitive fixed G70 G70 G70 G70 Refer to 12.1.3.4.
cycles for turning : : : : Refer to 12.1.3.5.
machining Refer to 4.5.8.
― G76 G76 G76 G76
G76.1 G76.1 G76.1 G76.1
G76.2 G76.2 G76.2 G76.2
Small-diameter deep- G83 ― ― ― ― Refer to 12.1.3.6.
hole drilling cycle
- 148 -
12.1.3.1 Fixed Cycle for Drilling

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
(1) M series ; G70 to G89, G88, G99

These functions enable drilling, tapping and other hole machining cycles to be assigned in a
simple 1-block program.
G code Function
G70
G71
G72
G73 Step cycle
G74 Reverse tapping cycle
G75
G76 Fine boring
G77
G78
G79
G80 Fixed cycle cancel
G81 Drilling, spot drilling cycle
G82 Drilling, counterboring cycle
G83 Deep hole drilling cycle
G84 Tapping cycle
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boring cycle
G87 Backboring cycle
G88 Boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle
There are two levels of hole machining axis return which apply upon completion of the fixed
cycle machining operation.
G code Function
G98 Initial point level return
G99 R point level return
- 149 -
The basic program format for the fixed cycle commands is shown below.
G81 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Pp1 Ll1 Ff1 ;

G81 : Hole drilling mode
Xx1, Yy1 : Hole position data; X-axis, Y-axis hole drilling position command
(rapid traverse) (incremental/absolute)
Zz1 : Hole machining data; Hole bottom position designation (incremental/absolute)
Rr1 : Hole machining data; Hole R point designation (incremental/absolute)
Qq1 : Hole machining data; Depth of cut per pass in G73, G83 cycle (incremental)
Shift amount in G76, G87 cycle
Depth of cut per pass in pecking tapping, deep hole
tapping of G74, G84 cycle
Pp1 : Hole machining data; Dwell time at hole bottom
Ll1 : Hole machining data; Number of fixed cycle repetitions
Ff1 : Cutting feed rate
For details on the synchronous tapping cycle (including pecking tapping cycle and deep-hole
tapping cycle), refer to the section "4.5.3 Synchronous Tapping".
- 150 -
G73 G74 G76 G81

Step cycle Reverse tapping cycle Fine boring cycle Drilling, spot drilling cycle
G98 mode
Initial point G98 mode

G98 mode q
R point Initial point Initial point
Initial point
q
n R point q R point G98 mode
M0 4
q
R point
Z point G99 mode
Z point
M03
Z point q
G99 mode
M19 Shift
G99 mode
Z point
G82 G83 G84 G85

Drilling, counterboring Deep hole drilling Tapping cycle Boring cycle
cycle cycle
G98 mode
G98 mode
G98 mode
Initial point Initial point
Initial point
Initial point G98 mode
M03
R point R point R point
q
R point n
Z point Z point
q M04
Z point G99 mode
Dwell
G99 mode
Z point
G86 G87 G88 G89

Boring cycle Back boring cycle Boring cycle Boring cycle
M19
G98 mode
M03 M03
Initial point G98 mode Initial point Initial point Initial point
M03 M03
R point R point R point
R point
M19
Z point Z point Z point

M05 M05 G98 mode Z point
M03 Dwell
Dwell
- 151 -
(2) L series ; G83 to G89, G80

In the fixed cycle for drilling, a machining program such as drilling, tapping, or boring and
positioning can be executed for a given machining sequence in 1-block commands.
Drilling Drilling work Motion at hole Return

G code Use
axis start bottom motion
G80 ----- ----- ----- ----- Cancel
G83 Z Cutting feed In-position check Rapid traverse Deep-hole drilling cycle1
Intermittent feed Dwell feed
G84 Z Cutting feed In-position check Cutting feed Tapping cycle

Dwell
(Reverse tapping cycle)
Spindle CCW
G85 Z Cutting feed In-position check Cutting feed Boring cycle
Dwell
G87 X Cutting feed In-position check Rapid traverse Deep-hole drilling cycle1
G88 X Cutting feed In-position check Cutting feed Tapping cycle

Dwell
(Reverse tapping cycle)
Spindle CCW
G89 X Cutting feed In-position check Cutting feed Boring cycle
Dwell
G83.2 Z/X Cutting feed In-position check Rapid traverse Deep-hole drilling cycle2
The fixed cycle mode is canceled when a G command of the G80 or G01 group is specified. Data is
also cleared simultaneously.
Command format
G83/G84/G85 Xx1 Cc1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq11 Pp1 Ff1 Kk1 (Mm1) Ss1 ,Ss1 Dd1 ,Rr1 ;
G87/G88/G89 Xx1 Cc1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq11 Pp1 Ff1 Kk1 (Mm1) Ss1 ,Ss1 Dd1 ,Rr1 ;
G83/G84/G85 : Fixed cycle mode of drilling (G83, G87), tapping (G84, G88), or boring
(G85, G89)
G87/G88/G89 The drilling command is modal. Once it is given, it is effective until
another drill command is given or drilling fixed cycle cancel command
is given.
Xx1, Cc1 : Data for positioning X (Z) and C axes
The data is unmodal. To execute the same hole machining mode
consecutively, specify the data for each block.
Zz1, Rr1, Qq11, Pp1, Ff : Actual machining data in machining
Only Q is unmodal. Specify Q in G83 or G87 for each block whenever
the data is required.
Kk1 : To repeat in a single cycle for hole machining at equal intervals, specify
the number of repetitions in the range of 0 to 9999 (no decimal point
can be used). It is unmodal and is effective only in the block in which
the number of repetitions is specified.
If the number of repetitions is omitted, K1 is assumed to be specified.
If K0 is specified, hole machining data is stored, but hole machining is
not performed. Hole machining data; R point position (incremental
value from initial point) designation (sign ignored)
- 152 -
Mm1 : If axis C clamp M command (parameter setting) is given, the M code is

output at the initial point, and after return motion, C axis unclamp M
code (clamp M code + 1) is output and the dwell time set in a given
parameter is executed.
Ss1 : Designates spindle rotation speed
,Ss1 : Designates spindle rotation speed of return
Dd1 : Designates tap spindle NO. for G84 (G88)
,Rr1 : Changes between synchronous/asynchronous in G84 (G88)
The drilling cycle motions generally are classified into the following seven.
Motion 1 Motion 1
Initial point
Motion 3 Motion 7
R point
Motion 4
Motion 6
Motion 5
Motion 1 : Rapid positioning up to the initial point of X (Z) and C axes.

If the "positioning axis in-position width" is designated, the in-position check is
conducted upon completion of the block.
Motion 2 : Output if the C axis clamp M code is given.
Motion 3 : Rapid positioning up to the R point.
Motion 4 : Hole machining at cutting feed.
If the "drilling axis in-position width" is designated, the in-position check is conducted
upon completion of the block. However, in the case of deep-hole drilling cycles 1 and
2, the in-position check is not conducted with the drilling of any holes except the last
one. The in-position check is conducted at the commanded hole bottom position (last
hole drilling).
Motion 5 : Motion at the hole bottom position. It varies depending on the fixed cycle mode.
Spindle CCW (M04), spindle CW (M03), dwell, etc., are included.
Motion 6: Return to the R point.
Motion 7: Return to the initial point at rapid traverse feed.
(Operations 6 and 5 may be conducted as a single operation depending on the fixed cycle mode.
Note: With a synchronous tap command, the in-position check is conducted in accordance with the
parameters.
Whether the fixed cycle is complete with motion 6 or 7 can be specified by using either of the
following G commands:
G98: Initial level return
G99: R point level return
These commands are modal. For example, once G98 is given, the G98 mode is entered until G99
is given. The G98 mode is entered in the initial state when the controller is ready.
- 153 -
Deep-hole drilling cycle (G83, G87)
G83/G87
Deep-hole drilling cycle (G83: Z-axis direction, G87: X-axis direction)
When Q command is given When Q command is not
given
q q
Z point / X point Initial point

R point
G99 mode
G98 mode
Initial point
Z / X point
R point
G98 mode
G99 mode
G83.2 G84/88 G85/89

Deep-hole drilling cycle Tapping cycle Boring cycle
(C-axis clamp)
Reverse rotation of
spindle/rotary tool (C -axis clamp)
f
Dwell
Dwell D well
Dwell
2f
Dwell Z / X point
Dwell Z / X point
Initial point
Dwell R point R point Initial point
Dwell G98 mode G 98 mode
(C-axis unclamp) (C -axis unclamp)

Forward rotation of D well
Z / X point spindle/rotary tool
O utput or no output can be set using a parameter
for the C -axis clamp/unclamp M code
Output or no output can be set using a parameter for
the C-axis clamp/unclamp M code
There are two levels of hole machining axis return which apply upon completion of the fixed cycle
machining operation. (see the figure above)
G code Function
G98 Initial point level return
G99 R point level return
- 154 -
12.1.3.2 Special Fixed Cycle

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
Special fixed cycles must always be used in combination with fixed cycles.
(1) Bolt hole circle (G34)

The tool starts at the point forming angle θ with the X axis on the circumference of a circle with
radius R whose center is the coordinates designated by X and Y, and it drills "n" number of holes at
"n" equal intervals along the circumference of that circle. The drilling data for the standard fixed
cycle of the G81 or other such command is retained for the drilling operation at each hole position.
All movements between the hole positions are conducted in the G00 mode. The data is not retained
upon completion of the G34 command.
G34 Xx Yy Ir Jθ Kn ;
Xx, Yy : Center position of bolt hole circle; this is affected by the G90/G91 commands.
Ir : Radius "r" of circle; it is based on the least input increment and is provided using a
positive number.
Jθ : Angle θ at point to be drilled initially; the counterclockwise direction is taken to be
positive.
Kn : Number "n" of holes to be drilled; any number of holes from 1 through 9999 can be
designated; 0 cannot be assigned.
When 0 has been designated, the alarm will occur. A positive number provides
positioning in the counterclockwise direction; a negative number provides
positioning in the clockwise direction.
(Example)
With 0.001mm least input increment
N001 G91 ;
N002 G81 Z – 10.000 R5.000 L0 F200 ;
N003 G90 G34 X200.000 Y100.000 I100.000 J20.000 K6 ;
X1 = 200 mm
N004 G80 ; .........................(G81 cancel) n = 6 holes
N005 G90 G0 X500.000 Y100.000 ;
20°
I = 100 mm
Y1 = 100 mm
W
Position prior to excution (500 mm, 100 mm) G0 command in
of G34 command N005
As shown in the figure, the tool is positioned above the final hole upon completion of the G34
command. This means that when it is to be moved to the next position, it will be necessary to
calculate the coordinates in order to issue the command or commands with incremental values, and
so it is convenient to use the absolute value mode.
- 155 -
(2) Line at angle (G35)
With the starting point at the position designated by X and Y, the tool drills "n" number of holes
each at interval "d" in the direction forming angle θ with the X axis. A standard fixed cycle applies
for the drilling operation at each of the hole positions and so there is a need to retain beforehand
the drilling data (drilling mode and drilling data). All movements between the hole positions are
conducted in the G00 mode. The data is not retained upon completion of the G35 command.
G35 Xx Yy Id Jθ Kn ;
Xx, Yy : The starting point coordinates; they are affected by the G90/G91 commands.
Id : Interval "d"; it is based on the least input increment and when "d" is negative, drilling
proceeds in the point symmetrical direction centered on the starting point.
Jθ : Angle θ; the counterclockwise direction is taken to be positive.
Kn : Number "n" of holes to be drilled including the starting point; any number of holes
from 1 through 9999 can be assigned.
(Example)
Y
d =100mm
With 0.001 mm least input increment N=5 holes
G91 ;
G81 Z – 10.000 R5.000 L 0 F100 ;
θ=30°
G35 X200.000 Y100.000 I100.000
J 30.000 K5;
X
y 1=100mm W
Position prior to X1=200mm

execution of G35
command
- 156 -
(3) Arc (G36)
The tool starts at the point forming angle θ with the X axis on the circumference of a circle with
radius "r" whose center is the coordinates designated by X and Y, and it drills "n" number of holes
aligned at angle interval ∆θ. As with the bolt hole circle function, the drilling operation at each of the
hole positions is based on a hold drilling fixed cycle and so there is a need to retain the drilling data
beforehand.
All movements between the hole positions are conducted in the G00 mode. The data is not
retained upon completion of the G36 command.
G36 Xx Yy Ir Jθ P∆θ Kn ;
Xx, Yy : Center coordinates of arc; they are affected by the G90/G91 commands.
Ir : Radius "r" of arc; it is based on the least input increment and is provided with a
positive number.
Jθ : Angle θ at the point to be drilled initially; the counterclockwise direction is taken to
be positive.
P∆θ : Angle interval ∆θ; when it is positive, the tool drills in the counterclockwise direction
and when it is negative, it drills in the clockwise direction.
Kn : Number "n" of holes to be drilled; any number of holes from 1 through 9999 can be
assigned.
(Example)
With 0.001 mm least input increment

n=6 holes
N001 G91;
N002 G81 Z-10.000 R5.000 F100;
N003 G36 X300.000 Y100.000 I300.000 J10.000
P 15.000 K6;
Position prior to execution ∆θ=15°
of G36 command
θ=10°
Y1=100mm
W
X1=300mm
- 157 -
(4) Grid (G37.1)
With the starting point at on the position designated by X and Y, this function enables the tool to
drill the holes on the lattice with "nx" number of holes at parallel intervals of ∆x to the X axis. Drilling
proceeds in the X-axis direction. The drilling operation at each of the hole positions is based on a
standard fixed cycle and so there is a need to command the drilling data (drilling mode and drilling
data) beforehand. All movements between the hole positions are conducted in the G00 mode. The
data is not retained upon completion of the G37.1 command.
G37.1 Xx1 Yy1 I∆x Pnx J∆y Kny ;

Xx, Yy : The starting point coordinates; they are affected by the G90/G91 commands.
I∆x : X-axis interval ∆x; it is based on the least input increment; when ∆x is positive,
the intervals are provided in the positive direction as seen from the starting point
and when it is negative, they are provided in the negative direction.
Pnx : Number of holes "nx" in the X-axis direction; any number of holes from 1 through
9999 can be assigned.
J∆y : Y-axis interval ∆y; it is based on the least input increment; when ∆y is positive,
the intervals are provided in the positive direction as seen from the starting point
and when it is negative, they are provided in the negative direction.
Kny : Number of holes "ny" in the Y-axis direction; any number of holes from 1 through
9999 can be assigned.
(Example)
With 0.001 mm least input increment
G91 ;
G81 ; Z – 10.000 R5.000 F20 ;
G37.1 X300.000 Y – 100.000 I 50.000
P10 J 100.000 K8 ;
Position prior to execution of

G37.1 command ny=8 holes
W ∆y=
y1=100mm 100mm
∆x=50mm
x1=300mm nx=10 holes
- 158 -
12.1.3.3 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system { { { { { { { {
The shape normally programmed in several blocks for rough cutting, etc., in the turning machining
can be commanded in one block. This function is useful for machining program simplification. The
fixed cycles are as follows:
G code Function
G77 Longitudinal cutting cycle
G78 Thread cutting cycle
G79 Face cutting cycle
Format:
G∆∆ X/U_Z/W_I_K_R_F_(G18 plane)
Each fixed cycle command for turning machining is a modal G code and is effective until another
command of the same modal group or a cancel command is given.
The fixed cycle can be canceled by using any of the following G codes:
G00, G01, G02, G03
G09
G10, G11
G27, G28, G29, G30
G31
G33, G34
G37
G92
G52, G53
G65
- 159 -
(1) Longitudinal cutting cycle (G77)

(a) Longitudinal cutting
Straight cutting in the longitudinal direction can be performed consecutively by the following
block:
G77 X/U_ Z/W_ F_ ;
X axis
4 (R)
1 (R) U (R) : Rapid traverse feed

3 (F) 2 (F) : Cutting feed
2 (F)
Z W
X
Z axis
(b) Taper cutting

Taper cutting in the longitudinal direction can be performed consecutively by the following
block:
G77 X/U_ Z/W_ R_ F_ ;
X axis
4 (R)
U (R) : Rapid traverse feed

3 (F) 1 (R) 2 (F) : Cutting feed
2 (F)
r
Z W
X
Z axis
r: Taper part depth (radius designation, incremental value, sign is required)
- 160 -
(2) Thread cutting cycle (G78)

(a) Straight thread cutting
Straight thread cutting can be performed by the following block:
G78 X/U_ Z/W_ F/E_ ;
X axis
(R) : Rapid traverse feed
(F) : F or E code designation
4 (R)
3 (R) 1 (R) U
2 (F) 2
Z W
X
Z axis
(b) Taper thread cutting

Taper thread cutting can be performed by the following block:
G78 X/U_ Z/W_ R_ F/E_ ;
X axis (R) : Rapid traverse feed

(F) : F or E code designation
4 (R)
3 (R) 1 (R)
U
2 (F) 2
r
Z W X
Z axis
- 161 -
Chamfering
α : Thread cutting-up amount

Assuming that thread lead is L, the thread
cutting-up amount can be set in a given parameter
in 0.1L steps in the range of 0 to 12.7L.
θ : Thread cutting-up angle

θ The thread cutting-up angle can be set in a
given parameter in 1° steps in the range of 0 to
89°.
(3) Face cutting cycle (G79)

(a) Straight cutting
Straight cutting in the end face direction can be performed consecutively by the following
block:
G79 X/U_ Z/W_ F_ ;
X axis
1(R)
2(F) 4(R) (R): Rapid traverse feed
u/2
(F): Cutting feed
3(F)
Z W
X
Z axis
- 162 -
(b) Taper cutting

Taper cutting in the end face direction can be performed consecutively by the following block:
G79 X/U_ Z/W_ R_ F_ ;
r
X axis
1(R)
2(F) 4(R) (R): Rapid traverse feed

u/2
(F): Cutting feed
3(F)
Z W
X
Z axis
- 163 -
12.1.3.4 Multiple Repetitive Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
(a) Longitudinal rough cutting cycle I (G71)

The finish shape program is called, and straight rough cutting is performed while intermediate
path is being calculated automatically.
The machining program is commanded as follows.
G71 Ud Re ;
G71 Aa Pp Qq Uu Ww Ff Ss Tt ;
Ud : Cut depth d. (When P,Q command is not given). (Modal)
Re : Retract amount e. (Modal)
Aa : Finish shape program No. (If it is omitted, the program being executed is
assumed to be designated.)
Pp : Finish shape start sequence No. (If it is omitted, the program top is assumed
to be designated.)
Qq : Finish shape end sequence No. (If it is omitted, the program end is assumed
to be designated.)
However, if M99 precedes the Q command, up to M99.
Uu : Finishing allowance in the X axis direction. (When P, Q command is given).
(Diameter or radius designation)
Ww : Finishing allowance in the Z axis direction.
Ff : Cutting feed rate.
F, S, and T command in the finish shape program
Ss : Spindle speed.
are ignored, and the value in the rough cutting
Tt : Tool command.
command or the preceding value becomes effective.
(Cycle commanded point)
(R)
d Cut depth
Details of retract
operation
X (R)
(F)
45° e
(F)
Z
u/2
Finishing allowance
W
- 164 -
(b) Face rough cutting cycle (G72)

The finish shape program is called, and rough turning is performed in the end face direction
while intermediate path is being calculated automatically.
G72 Wd Re ;
Wd : Cut depth d. (When P,Q command is not given). (Modal)
Re : Retract amount e. (Modal)
Aa : Finish shape program No. (If it is omitted, the program being executed is
Pp : Finish shape start sequence No. (If it is omitted, the program top is assumed to
be designated.)
Qq : Finish shape end sequence No. (If it is omitted, the program end is assumed to
be designated.)
Uu : Finishing allowance in the X axis direction.
Ww : Finishing allowance in the Z axis direction. (When P, Q command is given.)
Ff : Cutting feed rate. F, S, and T command in the finish shape program are
Ss : Spindle speed. ignored, and the value in the rough cutting command or
Tt : Tool command. the preceding value becomes effective.
d
Cut depth
S (Cycle commanded point)
Details of retrace
operation
e
(F) (R)
45°
X (F)
u/2
Z
E
Finishing
allowance
W
- 165 -
(c) Molding material in rough cutting cycle (G73)

The finish shape program is called. Intermediate path is automatically calculated and rough
cutting is performed conforming to the finish shape.
G73 Ui Wk Rd ;
Ui : Cutting allowance in the X axis direction i • Cutting allowance when P, Q command is
Wk : Cutting allowance in the Z axis direction k not given.
Rd : Split count d • Modal data
• Sign is ignored.
• Cutting allowance is given with a radius
designation.
Aa : Finish shape program No. (If it is omitted, the present program is

Pp : Finish shape start sequence No. (If it is omitted, the program top is assumed
to be designated.)
Qq : Finish shape end sequence No. (If it is omitted, the program end is
However, if M99 precedes the Qq
command, up to M99.
Uu : Finishing allowance in the X axis direction u • Finishing allowance when P, Q command
Ww : Finishing allowance in the Z axis direction w is given.
• Sign is ignored.
• Diameter or radius is designated
according to the parameter.
• The shift direction is determined by the
shape.
Ff : Cutting feed rate (F function) The F, S, and T commands in the finish
Ss : Spindle speed (S function) shape program are ignored, and the value in
the rough cutting command or the preceding
Tt : Tool selection (T function) value becomes effective.
k+w
S1
X
S2
S3 i + u/2
7
1
S
13
Z 2
19
6 8
14
5
12
18 11 4
E
17 10 3
16 9
15
A u/2
w
- 166 -
(d) Finish cycle (G70)

After rough cutting is performed by using G71 to G73, finish turning can be performed by using
the G70 command.
G70 A_ P_ Q_ ;
A : Finish shape program number. (If it is omitted, the program being executed is
P : Finish shape start sequence number. (If it is omitted, the program top is
Q : Finish shape end sequence number. (If it is omitted, the program end is
(1) The F, S, and T commands in the rough cutting cycle command G71 to G73 blocks are
ignored, and the F, S, and T commands in the finish shape program become effective.
(2) The memory address of the finish shape program executed by G71 to G72 is not stored.
Whenever G70 is executed, a program search is made.
(3) When the G70 cycle terminates, the tool returns to the start point at the rapid traverse feed
rate and the next block is read.
(Example 1) Sequence No. designation
:
N100 G70 P200 Q300 ; N200 … ;
N110 :
N300 ･･ ;
N120
:
N200
: Finish shape program
N300
N310
:
(Example 2) Program No. designation
:
N100 G70
A100 ; O100
N110 ･････ ; G01 X100 Z50 F0.5 ;
: :
M99 ;
In either example 1 or 2, after the N100 cycle is executed, the N110 block is executed.
- 167 -
(e) Face cutting-off cycle (G74)

When the slotting end point coordinates, cut depth, cutting tool shift amount, and cutting tool
relief amount at the cut bottom are commanded, automatic slotting is performed in the end
face direction of a given bar by G74 fixed cycle. The machining program is commanded as
follows.
G74 Re ;
G74 X/(U) Z/(W) Pi Qk Rd Ff ;
Re : Retract amount e (when X/U, Z/W command is not given) (Modal)

X/U : B point coordinate (absolute/incremental)
Z/W : B point coordinate (absolute/incremental)
Pi : Tool shift amount (radius designation, incremental, sign not required)
Qk : Cut depth k (radius designation, incremental, sign not required)
Rd : Relief amount at cut bottom d (If sign is not provided, relief is made at the first
cut bottom. If minus sign is provided, relief is made not at the first cut bottom
but at the second cut bottom and later.)
Ff : Feed rate
z w
(11)
S (start point)
(10)
(9) (5) (1) (12) • (9) and (12) just before the
i (8) (7) (4) (3) (2)
(6) last cycle are executed with
d the remaining distance.
u/2 • (2), (4), (6), (8), (10), (11) and

(12) are executed at the rapid
traverse feed rate.
e
B
x
k k k k
- 168 -
(f) Longitudinal cutting-off cycle (G75)

When the slotting end point coordinates, cut depth, cutting tool shift amount, and cutting tool
relief amount at the cut bottom are commanded, automatic slotting is performed in the
longitudinal direction of a given bar by G75 fixed cycle. The machining program is commanded
as follows.
G75 Re ;
G75 X/(U) Z/(W) Pi Qk Rd Ff ;
Re : Retract amount e (when X/U, Z/W command is not given) (Modal)
X/U : B point coordinate (absolute/incremental)
Z/W : B point coordinate (absolute/incremental)
Pi : Tool shift amount (radius designation, incremental, sign not required)
Qk : Cut depth k (radius designation, incremental, sign not required)
Rd : Relief amount at cut bottom d (If sign is not provided, relief is made at the first
cut bottom. If sign is provided, relief is made not at the first cut bottom but at
the second cut bottom and later.)
Ff : Feed rate
z w
S (start point)
• (9) and (12) just before the last
(12) cycle are executed with the
i
e (2) (1) remaining distance.
(3)
i • (2), (4), (6), (8), (10), (11) and
(4) (12) are executed at the rapid
(5)
(11) traverse feedrate.
i
(6)
(7)
i u/2
(8)
(9)
B
d (10)
k x
- 169 -
(g) Multiple repetitive thread cutting cycle (G76)

When the thread cutting start and end points are commanded, cut at any desired angle can be
made by automatically cutting so that the cut section area (cutting torque) per time becomes
constant in the G76 fixed cycle.
Various longitudinal threads can be cut by considering the thread cutting end point coordinate
and taper height constituent command value.
Command Format
G76 Pmra Rd ;
G76 X/U Z/W Ri Pk Q∆d Fl ;
m : Cut count at finishing 01 to 99 (modal)
r : Chamfering amount 00 to 99 (modal). Set in 0.1-lead increments.
a : Nose angle (included angle of thread) 00 to 99 (modal) Set in 1-degree
increments.
d : Finishing allowance (modal)
X/U : X axis end point coordinate of thread part.
Designate the X coordinate of the end point in the thread part in an absolute or
incremental value.
Z/W : Z axis end point coordinate of thread part.
Designate the Z coordinate of the end point in the thread part in an absolute or
incremental value.
i : Taper height constituent in thread part (radius value). When i = 0 is set,
straight screw is made.
k : Thread height. Designate the thread height in a positive radius value.
∆d : Cut depth. Designate the first cut depth in a positive radius value.
l : Thread lead
Configuration of one cycle

In one cycle, (1), (2), (5), and (6) move at rapid traverse feed and (3) and (4) move at cutting
feed designated in F.
z w
S
(6) (1)
(5)
u/2
(4)
(2)
(3)
(-i)
k
x r
When Ri is negative a°/2
- 170 -
z w
S
(6) (1)
(5)
(2)
u/2
(4) k
(3)
i
a°/2
r
x When Ri is positive
a°
Δd
First time Δd× √2 Δd× √n

k Second time
nth time
d (finishing allowance)
(Cut "m" times at finishing)
- 171 -
12.1.3.5 Multiple Repetitive Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining (Type II)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆
Pocket shapes can be machined in the longitudinal rough cutting cycle (G71) and face rough
cutting cycle (G72).
Command format (This is a command format when the G71 is commanded. The G72
command is based on the G71 command.)
G71 Ud Re Hh ; ← (can be omitted when values set in parameters are used)
<H0: Used for finished shapes without pockets> <H1: Mainly used for finished shapes with pockets>
G71 Ud Re H0; (R) G71 Ud Re H1; (R)

G71 Pp Qq . .; (R)
G71 Pp Qq . .; (R)
Rough cutting
Rough cutting start point start point
q q
(R/f) (R/f)
(f) d (f) d
X X
(f) (R)
(R)
(f) 45° e p u/2 Hole bottom p u/2
(f) e w
Z w Z
Hh : Pocket machining (modal) ... reversible parameter ("G71 pocket machining")

0: Select this only for finished shapes without hollow areas (pockets).
* With the beginning of the pockets, the tool is pulled up in the 45-degree direction with
each cycle until the finished shape is finally traced.
1: This can be selected regardless of whether the finished shape has hollow (pocket)
parts or not.
* A method that traces the finished shape with each cycle is used for the beginning of
the pockets.
- 172 -
12.1.3.6 Small-diameter Deep-hole Drilling Cycle

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
In deep hole drilling, cutting and retract are repeated and the workpiece is machined multiple times.
In addition, when PLC signals are input during cutting, the cutting for the time concerned is skipped.
In this way, this cycle reduces the load applied to the tool.
Command format
The small-diameter deep hole drilling cycle mode is established by designating the M code
command which was set in the parameter. If the G83 command is designated in this mode, the
small-diameter deep hole drilling cycle is executed. The mode is canceled by the following
conditions.
• Designation of a fixed cycle cancel command (G80, G commands in Group 1)
• Resetting
The small-diameter deep hole drilling mode M command does not output MF or wait for FIN.
G83 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Ff1 Pp1 ;
X, Y : Hole drilling point position
R : R point position
Q : Depth of cut in each pass (designated as incremental value)
P : Dwell time at hole bottom position
- 173 -
12.1.3.7 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (Type II)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – – – – { { { {
In the longitudinal hole drilling fixed cycle, the X axis is designated as the hole drilling axis.
However, in the longitudinal hole drilling fixed cycle (type II), the Y axis can be designated as the
hole drilling axis with the longitudinal hole drilling axis selection function.
The relationship between the longitudinal hole drilling axis selection signal’s ON/OFF state and the
hole drilling axis of the fixed cycle for drilling is shown below.
Y axis cross tap function

G code Details Hole drilling axis
selection signal state
G80 Cancel ― ―
G83 Deep hole drilling cycle 1 ON Z
OFF
G84 Tap cycle ON Z
OFF
G85 Boring cycle ON Z
OFF
G87 Deep hole drilling cycle 1 ON Y
OFF X
G88 (G88.1) Tap cycle ON Y
OFF X
G89 Boring cycle ON Y
OFF X
G83.2 Deep hole drilling cycle 2 ON Z/X
OFF
- 174 -
12.1.4 Mirror Image
12.1.4.1 Mirror Image by Parameter Setting

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – { { { { { {
L system – – { { { { { {
A parameter is used to designate the axis for which the mirror image function is to be executed
before the machining program is run. When mirror image is set to ON by the parameter, an
operation which is symmetrical on the left and right or at the top or bottom is performed. Each axis
has its own parameter.
12.1.4.2 External Input Mirror Image

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – { { { { { {
L system – – { { { { { {
Signals from an external device (PLC) to request the mirror image operation either while a
machining program is running or before it is run. When ON has been set for mirror image from an
external device, an operation which is symmetrical on the left and right or at the top or bottom is
performed. Each axis has its own request signal.
- 175 -
12.1.4.3 G Code Mirror Image

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ { { { {
L system – – – – – – – –
Using a program for the left or right side of an image, this function can machine the other side of
the image when a left/right symmetrical shape is to be cut.
Mirror image can be applied directly by a G code when preparing a machining program.
G code Function
G50.1 G code mirror image cancel
G51.1 G code mirror image ON
The program format for the G code mirror image is shown below.
G51.1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;
G51.1 : Mirror image on
Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 : Command axes and command positions
With the local coordinate system, the mirror image is applied with the mirror positioned respectively
at x1, y1 and z1.
The program format for the G code mirror image cancel is shown below.
G50.1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;
G50.1 : Mirror image cancel
Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 : Command axes
The coordinate word indicates the axes for which the mirror image function is to be canceled and
the coordinates are ignored.
In the case of G51.1 Xx1
Shape achieved when

Original shape (program) machining program for the
left side has been executed
Y
after the mirror command
X
Mirroring axis
- 176 -
12.1.4.4 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆
With machines in which the base tool post and facing tool post are integrated, this function enables
the programs prepared for cutting at the base side to be executed by the tools on the facing side.
The distance between the two posts is set beforehand with the parameter.
G code Function
G68 Facing tool post mirror image ON
G69 Facing tool post mirror image OFF
When the G68 command is issued, the subsequent program coordinate systems are shifted to the
facing side and the movement direction of the X axis is made the opposite of that commanded by
the program.
When the G69 command is issued, the subsequent program coordinate systems are returned to the
base side.
The facing tool post mirror image function can be set to ON or OFF automatically by means of T
(tool) commands without assigning the G68 command.
A parameter is used to set ON or OFF for the facing tool post mirror image function corresponding
to the T commands.
Base post
X
Programmed path
(G69)
Parameter for
distance between
Z posts (radial value,
X axis only)
(G68)
Facing side path
(mirror image ON)
Facing post
12.1.4.5 T Code Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆
If, when tools that correspond to tool Nos. 1 to 64 are selected (T commands), these are tool Nos.
for which the facing tool post mirror image function has already been designated with a parameter,
the status equivalent to G68 (facing tool post mirror image ON) is established. When the
commands apply to tool Nos. for which the facing tool post mirror image function is not designated,
the status equivalent to G69 (facing tool post mirror image OFF) is established.
- 177 -
12.1.5 Coordinate System Operation
12.1.5.1 Coordinate Rotation by Program

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
When it is necessary to machine a complicated shape at a position that has been rotated with
respect to the coordinate system, you can machine a rotated shape by programming the shape
prior to rotation on the local coordinate system, then specifying the parallel shift amount and
rotation angle by means of this coordinate rotation command.
The program format for the coordinate rotation command is given below.
G68 Xx1 Yy1 Rr1 ; Coordinate rotation ON

G69 ; Coordinate rotation cancel
G68 : Call command
Xx1, Yy1 : Rotation center cordinates
Rr1 : Angle of rotation
Ｙ
Y
y1
y1 r1(回転角度)
r1 (Angle of rotation)
Ｙ'
Y’ (x1,y1)(回転中心)
(x1, y1) (Center of rotation)
Ｘ'
X’
xx11
WW Ｘ
X
(Original local
(元のローカル
座標系)
coordinate system)
(Rotated local coordinate system)
W'
W’ (回転したローカル座標系)
(1) Angle of rotation "r1" can be set in least input increment from –360° to 360° .
(2) The coordinates are rotated counterclockwise by an amount equivalent to the angle which is
designated by angle of rotation "r1".
(3) The counter is indicated as the point on the coordinate system prior to rotation.
(4) The rotation center coordinates are assigned with absolute values.
- 178 -
(Example)
N01 G28 X Y Z ;
N02 G54 G52 X150. Y75. ; Local coordinate system assignment
N03 G90 G01 G42 X0 Y0 ; Tool radius compensation ON
N04 G68 X0 Y0 R30. ; Coordinate rotation ON
N05 M98 H101 ; Subprogram execution
N06 G69 ; Coordinate rotation cancel
N07 G54 G52 X0 Y0 ; Local coordinate system cancel
N08 G00 G40 X0 Y0 ; Tool radius compensation cancel
N09 M02 ; Completion
Sub program Y
(Shape programmed with original coordinate system)
200.
Actual
N101 G90 G01 X50. F200 ; machining
N102 G02 X100. R25. ; shape
N103 G01 X125. ;
N104 Y75. ;
N105 G03 X100. Y100. R25. ; 100.
N106 G01 X50. ;
N107 G02 X0 Y50. R50. ;
N108 G01 X0 Y0 ;
N109 M99 ; (Programmed coordinate)
X
W 100. 200. 300.
- 179 -
12.1.6 Dimension Input
12.1.6.1 Corner Chamfering / Corner R

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
This function executes corner processing by automatically inserting a straight line or arc in the
commanded amount between two consecutive movement blocks (G01/G02/G03).
The corner command is executed by assigning the ",C" or ",R" command for the block at whose
end point the corner is inserted.
(1) Corner chamfering / Corner R I

When ",C" or ",R" is commanded for linear interpolation, corner chamfering or corner R can be
inserted between linear blocks.
• Corner chamfering • Corner R

Example: Example:
N1 G01 Xx1 Zz1, Cc1 ; N1 G01 Xx1 Zz1, Rr1 ;

N2 Zz2 ; N2 Zz2 ;
c1
N2
N2
c1
r1
N1 N1
(Note 1) If a corner chamfering or corner R command is issued specifying a length longer than the
N1 or N2 block, a program error occurs.
- 180 -
(2) Corner chamfering / corner R II (L system)

When ",C" or ",R" is command in a program between linear-circular, corner chamfering or corner R
can be inserted between blocks.
(a) Corner chamfering II (Linear – circular)
Example: G01 X_Z_ ,Cc1 ;
G02 X_Z_ Ii1 Kki ;
Cc1
Hypothetical corner intersection
Cc1
(1)
Chamfering end point
Chamfering start point

(2)
(b) Corner chamfering II (Circular - linear)

Example: G03 X_Z_ Ii1 Kk1 ,Cc1 ;
G01 X_Z_ ;
Cc1
Cc1
(2)

(1)
(c) Corner chamfering II (Circular - circular)
Example: G02 X_Z_ Ii1 Kk1 ,Cc1 ;

G02 X_Z_ Ii2 Kk2 ;
Cc1
Cc1
Chamfering Chamfering
end point start point
(2) (1)
- 181 -
(d) Corner R II (Linear - circular)
Example: G01 X_Z_ ,Rr1 ;

G02 X_Z_ Ii1 Kk1 ;
Corner R start point
Hypothetical corner
intersection (1)
Rr1
Corner R
end point
(2)
(e) Corner R II (Circular – linear)
Example: G03 X_Z_ Ii1 Kk1 ,Rr1 ;

G01 X_Z_ ;
Corner R end point
Hypothetical corner
intersection
(2)
Rr1
Corner R
start point
(1)
(f) Corner R II (Circular – circular)
Example: G02 X_Z_ Ii1 Kk1 ,Rr1 ;

G02 X_Z_ Ii2 Kk2 ;
(1)
Corner R
start point
Rr1
Corner R
start point
(2)
- 182 -
(3) Specification of corner chamfering / corner R speed E
An E command can be used to specify the speed for corner chamfering or corner R.
This enables a corner to be cut to a correct shape.
(Example)
G01 X_Z_ ,Cc1 Ff1 Ee1 ;

X_Z_ ;
G01 X_Z_ ,Rr1 Ff1 Ee1 ;

X_Z_ ;
X
F
An E command is a modal and remains effective for feeding in next corner chamfering or corner R.
An E command has two separate modals: synchronous and asynchronous feed rate modals. The
effective feed rate is determined by synchronous (G95) or asynchronous (G94) mode.
If an E command is specified in 0 or no E command has been specified, the feed rate specified by
an F command is assumed as the feed rate for corner chamfering or corner R.
Hold or non-hold can be selected (M system only) using a parameter for the E command modal at
the time of resetting. It is cleared when the power is turned OFF (as it is with an F command).
- 183 -
(4) Corner chamfering / corner R (I, K designation)

With this command format, by means of parameter settings, corners are chamfered using the "I",
"K" or "C" address without a comma, and corners are rounded using the "R" address.
The ",C" and ",R" commands with commas can also be used.
This command format is valid for the L system of M64AS, M64S, M65S, and M66S only.
(a) Corner chamfering (I, K designation)

Corners are chamfered using the "I_", "K_" or "C_" address with no comma. Corners can be
chamfered to any angle. Signs, if they are provided for the corner chamfering commands, are
ignored.
Command format
N100 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Ii/Kk/Cc ;
N200 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww ;
X/u : X-axis end point coordinate
Z/w : Z-axis end point coordinate
i/k/c : The length from the hypothetical corner intersection to the chamfering start point
or chamfering end point is designated using the I, K or C address.
X axis
N200

i, k, c
N100 Hypothetical corner intersection

i, k, c
0 Z axis
• If multiple "I", "K" or "C" addresses or duplicated addresses have been designated in the
same block, the last command will take effect.
• If both corner chamfering and corner R commands are present in the same block, the last
command will take effect.
• If "C" is used as the name of an axis, corner chamfering commands cannot be designated
using the "C" address.
• If "C" is used as a 2nd miscellaneous function, corner chamfering commands cannot be
designated using the "C" address.
• Corner chamfering commands using the "I" or "K" address cannot be designated in an arc
command block. "I" and "K" are the arc center commands.
- 184 -
(b) Corner R (I, K designation)

Corners are rounded using the "R_" address with no comma. Corners can be rounded to any
angle. Signs, if they are provided for the corner R commands, are ignored.
Command format
N100 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Rr ;
N200 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww ;
x/u : X-axis end point coordinate
z/w : Z-axis end point coordinate
r : Radius of corner R arc
X axis
Corner R end point
N200
N100 Hypothetical corner intersection

Corner R start point
0
Z axis
• If both corner chamfering and corner R commands are present in the same block, the last
command will take effect.
• Corner R commands using the "R" address cannot be designated in an arc command
block. "R" is the arc radius command.
- 185 -
12.1.6.2 Linear Angle Command

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
The end point coordinates are automatically calculated by assigning one element (one component
of the selected plane) of the end point coordinates and the linear angle.
G17 Xx1 Aa1 ; or G17 Yy1 Aa1 ;

G17 : Plane selection
Xx1, Yy1 : 1 element
Aa1 : Angle
Example
G17 G91 X100. A60. ;

Y End point
(Automatically calculated
with operation)
60°
Start point X100.
Note 1: If both the axis "A" or 2nd miscellaneous function "A" are used, address "A" is treated as
the axis "A" command and or the 2nd miscellaneous function, respectively.
- 186 -
12.1.6.3 Geometric Command

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system { { { { { { { {
When it is difficult to find the intersection point of two straight lines with a continuous linear
interpolation command, this point can be calculated automatically by programming the command
for the angle of the straight lines.
Example
N1 G01 Aa1 Ff1 ; a: Angle (°) formed between straight line and
N2 Xx1 Zz1 Aa2 ; horizontal axis on plane.
X
The plane is the selected plane at this
x1 End point (X1, Z1) point.
2
N2
a2
a1
Automatic intersection N1
point calculation
Start point
Z
W1 Z1
(Note 1) This function cannot be used when using the A axis or 2nd miscellaneous function A.
- 187 -
(1) Automatic calculation of two-arc contact
When two continuous circular arcs contact with each other and it is difficult to find the contact, the
contact is automatically calculated by specifying the center coordinates or radius of the first circular
arc and the end point absolute coordinates and center coordinates or radius of the second circular
arc.
Example
G18 G02 Ii1 Kk1 Ff1 ;
G03 Xxc Zzx Ii2 Kk2 Ff2 ;
or
G18 G02 Ii1 Kk1 Ff1 ;
G03 Xxc Zzc Rr2 Ff2 ;
or
G18 G02 Rr1 Ff1 ;
G03 Xxc Zzc Ii2 Kk2 Ff2 ;
A C(xc, zc)
r1 (p2,q2)
B’(?,?)
(p1,q1)
r2
I and K are circular center coordinate incremental values; distances from the start point in the first
block or distances from the end point in the second block. P and Q commands (X, Z absolute
center coordinates of circular arc) can be given instead of I and K commands.
(2) Automatic calculation of linear-arc intersection
When it is difficult to find the intersections of a given line and circular arc, the intersections are
automatically calculated by programming the following blocks.
Example
G18 G01 Aa1 Ff1 ;
G02 Xxc Zzc Ii2 Kk2 Hh2 Ff2 ;
r1 B(?,?)
B(?,?)
a1 (p2,q2)
A
C(xc, zc)
I and K : Incrimental coordinates from circular end point
P and Q : Absolute center coordinates of circular arc
H = 0 : Intersection with shoter line
H = 1 : Intersection with longer line
- 188 -
(3) Automatic calculation of arc-linear intersection
When it is difficult to find the intersections of a given circular arc and line, the intersections are
automatically calculated by programming the following blocks.
Example
G18 G03 Ii1 Kk1 Hh1 Ff1 ;
G01 Xxc Zzc Aa1 Ff2 ;
(p1,q1)
B’(?,?)
B(?,?) a1
r1
C(xc, zc)
I and K : Incrimental coordinates from circular end point

P and Q : Absolute center coordinates of circular arc (L3 only)
H = 0 : Intersection with shoter line
H = 1 : Intersection with longer line
(4) Automatic calculation of linear-arc contact
When it is difficult to find the contact of a given line and circular arc, the contact is automatically
calculated by programming the following blocks.
Example
G01 Aa1 Ff1 ;
G03 Xxc Zzc Rr1 Ff2 ;
C(xc, zc)
r1
B (?,?)
a1
- 189 -
(5) Automatic calculation of arc-linear contact
When it is difficult to find the contact of a given circular arc and line, the contact is automatically
calculated by programming the following blocks.
Example
G02 Rr1 Ff1 ;
G01 Xxc Zzc Aa1 Ff2 ;
B (?,?)
A
r1
a1
C(xc, zc)
- 190 -
12.1.6.4 Polar Coordinate Command

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
With this function, the end point coordinate value is commanded with the radius and angle.
Command format
G16 ; Polar coordinate command mode ON
G15 ; Polar coordinate command mode OFF
Example of program
G1x ; Plane selection for polar coordinate command (G17/G18/G19)

G16 ; Polar coordinate command mode ON
G9x G01 Xx1 Yy1 F2000 ; Polar coordinate command
: G9x : Center selection for polar coordinate command (G90/G91)
G90…The workpiece coordinate system zero point is the polar
coordinate center.
G91…The present position is the polar coordinate center.
x1 : 1st axis for the plane…The radius commanded
y1 : 2nd axis for the plane…The angle commanded
Y
Commanded position (end point)

x1
Plus
Minus Present position

y1
X
For G90/G17(X-Y plane)
G15 ; Polar coordinate command mode OFF
- 191 -
12.1.7 Axis Control
12.1.7.1 High-speed Machining
12.1.7.1.3 High-speed Machining Mode III

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – ∆ 16m ∆ 16m ∆ 16m ∆ 16m ∆ 16m ∆ 16m ∆ 16m
L system – – – – – – – –
This function runs machining programs, in which free-form curved surfaces have been
approximated by fine-segments, at high speed.
It is effective in increasing the speed at which dies with free-form curved surfaces are machined.
High-accuracy machining can be achieved by using this function in combination with the high-
accuracy control function.
Command format
G05 P3 ; High-speed machining mode III ON
G05 P0 ; High-speed machining mode III OFF
Example of program
G28 X0. Y0. Z0. ;

G91 G00 X-100. Y-100. ;
G01 F3000 ;
G05 P3 ; …. High-speed machining mode III ON
X0.1 ;
X0.1 Y0.001 ; Incremental modal linear cutting
X0.1 Y0.002 ;
G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z0 ; Rapid traverse
G02 X__Y__R__F__ ; Absolute modal R-designated arc
G03 X__Y__I__J__F__ ; Arc
y
y
y
G05 P0 ; …. High-speed machining mode III OFF
M02;
(1) The following G codes can be used in the high-speed machining mode III:
G00, G01, G02, G03, G90, G91, G17, G18 and G19.
(2) In the high-speed machining mode III, only the axis names, movement amounts (no variables
or arithmetic operations), F commands and I/J/K/R/P commands can be designated.
(Comments can be used.)
(3) The machining speed may be compromised depending on the number of characters in a block.
- 192 -
12.1.7.1.4 High-speed High-accuracy Control 1

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – ∆ 16m ∆ 16m – ∆ 16m ∆ 16m ∆ 16m
L system – – – – – – – –
approximated by fine-segments, at high speed and with a high accuracy.
It is effective in increasing the speed at which dies with free-form curved surfaces are machined.
Command format
G05.1 Q1 ; High-speed high-accuracy control I ON
G05.1 Q0 ; High-speed high-accuracy control I OFF
The performance of simultaneous 3 axis and 1mm-length fine-segment is as follows.

High-accuracy Performance of fine-segment length
Program restriction
control I mode No radius compensation Radius compensation
Invalid 8.4m/min 8.4m/min None
Valid 16.8m/min 16.8m/min Available
Program restrictions
The machining speed may drop depending on the number of characters in one block.
During high-speed high-accuracy control I operation using tape operation, the machining speed
may be suppressed depending on the program transmission speed and the number of characters in
one block.
Modes which can be designated by commands

The modal statuses when the G05.1 Q1 command is assigned must be as shown in the table below.
If the conditions listed are not satisfied, a program error will result.
Function G code modal

Tool radius compensation mode G40
Tool length compensation G49
G code mirror image G50.1
Mirror image by parameter setting Cancel
External signal mirror image Cancel
Cutting mode G64
Macro modal call mode G67
Coordinate conversion mode G69
Fixed cycle mode G80
Per-revolution feed G94
Constant surface speed control mode G97
Interrupt-type macro mode M97
- 193 -
12.1.7.1.5 High-speed High-accuracy Control 2

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – ∆ 33m ∆ 67m(*) – ∆ 33m ∆ 67m(*) ∆ 67m(*)
L system – – – – – – – –
(Note) (*) changes depending on the axis configuration and operation condition.
approximated by fine-segments, at high speed and with a high accuracy. It is effective in increasing
the speed at which dies with free-form curved surfaces are machined.
Command format
G05 P10000 ; High-speed high-accuracy control II ON
G05 P0 ; High-speed high-accuracy control II OFF
The performance of fine-segment execution when 3 axes are moved simultaneously is as follows.
Performance of fine segment execution (1mm-length)
High-accuracy
(No radius compensation) Program restriction
control II mode
Fairing invalid Fairing valid
Invalid 8.4m/min 8.4m/min None
Valid
(Number of NC 67.5m/min 50.6m/min
axes 1 to 4)
Available
Valid
(Number of NC 50.6m/min 42.1m/min
axes 5 and 6)
Program restrictions
The machining speed may drop depending on the number of characters in one block.
During high-speed high-accuracy control II operation using tape operation, the machining speed
may be suppressed depending on the program transmission speed and the number of characters in
one block.
When the fairing is valid (#8033 is set to 1), if the successive fairing is executed in the machining
program, the performance of fine-segment execution may decelerate less than the value described
in the above table. In the network connection, the value described in the above table may not be
guaranteed depending on the state.
Modes which can be designated by commands

The modal statuses when the G05 P10000 command is assigned must be as shown in the table
below. If the conditions listed are not satisfied, a program error will result.
Function G code modal
Tool radius compensation mode G40
Tool length compensation G49
G code mirror image G50.1
Mirror image by parameter setting Cancel
External signal mirror image Cancel
Cutting mode G64
Macro modal call mode G67
Coordinate conversion mode G69
Fixed cycle mode G80
Per-revolution feed G94
Constant surface speed control mode G97
Interrupt-type macro mode M97
- 194 -
Additional functions when high-speed high-accuracy control 2 mode is ON

(1) Fairing
If the protruding path (zigzagging path) is shorter than the parameter setting values in the
machining program generated with a CAM, etc., this function can be used to eliminate the
protruding paths smaller than the setting value so that the front and back paths are smoothly
connected.
This function is valid only for continuous linear commands (G1).
G1 G1 G1
Before fairing After fairing
If there is any protruding path after fairing, fairing is repeated.
Before fairing After first fairing After final faring
(2) Acceleration clamp speed

Parameter settings are used to clamp the speed so that the acceleration occurring due to
movement of each block does not exceed the tolerable value. This function clamps the speed
optimally even at a section where" angle change at each block is small but entire curvature is large"
such as shown below. The tolerable acceleration value is calculated from the parameter setting
values.
R If the tool moves along the large curvature

section without deceleration, a large
acceleration is generated resulting in a path
error from the inner route.
(3) High-speed mode corner deceleration

During high-accuracy control, if the angle is large between adjacent blocks in the machining
program, this function automatically decelerates so that the acceleration generated when passing
through the corner is within the tolerable value.
If a small block is inserted at the corner section with the machining program generated with the
CAM, etc., the corner passing speed will not match the periphery. This can affect the machining
surface.
If this type of small block is inserted while this function is valid, the corner will be largely judged by
the parameter settings.
The small block is excluded when the angle is judged, but it not excluded from the actual movement
command.
If this function is valid, the axis
decelerates at the corner without being
affected by the small block.
- 195 -
12.1.7.1.7 SSS Control

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
(Note) The "12.1.7.1.5 High-speed high-accuracy control 2" option is required to use this function.
With normal high-accuracy control, the angle between two blocks is compared with the corner
deceleration angle to determine whether to execute corner deceleration between the blocks. This
can cause the speed to suddenly change between the blocks with an angle close to the corner
deceleration angle, or can cause scratches or streaks to form.
With SSS (Super Smooth Surface) control, the large area path information is used instead of just
the angle between the blocks. Thus, optimum speed control that is not adversely affected by minute
steps or waviness is possible. This enables machining with fewer scratches and streaks on the
cutting surface compared to the normal high-accuracy control function.
Conventional optimum corner deceleration SSS control
Feedrate Feedrate
Do not
When smaller than corner decelerate Decelerate according to angle
deceleration angle
Time Time
Feedrate Feedrate
When larger than corner

deceleration angle
Gradually speed deceleration
Time Time
[Features of SSS control]

(1) Speed fluctuation, caused by the effect of the blocks (minute stepping or waviness) and
resulting in disturbed machining, is suppressed, and scratches caused by these blocks is
reduced.
(2) This speed control is not easily affected by the steps found in the path.
(3) If adjacent paths are similar in terms of shape accuracy, the acceleration/deceleration pattern
is also similar, and the fluctuation of accuracy caused by a difference in speed is suppressed.
(4) Even if corner deceleration is not required, the speed is clamped if the predicted acceleration
is high.
(5) The machining time can be reduced in machining applications having many corners.
The length of the path direction recognized with SSS control can be adjusted with the machining
parameter "reference length". The range is increased as the setting value increases, and the effect
of the error is reduced.
(Note) The high-speed high-accuracy control 2 option is required to use this function.
- 196 -
12.1.7.2 Chopping
12.1.7.2.1 Chopping
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆
This function continuously raises and lowers the chopping axis independently of the program
operation when workpiece profiles are to be cut. It can be used for grinding operations using
machining centers, for instance.
Which of the axes is to serve as the chopping axis is set by a parameter ahead of time.
(1) Chopping action
Chopping action
Wheel
Workpiece
- 197 -
The chopping operation is initiated by setting

the upper dead point position, lower dead point
position and number of cycles (number of Start Stop
up/down movements per minute) and pressing Base
position
the chopping start switch. Rapid
Note 1: The upper dead point position, lower Rapid traverse traverse
dead point position and number of Upper
cycles are set and the start and stop dead point
commands are designated by input
signals from the user PLC.
Note 2: The setting for the number of cycles Lower
differs according to the motor, inertia dead point
and other factors.
The chopping operation is performed as
follows.
(a) The axis moves from the base position to the upper dead point by rapid traverse.
(b) Next, the axis moves repeatedly from the upper dead point to the lower dead point and then from the
lower dead point to the upper dead point. (Sinusoidal waveforms)
The feed rate is tailored to achieve the number of cycles set for the up/down motion.
Chopping override
Override in 1% increments from 0% to 100% can be applied to the chopping operation.
Note: Bear in mind that the override increment differs according to the machine specifications.
- 198 -
12.1.7.4 Normal Line Control

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
This function controls the swiveling of the C axis (rotary axis) so that the tool is always pointing in
the normal line direction for the X and Y axes movement commands during program operation. It
can be used for machining springs, for sewing operations involving sewing machines, carpets, etc.
It is valid for only one C axis (rotary axis).
C-axis center (rotary axis)
Tool tip position

C axis swiveling
G code Function
G40.1 Normal line direction control cancel
G41.1 Normal line direction control left ON
G42.1 Normal line direction control right ON
- 199 -
12.1.7.5 Circular Cutting

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
In circular cutting, a system of cutting steps are performed: first, the tool departs from the center of
the circle, and by cutting along the inside circumference of the circle, it draws a complete circle,
then it returns to the center of the circle. The position at which G12 or G13 has been programmed
serves as the center of the circle.
G code Function
G12 CW (clockwise)
G13 CCW (counterclockwise)
The program format is given below.
G12/13 Ii Dd Ff ;
G12/13 : Circular cutting command
Ii : Radius of complete circle
Dd : Compensation number
Ff : Feed rate
Y When the G12 command is used

(path of tool center)
0→1→2→3→4→5→6→7→0
5 When the G13 command is used
(path of tool center)
0→7→6→5→4→3→2→1→0
1 (Notes)
Radius
of circle • Circular cutting is undertaken on the plane
0 2 which has been currently selected (G17, G18 or
4 6 X G19).
• The (+) and (–) signs for the compensation
amount denote reduction and expansion
respectively.
7
3
Offset
amount
- 200 -
12.1.8 Multi-part System Control
12.1.8.1 Synchronization between Part Systems

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – – – –
L system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – { { {
This function enables part systems to be synchronized (block start synchronization) using the
program.
! ; Part system 1 and part system 2 are synchronized. When the part system number is
to be omitted
This synchronization command makes it possible to control the simultaneous operation of two part
systems and the independent operation of part systems.
Part system 1 Part system 2

program program Part Part
system 1 system 2
Pi1 Pn1
Pi1 Pn1
!;
Synchronized
operation
!; Simultaneously start
Pi2 Pn2 Pi2 Pn2
(Note 1) When the part system with which the operation is to be synchronized is not operating, the
other part system moves on to the next block. This function is useful when conducting
program checks on a part system by part system basis.
(Note 2) The synchronization command is normally assigned as a separate command. However,
if a movement command and M, S or T command have been assigned in the same block,
a parameter is set to decide whether the operations are to be synchronized after the
movement command and M, S or T command have been executed or the movement
command and M, S or T command are to be executed upon completion of the
synchronization.
- 201 -
12.1.8.2 Start Point Designation Synchronization

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – – – –
L system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – { { {
The synchronizing point can be placed in the middle of the block by designating the start point.
(1) Start point designation synchronization Type 1 (G115)

Command format
!Ll G115 X_ Z_ C_ ;
!Ll : Synchronizing command
G115 : G command
X_,Z_,C_ : Own start point (designate other part system's coordinate value)
(a) The other part system starts first when synchronizing is executed.
(b) The own part system waits for the other part system to move and reach the designated
start point, and then starts.
!G115
Own part system
Synchronized operation
Other part system
!
Designated start point
Own part system !G115
Synchronized
Other part system operation
!
(c) When the start point designated by G115 is not on the next block movement path of the
other part system, the own part system starts once the other part system has reached all
of the start point axis coordinates.
: Movement : Command point : Actual start point
- 202 -
(2) Start point designation synchronization Type 2 (G116)
Command format
!Ll G116 X_ Z_ C_ ;
!Ll : Synchronizing command
G116 : G command
X_,Z_,C_ : Other start point (designate own part system's coordinate value)
(a) The own part system starts first when synchronizing is executed.
(b) The other part system waits for the own part system to move and reach the designated
start point, and then starts.

Other part system !
Other part system
!
(c) When the start point designated by G116 is not on the next block movement path of the
own part system, the other part system starts once the other part system has reached all
of the start point axis coordinates.
: Movement : Command point : Actual start point
- 203 -
12.1.8.3 Cross Machining Command

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
This function enables any axis to be replaced by another axis between part systems.
This makes it possible to perform operations which are not possible with regular axis configurations:
for instance, tools which are provided only on part system 1 can be used for machining on part
system 2.
This manual contains descriptions where part system numbers have been added after the axis
names in order to identify which part system the axes belong to (such as X1). In terms of
designating the program commands, however, a single letter is used to designate the axis address
just as before.
Part system 1 (X1, Z1) Part system 2 (X2, Z2) Part System 1 (X2, Z1) Part system 2 (X1, Z2)
X1
X1
Z2 Z1
Z2
Z1 Axis X1
X2 and axis X2 X2
are
exchanged.
Cross machining control is switched from ON to OFF and vice versa using a PLC signal.
Parameters are used to set what axis is to be placed in the cross machining control status in
response to which PLC signal.
- 204 -
12.1.8.5 Control Axis Synchronization

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
Synchronization control enables an arbitrary control axis in the other part system to move in
synchronization with the movement command assigned to an arbitrary control axis.
The direction in which the axis is to move synchronously can also be reversed using a parameter.
Base axis :Axis to which movement command to synchronize axes is assigned.
Synchronized axis :Axis whose movement is synchronized with base axis.
Part system 1 (X1, Z1) Part system 2 (Z2)
X1
Z2
(synchronized axis)
Z1
(base axis)
- 205 -
12.1.8.6 Balance Cut

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆
When workpiece that is relatively long and thin is machined on a lathe, deflection may result,
making it impossible for the workpiece to be machined with any accuracy. In cases like this, the
deflection can be minimized by holding tools simultaneously from both sides of the workpiece and
using them in synchronization to machine the workpiece (balance cutting). This method has an
additional advantage: since the workpiece is machined by two tools, the machining time is reduced.
The balance cutting function enables the movements of the tool rests belonging to part system 1
and part system 2 to be synchronized (at the block start timing) so that this kind of machining can
easily be accomplished.
Part system 1
Part system 2

G14 Balance cut command OFF (modal)
G15 Balance cut command ON (modal)
G14 and G15 are modal commands. When the G15 command is assigned, the programmed
operations of two part systems are synchronized (at the block start timing) for all blocks until the
G14 command is assigned or until the modal information is cleared by the reset signal.
Part system 1 program 系統２プログラム

系統１プログラム Part system 2 program
T0101;
T0101; T0102;
T0102;
G00 X_ Z_; G00 X_ Z_;
G00 X_ Z_;
G15; G15;
G00 X_ Z_;
G01 Z_ F0.4;
G15; G01 Z_ F0.4;
G15;
G01 Z_ F0.4; G01 Z_ F0.4;
: :
: :
.......
.......
Whereas synchronization is possible only with the next block using the inter-part system
synchronization code "!", the balance cutting function provides synchronization (at the block start
timing) with multiple consecutive blocks.
- 206 -
12.1.8.7 Common Memory between Tool Posts

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – – – – – { { {
For the machine with two part systems, the common variables and tool compensation memory
which exist in 1-part system and 2-part system respectively can be made common in those systems
by the parameter setting.
(1) Common variables

For 2-part system, normally, common variables #100 to #199 are provided per part system,
and common variables #500 to #999 are common for part systems. However, when this
function is valid, common variables #500 to #999 are also provided per part system.
To make a part or all of common variables #100 to #199 and #500 to #999 to be used
commonly between part systems, set parameters to designate the number of variables to be
used commonly for #100 to #199 and #500 to #999 respectively.
As for the variables designated to be common to part systems, the data for part system 1 is
used.
(2) Tool compensation memory

When the common tool compensation memory between part systems is valid, the tool
compensation memory used during operation in part system 2 is changed so that part system
1 data is used. Therefore, part system 2 data is not used because part systems are made
common.
This function is only for the lathe system and supported up to 2 part systems.
(Note) The setting (such as number of axes and axis names) for the tool offset amount of part
system 1 and part system 2 must be the same.
If the settings differ, the setting of part system 1 will be applied.
12.1.8.9 2-part System Program Management

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – – – – – { { {
Using parameter (#1050 MemPrg) the machining program can be created for each system, and can
be input/output for each system.
- 207 -
12.1.9 Data Input by Program
12.1.9.1 Parameter Input by Program

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
The parameters set from the setting and display unit can be changed using the machining
programs.
The format used for the data setting is shown below.
G10 L50 ; ....... Data setting command

P Major classification No. A Axis No. N Data No. H Bit type data ;
P Major classification No. A Axis No. N Data No. D Byte type data ; Parameter
settings in data
P Major classification No. A Axis No. N Data No. S Word type data ; setting mode
P Major classification No. A Axis No. N Data No. L 2-word type data ;
G11 ; ….. Data setting mode cancel (data setting completed)
The following types of data formats can be used according to the type of parameter (axis-
common and axis-independent) and data type.
With axis-common data

Axis-common bit-type parameter --------------------- P N H ;
Axis-common byte-type parameter ------------------- P N D ;
Axis-common word-type parameter ------------------ P N S ;
Axis-common 2-word-type parameter --------------- P N L ;
With axis-independent data

Axis-independent bit-type parameter ---------------- P A N H ;
Axis-independent byte-type parameter -------------- P A N D ;
Axis-independent word-type parameter ------------- P A N S ;
Axis-independent 2-word-type parameter ---------- P A N L ;
(Note 1) The order of addresses in a block must be as shown above.

(Note 2) For a bit type parameter, the data type will be H ( is a value between 0 and 7).
(Note 3) The axis number is set in the following manner: 1st axis is "1", 2nd axis is "2", and so
forth.
When using the 2-part system, the 1st axis in each part system is set as "1", the 2nd axis
is set as "2", and so forth.
(Note 4) Command G10L50 and G11 in independent blocks. A program error will occur if not
commanded in independent blocks.
Depending on the G90/G91 modal status when the G10 command is assigned, the data is used to
overwrite the existing data or added.
- 208 -
12.1.9.2 Compensation Data Input by Program

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
(1) Workpiece coordinate system offset input

The value of the workpiece coordinate systems selected by the G54 to G59 commands can be
set or changed by program commands.
G code Function
G10 L2 P0 External workpiece coordinate system setting
G10 L2 P1 Workpiece coordinate system 1 setting (G54)
The format for the workpiece coordinate system setting commands is shown below.
G10 L2 Pp1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;

G10 L2 : Parameter change command
Pp1 : Workpiece coordinate No.
Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 : Settings
(Note) L2 can be omitted. Omitting Pp1 results in a program error. [M system]
- 209 -
(2) Tool offset input

The tool offset amounts, which have been set from the setting and display unit, can be input by
program commands.
The command format differs between the [M system] and the [L system]. The respective
command format must be set by a parameter.
[M system]
G code Function
G10 L10 Tool length shape offset amount
G10 L11 Tool length wear offset amount
G10 L12 Tool radius shape offset amount
G10 L13 Tool radius wear offset amount
The tool offset input format is as follows.
G10 Ll1 Pp1 Rr1 ;

G10 Ll1 : Command for setting offset amount
Pp1 : Offset No.
Rr1 : Offset amount
(Note) When Ll1 has been omitted, the tool length shape offset amount is set. Omitting Pp1
results in a program error.
[L system]
G code Function
G10 L10 Tool length offset amount
G10 L11 Tool wear offset amount
The tool offset input format is as follows.
G10 L10(L11) Pp1 Xx1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 ;

G10 L10(L11) : Command for setting offset amount
Pp1 : Offset No.
Xx1 : X axis offset amount
Zz1 : Z axis offset amount
Rr1 : Nose R compensation amount
Qq1 : Hypothetical tool nose point
- 210 -
12.1.10 Machining Modal
12.1.10.1 Tapping Mode

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When tapping mode commands are issued, the NC system is set to the following internal control
modes required for tapping.
1. Cutting override is fixed at 100%.
2. Deceleration commands at joints between blocks are invalid.
3. Feed hold is invalid.
4. Single block is invalid.
5. "In tapping mode" signal is output.
G code Function
G63 Tapping mode ON
The tapping mode command will be canceled with the following commands:
• Exact stop check mode (G61)
• Automatic corner override (G62)
• Cutting mode (G64)
• High-accuracy control mode command (G61.1) [M system]
The machine is in the cutting mode status when its power is turned on.
12.1.10.2 Cutting Mode

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When a cutting mode command is issued, the NC system is set to the cutting mode that enables
smooth cutting surface to be achieved. In this mode, the next block is executed continuously
without the machine having to decelerate and stop between the cutting feed blocks: this is the
opposite of what happens in the exact stop check mode (G61).
G code Function
G64 Cutting mode ON
The cutting mode command will be canceled with the following commands:
• Exact stop check mode (G61)
• Automatic corner override (G62)
• Tapping mode (G63)
• High-accuracy control mode command (G61.1) [M system]
The machine is in the cutting mode status when its power is turned on.
- 211 -
12.2 Machining Accuracy Support Functions

12.2.1 Automatic Corner Override
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
To prevent machining surface distortion due to the increase in the cutting load during cutting of
corners, this function automatically applies an override on the cutting feed rate so that the cutting
amount is not increased for a set time at the corner.
Automatic corner override is valid only during tool radius compensation.
The automatic corner override mode is set to ON by the G62 command and it is canceled by any of
the G commands below.
G40 ...... Tool radius compensation cancel
G61 ...... Exact stop check mode
G63 ...... Tapping mode
G64 ...... Cutting mode
G61.1.... High-accuracy control mode [M system]
Programmed path
θ Machining allowance (finished shape)
workpiece S
Workpiece surface
(2) (3) shape
(1)
Tool center path
Machining
allowance
Ci
Deceleration
range
Tool
θ : Max. angle at inside corner

Ci : Deceleration range (IN)
Operation
(a) When automatic corner override is not to be applied :
When the tool moves in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) in the figure above, the machining
allowance at (3) is larger than that at (2) by an amount equivalent to the area of shaded
section S and so the tool load increases.
(b) When automatic corner override is to be applied :
When the inside corner angle θ in the figure above is less than the angle set in the parameter,
the override set into the parameter is automatically applied in the deceleration range Ci.
- 212 -
12.2.2 Deceleration Check

The deceleration check function leads the machine to decelerate and stop at the join between one
block and another before executing the next block to alleviate the machine shock and to prevent
the corner roundness that occurs when the feed rate of the control axis changes suddenly.
Without deceleration check With deceleration check

N010 G01 X100 ; N010 G09 G01 X100 ;
N011 G01 Y-50 ; N011 G01 Y-50 ;
A sharp edge is formed because

Coner rounding occurs because the N011 block is started after the
the N011 block is started before N010 remaining distance has
the N010 command is completely reached the command deceleration
finished. check width or the in-position check
width.
The conditions for executing deceleration check are described below.
(1) Deceleration check in the rapid traverse mode

In the rapid traverse mode, the deceleration check is always performed when block movement
is completed before executing the next block.
(2) Deceleration check in the cutting feed mode

In the cutting feed mode, the deceleration check is performed at the end of block when any of
the conditions below is applicable before executing the next block.
(a) When G61 (exact stop check mode) is selected.
(b) When the G09 (exact stop check) is issued in the same block.
(c) when the error detect switch (external signal) is ON.
(3) Deceleration check system

Deceleration check is a system that executes the next block only after the command
deceleration check is executed as shown below, and it has been confirmed that the position
error amount, including the servo system, is less than the in-position check width (designated
with parameter or with ",I" in same block).
Servo
Previous Next block

block
Command
Block interpolation In-position check width

completion point
- 213 -
12.2.2.1 Exact Stop Mode

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
A deceleration check is performed when the G61 (exact stop check mode) command has been
selected. G61 is a modal command. The modal command is released by the following commands.
G62.......Automatic corner override

G63.......Tapping mode
G64.......Cutting mode
G61.1....High-accuracy control mode [M system]
Refer to "12.2.2 Deceleration Check" for details on the deceleration check.
12.2.2.2 Exact Stop Check

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
A deceleration check is performed when the G09 (exact stop check) command has been
designated in the same block.
The G09 command is issued in the same block as the cutting command. It is an unmodal
command.
12.2.2.3 Error Detect

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
To prevent rounding of a corner during cutting feed, the operation can be changed by turning an
external signal switch ON so that the axis decelerates and stops once at the end of the block and
then the next block is executed.
The deceleration stop at the end of the cutting feed block can also be commanded with a G code.
- 214 -
12.2.2.4 Programmable Inposition Check

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This command is used to designate the in-position width, which is valid when a linear interpolation
command is assigned, from the machining program. The in-position width designated with a linear
interpolation command is valid only in cases when the deceleration check is performed, such as:
• When the error detect switch is ON.
• When the G09 (exact stop check) command has been designated in the same block.
• When the G61 (exact stop check mode) command has been selected.
G01 X_ Z_ F_ ,I_;
X_,Z_ : Linear interpolation coordinates of axes
F_ : Feed rate
,I_ : In-position width
This command is used to designate the in-position width, which is valid when a positioning
command is assigned, from the machining program.
G00 X_ Z_ ,I_;
X_,Z_ : Positioning coordinates of axes
,I_ : In-position width
In-position check operation

After it has been verified that the position error between the block in which the positioning
command (G00: rapid traverse) is designated and the block in which the deceleration check is
performed by the linear interpolation command (G01) is less than the in-position width of this
command, the execution of the next block is commenced.
- 215 -
12.2.3 High-Accuracy Control (G61.1)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
This function controls the operation so the lag will be eliminated in control systems and servo
systems. With this function, improved machining accuracy can be realized, especially during high-
speed machining, and machining time can be reduced.
The high-accuracy control function is a combination of the following element functions.
The high-accuracy control is commanded with ;
G61.1 High-accuracy control ON
Effects in G02/G03 circular interpolation Neat machining of sharp corners without

Machining path with a feed forward waste is realized with optimum linear
gain of 70% in high-accuracy control acceleration/deceleration and corner
mode judgement.
Commanded path
Optimum corner deceleration
Y
R
Machining path with a feed
forward gain of 0% in
high-accuracy control mode
R
F
Machining path when
high-accuracy control mode is
OFF
Conventionally
X
R: Command radius (mm) F

∆R: Radius error (mm) Conventionally
F: Cutting feed rate (m/min)
Optimum corner deceleration

T
(1) Acceleration / deceleration before interpolation

By accelerating /decelerating before interpolation, the machining shape error can be eliminated with
smoothing, and a highly accurate path can be achieved.
With the arc commands, the radius reduction error can be significantly minimized.
Furthermore, since constant inclination acceleration/deceleration is performed, the time taken for
positioning at microscopically small distances in the G00 command is reduced.
(Note 1) Whether acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in the rapid traverse command
(G00) is to be performed always or not can be selected using a parameter setting
independently from the high-accuracy control assignment.
(2) Optimum corner deceleration

By determining the command vector in the machining program and thereby performing corner
deceleration, it is possible to machine workpiece with a high-edge accuracy. The figure below
shows the pattern of the deceleration speed at the corners.
(Optimum corner deceleration is a function of high-accuracy control mode.)
- 216 -
The speed change can be smoothed by the S-shape filter, the machine vibration can be
suppressed, and the surface accuracy improved.
At the corner, the vector commanded in the machining program is automatically determined, and
the speed is decelerated at the corner. A highly accurate edge can be machined by decelerating at
the corner.
Speed
N001 N002
P θ F
N002

N001 V0 : Maximum allowable
Deccelerates as far as V0 Inclination of acceleration
/deceleration before deceleration speed
V0
interpolation (acceleration)
Time
(3) Feed forward control
A stable servo
contorol with an Feed forward control
extremely small
servo error can
be realized
using the feed
forward control Kp Kv M
charactaristic to
Kp : Position loop gain Detector
this CNC
system. Kv : Speed loop gain S
M : Motor
S : Differential
(4) Vector accuracy interpolation

When a fine segment is commanded and the angle between the blocks is extremely small (when
not using optimum corner deceleration), interpolation can be carried out more smoothly using the
vector accuracy interpolation.
Vector accuracy interpolation

ベクトル精補間
Commanded
指令軌跡path
- 217 -
(5) Arc entrance/exit speed control

There are cases when the speed fluctuates and the machine vibrates at the joint from the straight
line to arc or from the arc to straight line.
This function decelerates to the deceleration speed before entering the arc and after exiting the
arc to reduce the machine vibration. If this is overlapped with corner deceleration, the function
with the slower deceleration speed is valid.
(6) S-pattern filter control

This control interpolates while smoothing the changes in the segments distributed to each axis
element with vector accuracy interpolation. With this, the fluctuation amplified by feed forward
control is reduced and the effect onto the machine is reduced.
- 218 -
12.3 Programming Support Functions
12.3 Programming Support Functions

12.3.1 Playback
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
By repeatedly operating the controls on the panel, the amounts by which the machine is to move by
jog feed, rapid traverse and handle feed can be converted into the command format of the control
unit, and by repeatedly writing this data into the memory, machining programs for all the steps can
be prepared.
12.3.2 Address Check

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When a machining program is to be run, it can be checked in 1-word units. A parameter is used to
select whether or not to conduct an address check.
Program address check operation

In addition to the conventional program check, a simple check in 1-word units is conducted. If
letters of the alphabet follow successively, a program error results.
(Word: Consists of one letter followed by a number composed of several digits.)
With the conventional method, when a letter was not followed by a number, that the number
was assumed to be zero, however, now an error will result when this new check is performed.
An error will not result in the following cases:
(1) Machine language
(2) Comment statements
Example of a program address check

Example 1: When the letter is not followed by a number
G28X; → Program should be reviewed and changed to G28X0; , etc.
Example 2: When there is an illegal character string
TEST; → Program should be reviewed and changed to "(TEST);", etc.
- 219 -
13 Machine Accuracy Compensation
13.1 Static Accuracy Compensation

13.1.1 Backlash Compensation
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function compensates for the error (backlash) produced when the direction of the machine
system is reversed.
The backlash compensation can be set in the cutting feed mode or rapid traverse mode.
The amount of backlash compensation can be set separately for each axis. It is set using a number
of pulses in increments of one-half of the least input unit. The output follows the output unit system.
The "output unit system" is the unit system of the machine system (ball screw unit system).
The amount of compensation for each axis ranges from 0 to ±9999 (pulses).
- 220 -
13.1.2 Memory-type Pitch Error Compensation

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
The machine accuracy can be improved by compensating for the errors in the screw pitch intervals
among the mechanical errors (production errors, wear, etc.) of the feed screws.
The compensation positions and amounts are stored in the memory by setting them beforehand for
each axis, and this means that there is no need to attach dogs to the machine.
The compensation points are divided into the desired equal intervals.
1. Division intervals of compensation points : 1 to 9999999 (output unit)

2. Number of compensation points : 1024
3. Compensation amount : –128 to 127 pulses (output unit)
4. No. of compensated axes : 10 axes (including number of axes for relative
position error compensation)
(1) The compensation position is set for the compensation axis whose reference position serves
as the zero (0) point. Thus, memory-type pitch error compensation is not performed if return to
reference position is not made for the compensation base axis or compensation execution axis
after the controller power is turned ON and the servo is turned ON.
(2) When the compensation base axis is a rotary axis, select the dividing intervals so that one
rotation can be divided.
+
Compensation
amount Compensation
base axis
R#1
Division interval
(3) As shown in the figure above, highly individualized compensation control is exercised using
the minimum output units with linear approximation for the compensation intervals between
the compensation points.
(Note 1) Compensation points 1,024 is a total including the points for memory-type relative
position error compensation.
(Note 2) A scale of 0 to 99-fold is applied on the compensation amount.
- 221 -
13.1.3 Memory-type Relative Position Error Compensation

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
Machine accuracy can be improved by compensating a relative error between machine axes, such
as a production error or time aging.
The compensation base axis and compensation execution axis are set by using parameters.
The compensation points are divided at any desired equal intervals.
1. Compensation point dividing intervals : 1 to 9999999 (output unit)

2. Number of compensation points : 1024
3. Compensation amount : –128 to 127 pulses (detection unit)
4. No. of compensated axes : 10 axes (including number of axes for memory
type pitch error compensation.)
(1) The compensation position is set for the compensation axis whose reference position serves
as the zero (0) point. Thus, memory-type relative position error compensation is not performed
if return to reference position is not made for the compensation base axis or compensation
execution axis after the controller power is turned ON and the servo is turned ON.
(2) When the compensation base axis is a rotary axis, select the dividing intervals so that one
rotation can be divided.
(3) Since all coordinate systems of compensation execution axes are shifted or displaced by the
compensation amount when the relative position error compensation is made, the stroke check
point and machine coordinate system are also shifted or displaced.
(Note 1) Compensation points 1,024 is a total including the points for memory-type pitch error
compensation.
(Note 2) A scale of 0 to 99-fold is applied on the compensation amount.
- 222 -
13.1.4 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
The coordinate system can be shifted by inputting a compensation amount from the PLC. This
compensation amount will not appear on the counter (all counters including machine position). If the
machine's displacement value caused by heat is input for example, this can be used for thermal
displacement compensation.
Machine coordinate zero point when the external

machine coordinate system offset amount is 0.
Mc:Compensation vector according to external

machine coordinate system compensation
Machine coordinate zero point
13.1.5 Circular Radius Error Compensation

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
With commands designated during arc cutting, this function compensates for movement toward the
inside of the arcs caused by a factor such as servo delay.
- 223 -
13.2 Dynamic Accuracy Compensation

13.2.1 Smooth High-gain Control (SHG Control)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
This is a high-response and stable position control method using the servo system (MDS- -
V /SVJ2). This SHG control realizes an approximately three-fold position loop gain equally
compared to the conventional control method.
The features of the SHG control are as follows.
(1) The acceleration/deceleration becomes smoother, and the mechanical vibration can be
suppressed (approx. 1/2) during acceleration/deceleration. (In other words, the
acceleration/deceleration time constant can be shortened.)
Conventional control SHG control
(position loop gain = 33rad/S) (position loop gain = 50rad/S)
Step response
Conventional 6.0
Speed control
Current
SHG control
3.0
Machine
vibration
Machine vibration
Time Time amount (µm)
(2) The shape error is approx. 1/9 of the conventional control.

Y
3
Conventional 22.5
2 Feed rate 3000mm/min. control
Radius 50mm
1 1. Conventional control SHG control 2.5
X 2. SHG control
3. SHG control + FF (Feed forward)
SHG control + FF 1.0
Roundness error (µm)
(3) The positioning time is approx. 1/3 of the conventional control.

Droop Droop during rapid traverse deceleration
Conventional
2 1 control 200
3
1. Conventional control
2. SHG control SHG control 70
3. SHG control + FF (Feed forward)
SHG control + FF 60
Positioning time (ms)

Time
- 224 -
13.2.2 Dual Feedback

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
Depending on the frequency, the weight (gain) of the position feedback amount provided by the
motor end detector and position feedback amount provided by the machine end detector stands in
the correlation shown in the figure below. Semi-closed control is provided on a transient basis
whereas positioning can be controlled by the closed status.
This function is used to select the primary delay filter time constant during dual feedback control as
a parameter setting.
Weight (gain) of position feedback amounts
Motor end Machine end
db db
1 1
T T
0 0
rad/s rad/s
Time constant T here is adjusted using a parameter.
13.2.3 Lost Motion Compensation

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function compensates the error in the protrusion shape caused by lost motion at the arc
quadrant changeover section during circular cutting.
- 225 -
14 Automation Support Functions
14.1 External Data Input

By using the DDB interface, the following functions can be realized from the PLC ladder.
14.1.1 External Search

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
The program No. and sequence No. to be automatically started in the memory or tape mode,
ladder can be searched from the PLC ladder. The currently searched details can be read.
- 226 -
14.1.2 External Workpiece Coordinate Offset

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
External workpiece coordinate offset that serves as the reference for all the workpiece coordinate
systems is available outside the workpiece coordinates.
By setting the external workpiece coordinate offset, the external workpiece coordinate system can
be shifted from the machine coordinate system, and all the workpiece coordinate systems can be
simultaneously shifted by an amount equivalent to the offset.
When the external workpiece coordinate offset is zero, the external workpiece coordinate systems
coincide with the machine coordinate system.
It is not possible to assign movement commands by selecting the external workpiece coordinates.
Workpiece coordinate 4 Workpiece coordinate 5 Workpiece coordinate 6

(G57) (G58) (G59)

(G54) (G55) (G56)
Machine coordinate system

(= External workpiece coordinate

(G57) (G58) (G59)

(G54) (G55) (G56)
External workpiece coordinate
External workpiece coordinate offset

- 227 -
14.1.3 External Tool Offset

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – { { { {
L system – – – – { { { {
The tool offset amount can be referred and updated from the PLC ladder.
- 228 -
14.2 Measurement
14.2 Measurement
14.2.1 Skip
14.2.1.1 Skip
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
When the external skip signal is input during linear interpolation with the G31 command, the
machine feed is stopped immediately, the remaining distance is discarded and the commands in
the next block are executed.
G31 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ff1 ;

G31 : Measurement command
Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 : Command values
Ff1 : Feed rate
Skip signal input
Feed rate
Programmed end point
Remaining Position
Actual movement distance distance
Command value
When the G31 command is issued, acceleration/deceleration is accomplished in steps (time

constant = 0).
There are two types of skip feed rate.

1. Feed rate based on program command when F command is present in program
2. Feed rate based on parameter setting when F command is not present in program
(Note 1) The approximate coasting distance up to feed stop based on the detection delay in the skip
signal input is calculated as below.
F δ : Coasting distance (mm)

δ
•
= •
× (Tp + t) F : G31 rate (mm/min)
60
Tp : Position loop time constant (s) = (position loop gain)–1
T : Response delay time of 0.0035 (s)
(Note 2) Skipping during machine lock is not valid.
- 229 -
14.2 Measurement
14.2.1.2 Multiple-step Skip

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
(1) G31.n method

This function realizes skipping by designating a combination of skip signals for each skip command
(G31.1, G31.2, G31.3).
The combination of the skip signals 1, 2 and 3 are designated with parameters for each G code
(G31.1, 31.2, 31.3), and the skip operation is executed when all signals in the combination are input.
G31.n Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ff1 ;

G31.n : Skip command (n=1, 2, 3)
Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 : Command format axis coordinate word and target coordinates
Ff1 : Feed rate (mm/min)
(2) G31Pn method

As with the G31.n method, the valid skip signal is designated and skip is executed. However, the
method of designating the valid skip signal differs.
The skip signals that can be used are 1 to 7. Which is to be used is designated with P in the
program. Refer to Table 1 for the relation of the P values and valid signals.
Skip can be executed on dwell, allowing the remaining dwell time to be canceled and the next block
executed under the skip conditions (to distinguish external skip signals 1 to 7) set with the
parameters during the dwell command (G04).
G31 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Pp1 Ff1 ;

G31 : Skip command
Xx1, Yy1, Zz1 : Command format axis coordinate word and target coordinates
Pp1 : Skip signal command
Ff1 : Feed rate (mm/min)
(a) Specify the skip rate in command feedrate F. However, F modal is not updated.
(b) Specify skip signal command in skip signal command P. Specify the P value in the range
of 1 to 127. If it exceeds the specified range, a program error occurs.
- 230 -
14.2 Measurement
Table 1 Valid skip signals

Valid skip signal
Skip signal command P
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 {
2 {
3 { {
4 {
5 { {
6 { {
7 { { {
8 {
: : : : : : : :
125 { { { { { {
126 { { { { { {
127 { { { { { { {
14.2.1.4 PLC Skip

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
This function enables skip operations to be performed by signals which are input from the user PLC.
- 231 -
14.2 Measurement
14.2.1.5 Speed Change Skip

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – ∆ ∆
This function is used to change the feed rate or to stop the movement by inputting the skip signal
during the linear interpolation.
After stopping the movement with skipping, the remaining movement command is canceled and the
next block is executed.
G31 Xx Yy Zz Ff F1 = f1 ... Fn = fn ;
(n is the skip signal 1 to 8.)
Xx, Yy, Zz : Command value
Ff : Feed rate when starting the cutting feed (mm/min)
fn : Feed rate after detecting the skip signal (mm/min)
fn=0: Movement stop
fn≠0: Changing the feed rate to fn
F1=Feed rate after inputting the skip signal 1
...
F8=Feed rate after inputting the skip signal 8
Operation example
G31 X100. Ff F1=0 F2 = f2 F3 = f3 F4 = f4;
Speed
Skip signal 4
f Skip signal 3
f4 Skip signal 2
f3 Skip signal 1
f2
f1
0 Time
Skip time constant Position loop time constant

–1
(position loop gain )
- 232 -
14.2 Measurement
14.2.5 Automatic Tool Length Measurement

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
(1) Automatic Tool Length Measurement (M system)

This function moves the tool in the direction of the tool measurement position by the commanded
value between the measurement start position to the measurement position, it stops the tool as
soon as it contacts the sensor and calculates the difference between the coordinates when the tool
has stopped and commanded coordinates. It registers this difference as the tool length offset
amount for that tool.
If compensation has already been applied to the tool, it is moved in the direction of the
measurement position with the compensation still applied, and when the measurement and
calculation results are such that a further compensation amount is to be provided, the current
compensation amount is further corrected.
If the compensation amount at this time is one type, the compensation amount is automatically
corrected; if there is a distinction between the tool length compensation amount and wear
compensation amount, the wear amount is automatically corrected.
G37 Z_R_D_F_ ;
Z :Measurement axis address and measurement position coordinate. ... X, Y, Z, α
(where α is an optional axis)
R : The distance between the point at which tool movement is to start at the
measurement speed and the measurement position.
D : The range in which the tool is to stop.
F : The measurement rate.
When R_, D_ and F_ have been omitted, the values set in the parameters are used.
Tool change position

At this time, the tool length
Reference position offset amount has a minus
(In case of machine
coordinate system zero
("–") value.
point.)
Tool Example of program
G28 Z0 ;
Amount of movement
based on tool length
T01 ;
measurement M06 T02 ;
G43 G00 Z0 H01 ;
G37 Z–300. R10.D2.F10 ;
⋅
⋅
Tool length measurement
position (Za1)
In this case, the distance
(H01 = Za1 – z0) from the
tool T01 tip to the top of the
measurement sensor is
calculated as the tool
length offset amount which
Sensor
is then registered in the
tool offset table.
- 233 -
14.2 Measurement
Area A : Moves with rapid traverse

Start point feed rate.
Areas B1, B2 : Moves with the
A measurement speed (f1 or
parameter setting)
B1
If a sensor signal is input in area
r1 B1, an error will occur.
d1 If a sensor signal is not input in
Measurement the area B2, an error will occur.
B2 position (z 1)
d1
(2) Automatic tool length measurement (L series)

This function moves the tool in the direction of the tool measurement position by the commanded
value between the measurement start position to the measurement position, it stops the tool as
soon as it contacts the sensor and calculates the difference between the coordinates when the tool
has stopped and commanded coordinates. It registers this difference as the tool length offset
amount for that tool.
If compensation has already been applied to the tool, it is moved in the direction of the
measurement position with the compensation still applied, and when the measurement and
calculation results are such that a further compensation amount is to be provided, the current wear
compensation amount is further corrected.
G37 α_R_D_F_ ;
α :
Measurement axis address and measurement position coordinate. ... X, Z
R :
The distance between the point at which tool movement is to start at the
measurement speed and the measurement position. (Always a radial value:
incremental value)
D : The range in which the tool is to stop. (Always a radial value: incremental value)
F : The measurement rate.
When R_, D_ and F_ have been omitted, the values set in the parameters are used.
- 234 -
14.2 Measurement
r1, d1, and f1 can also be set in parameters.
Start position
A Rapid traverse feed
r1 d1 F feed
Measurement
Measuring instrument d1 position
When the tool moves from the start position to the measurement position specified in G37 x1 (z1), it
passes through the A area at rapid traverse. Then, it moves at the measurement rate set in F
command or parameter from the position specified in r1. If the measurement position arrival signal
turns ON during the tool is moving in the B area, an error occurs. If the measurement position
arrival signal does not turn ON although the tool passes through the measurement position x1 (z1)
and moves d1, an error occurs.
- 235 -
14.2 Measurement
14.2.6 Manual Tool Length Measurement 1

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
Simple measurement of the tool length is done without a sensor.
(1) Manual tool length measurement I

[M system]
When the tool is at the reference position, M
this function enables the distance from
the tool tip to the measurement position
(top of workpiece) to be measured and
Manual
registered as the tool length offset movement
amount. amount (tool
length offset
amount)
Workpiece
Table
(2) Manual tool length

measurement I
[L system]
A measurement position
(machine coordinates) to match X axis X axis tool
Parameter
the tool nose on the machine is setting
length
preset and the tool nose is set
to the measurement position by Z axis tool length
manual feed, then the operation
Measurement
key is pressed, thereby position Parameter setting
automatically calculating the
Z axis
tool offset amount and setting it M
as the tool length offset amount.
Measurement method
(a) Preset the machine coordinates of the measurement position in a given parameter as the
measurement basic value.
(b) Select a tool whose tool length offset amount is to be measured.
(c) Set the tool nose to the measurement position by manual feed.
(d) Press the input key. The tool length offset amount is calculated and displayed on the
setting area.
Tool length offset amount = machine coordinates – measurement basic value
(e) Again press the input key to store the value in the memory as the tool length offset amount
of the tool.
- 236 -
14.2 Measurement
14.2.7 Manual Tool Length Measurement 2

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
(1) Manual tool length measurement II

[M system]
When the tool is positioned at the M Tool length offset
amount
reference position, this function
enables the distance from the
reference position to the tool tip to be Manual
measured and registered as the tool TLM basic movement
length (setup amount
length offset amount. In this case, the
position of the gauge block used as a parameter)
Gauge block Basic height
reference must be set as the basic
height. Table
If the height axis designation parameter is ON, the axis designated for plane selection basic axis K
is the axis targeted for measurement as the height axis.
Furthermore, if the tool length measurement check parameter is ON, an input OK/cancel
confirmation message appears after input key has been pressed.
(2) Manual tool length

measurement II [L system]
A device in which a touch sensor is
built is used. Simply by causing the X axis tool
tool nose to touch the touch sensor in length
manual feed, the tool offset amount
Z axis tool
can be calculated and stored in tool X axis length
offset amount memory. – touch face
Z axis +
touch face Z axis – touch face
X axis + touch face
Measurement method
(a) Preset the machine coordinates of the touch sensor touch face in parameter as the
measurement basic value.
(b) Select the tool whose tool length offset amount is to be measured.
(c) Cause the tool nose to touch the touch sensor in manual feed.
The tool length offset amount is automatically calculated from the machine coordinates
when the tool nose touches the touch sensor and the measurement basic value. It is
stored in memory as tool length offset amount.
Tool length offset amount
= machine coordinates – measurement basic value (sensor position)
- 237 -
14.2 Measurement
14.2.8 Workpiece Coordinate Offset Measurement

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆(*) ∆(*) ∆(*) ∆(*)
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
The external workpiece coordinate offset data for the Z axis can be set by cutting the workpiece
face by means of manual operations and inputting the workpiece measurement signal.
Measurement of external workpiece coordinate offset data for Z axis
X axis
Machine
Tool post zero point
Workpiece
Z axis
Workpiece coordinate
zero point
Setting method
(1) Select the tool, and cut the workpiece face.
(2) When the workpiece measurement signal is input, the external workpiece coordinate offset
data for the Z axis is calculated from the machine coordinate values, length of the tool used
and tool nose wear offset amount, and stored in the memory.
(Note) The (*) mark is the simple workpiece coordinate offset input.
With this function, the workpiece coordinate system offset data automatic calculation value
and machine position for corresponding axes are displayed in the setting part on the
workpiece coordinate offset screen.
- 238 -
14.2 Measurement
14.2.9 Workpiece Position Measurement

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
The workpiece position measurement function is used to measure each axis’ coordinate point by
installing a sensor on the spindle and the sensor contacting the workpiece with the manual feed or
handle feed.
The surface, hole center and width center coordinates are calculated from the measured
coordinates, and those calculated results are set in the workpiece coordinate offset.
Only 1st part system is available for the workpiece position measurement.
(1) Surface workpiece offset measurement

The workpiece position measurement coordinates are calculated from the skip machine position of
the X, Y and Z axes.
Measurement position coordinate X = X axis’ skip machine position + Sensor diameter/2
+ Center compensation amount (Horizontal)
Measurement position coordinate Y = Y axis’ skip machine position + Sensor diameter/2
+ Center compensation amount (Vertical)
Measurement position coordinate Z = Z axis’ skip machine position - Sensor length
The sensor diameter/2 changes between +/− with the tool movement direction during the
measurement.
The sensor diameter and center compensation amount are applied to the X axis or Y axis.
The sensor length is applied to the Z axis.
The measurement position coordinate of the X axis, Y axis or Z axis is set in the specified
workpiece coordinate offset.
To set the workpiece coordinate offset,

the X axis is measured and the X axis’
X
offset coordinate is set. Then, the Y axis’
offset is measured and set. Finally, the Z
Workpiece coordinate axis’ offset is measured and set.
zero point
XXaxis
axismeasurement
constant position
measuremen
Y
Y axis measurement
constant position
- 239 -
14.2 Measurement
(2) Hole center workpiece offset measurement

The measurement position coordinates of two axes (X, Y) are measured at three points, and the
hole center is calculated. The calculated result is set in the specified workpiece coordinate offset.
Measurement position coordinate X = X axis’ skip machine position + Center compensation amount
(Horizontal)
Measurement position coordinate Y = Y axis’ skip machine position + Center compensation amount
(Vertical)
To set the workpiece coordinate

X Measuement B point
offset, the position X and Y of the
measurement A point are
measured, and the measured
Measurement values are set in the measurement
Measurement
AApoint
point A point. In the same manner as the
measurement A point, the
measurement B point and then C
point are measured and set.
Workpiece coordinate The hole center coordinate is
zero point Measurement
Measurement
CCpoint
point calculated by setting the workpiece
coordinate system after setting
Y three points, and the calculated
result is set in the workpiece
coordinate offset.
(3) Width center workpiece offset measurement

The measurement position coordinate of the X axis or Y axis is measured at two points, and each
axis’ groove center is calculated. The calculated result is set in the specified workpiece coordinate
offset.
Measurement position coordinate X = X axis’ skip machine position + Center compensation amount
(Horizontal)
Measurement position coordinate Y = Y axis’ skip machine position + Center compensation amount
(Vertical)
To set the workpiece coordinate

Measurement B point
X offset, the position X (position Y) of
the measurement A point is
measured, and the measured value
Measurement is set in the measurement A point.
A point In the same manner as the
measurement A point, the
measurement B point is measured
and set.
The groove width center coordinate
of the X axis (Y axis) is calculated
by setting the workpiece coordinate
system after setting two points, and
Y
the calculated result is set in the
workpiece coordinate offset.
- 240 -
14.3 Monitoring
14.3 Monitoring
14.3.1 Tool Life Management
Tool Life Management I
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
(1) M series
The time (0 to 4000 hours) and frequency (0 to 65000 times) of use of the user PLC specified tool
are accumulated. Tool data including the time and frequency of use of the PLC specified tool is
output.
(2) L series
Tool life management is performed using the time and frequency of use of a tool.
(a) Management by the time of use
The cutting time after specification of a tool selection (T) command (G01, G02, and G33) is
added to the tool use time for the specified tool.
If the use time reaches the life time when a tool selection command is specified, an alarm is
given.
(b) Management by the frequency of use
The tool use counter corresponding to the number of the specified tool is incremented each
time a tool selection (T) command is specified for the tool.
If the counter reaches the life time when a tool selection command is specified, an alarm is
given.
Tool Life Management II

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
(1) M series
A spare tool change function is added to tool life management I. This function selects a usable tool
out of the spare tools of the group determined by the value specified by the user PLC, then outputs
data of such usable spare tool. The spare tool can be selected in two ways: the tools are selected
in order they were registered in the group or the tool whose remaining life is the longest of all in the
group is selected.
(2) L series
The life of each tool (time and frequency) is controlled, and when the life is reached, a spare tool
that is the same type is selected from the group where the tool belongs and used.
y No. of groups: Max. 40 sets (each part system)/ For 1 part system: 80 sets
y No. of tools in group: Max. 16 tools
- 241 -
14.3 Monitoring
14.3.2 Number of Tool Life Management Sets

The number of tools that can be managed for their lives are shown below. (These are fixed by the
No. of systems according to the model.)
20/40/80 sets
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system ∆80 ∆80 ∆80 ∆80 ∆80 ∆80 ∆80 ∆80
100/200 sets
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆100 ∆100 ∆100 ∆100 ∆200 ∆200 ∆200 ∆200
L system – – – – – – – –
14.3.3 Display of Integrated Time/Number of Parts

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The number of machined parts is counted up each time a part is machined, and displayed .
Number of
workpieces machined
Maximum number of workpieces to be machined
Number of workpieces machined
14.3.4 Load Meter

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Using the user PLC, this function displays the spindle load, Z-axis load, etc. in the form of bar
graphs.
- 242 -
14.3 Monitoring
14.3.5 Position Switch

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system {8 {8 {8 {8 {24 {24 {24 {24
L system {8 {8 {8 {8 {24 {24 {24 {24
The position switch (PSW) function provides hypothetical dog switches in place of the dog switches
provided on the machine axes by setting the axis names and coordinates indicating the
hypothetical dog positions as parameters beforehand so that signals are output to the PLC
interface when the machine has reached these hypothetical dog positions. The hypothetical dog
switches are known as position switches (PSW).
The coordinates indicating the hypothetical dog positions (dog1, dog2) on the coordinate axes
whose names were set by parameters ahead of time in place of the dog switches provided on the
machine axes are set using position switches (M60: PSW1 to PSW8, M60S: PSW1 to PSW24).
When the machine has reached the hypothetical dog positions, a signal is output to the device
supported by the PLC interface.
Example of dog1, dog2 settings and execution
dog1, dog2
dog1, dog2 positions Description
settings
Basic machine coordinate
dog1 < dog2 Signal is output between dog1 system zero point
dog1 dog2
and dog2 Hypothetical
dog
dog1 > dog2 Signal is output between dog2 dog1 PSW width
dog2 dog1
and dog1
dog2
dog1 = dog2 Signal is output at the dog1

dog1 ＝ dog2
(dog2) position
- 243 -
14.5 Others
14.5 Others
14.5.1 Programmable Current Limitation
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function allows the current limit value of the servo axis to be changed to a desired value in the
program, and is used for the workpiece stopper, etc.
The commanded current limit value is designated with a ratio of the limit current to the rated current.
The current limit value can also be set from the D.D.B. function and setting and display unit.
The validity of the current limit can be selected with the external signal input.
However, the current limit value of the PLC axis cannot be rewritten.
G10 L14 X dn ;
L14 : Current limit value setting (+ side/– side)
X : Axis address
dn : Current limit value 1% to 300%
(1) If the current limit is reached when the current limit is valid, the current limit reached signal is
output.
(2) The following two modes can be used with external signals as the operation after the current
limit is reached.
• Normal mode
The movement command is executed in the current state.
During automatic operation, the movement command is executed to the end, and then the
next block is moved to with the droops still accumulated.
• Interlock mode
The movement command is blocked (internal interlock).
During automatic operation, the operation stops at the corresponding block, and the next
block is not moved to.
During manual operation, the following same direction commands are ignored.
(3) During the current limit, the droop generated by the current limit can be canceled with external
signals.
(Note that the axis must not be moving.)
(4) The setting range of the current limit value is 1% to 300%. Commands that exceed this range
will cause a program error.
"P35 CMD VALUE OVER" will be displayed.
(5) If a decimal point is designated with the G10 command, only the integer will be valid.
(Example) G10 L14 X10.123 ; The current limit value will be set to 10%.
(6) For the axis name "C", the current limit value cannot be set from the program (G10 command).
To set from the program, set the axis address with an incremental axis name, or set the axis
name to one other than "C".
- 244 -
15 Safety and Maintenance
15.1 Safety Switches

15.1 Safety Switches
15.1.1 Emergency Stop
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
All operations are stopped by the emergency stop signal input and, at the same time, the drive
section is stopped using the dynamic brake and the movement of the machine is stopped.
At this time, the READY lamp on the setting and display unit goes OFF and the servo ready signal
is turned OFF.
15.1.2 Data Protection Key

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
With the input from the user PLC, it is possible to prohibit the setting and deletion of parameters
and the editing of programs from the setting and display unit.
Data protection is divided into the following groups.
Group 1: For protecting the tool data and protecting the coordinate system presettings as
based on origin setting (zero)
Group 2: For protecting the user parameters and common variables
Group 3: For protecting the machining programs
- 245 -
15.2 Display for Ensuring Safety

15.2.1 NC Warning
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The warnings which are output by the NC system are listed below.
When one of these warnings has occurred, a warning number is output to the PLC and a
description of the warning appears on the screen. Operation can be continued without taking
further action.
Type of warning Description

Servo warning The servo warning is displayed.
Spindle warning The spindle warning is displayed.
The system warning is displayed. (State such as temperature
System warning
rise, battery voltage low, etc.)
Absolute position warning A warning in the absolute position detection system is displayed.
Auxiliary axis warning The auxiliary axis warning is displayed.
15.2.2 NC Alarm
The alarms which are output by the NC system are listed below. When one of these alarms has
occurred, an alarm number is output to the PLC, and a description of the alarm appears on the
screen. Operation cannot be continued without taking remedial action.
Type of warning Description

Operation alarm This alarm occurring due to incorrect operation by the operator
during NC operation and that by machine trouble are displayed.
Servo alarm This alarm describes errors in the servo system such as the
servo drive unit‚ motor and encoder.
This alarm describes errors in the spindle system such as the
Spindle alarm
spindle drive unit‚ motor and encoder.
MCP alarm An error has occurred in the drive unit and other interfaces.
System alarm This alarm is displayed with the register at the time when the
error occurred on the screen if the system stops due to a system
error.
Absolute position detection An alarm in the absolute position detection system is displayed.
system alarm
Auxiliary axis alarm The auxiliary axis alarm is displayed.
Computer link error The computer link alarm is displayed.
User PLC alarm The user PLC alarm is displayed.
Program error This alarm occur during automatic operation‚ and the cause of
this alarm is mainly program errors which occur‚ for instance‚
when mistakes have been made in the preparation of the
machining programs or when programs which conform to the
specification have not been prepared.
- 246 -
15.2.3 Operation Stop Cause

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The stop cause of automatic operation is displayed on the setting and display unit.
15.2.4 Emergency Stop Cause

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When "EMG" (emergency stop) message is displayed in the operation status display area of the
setting and display unit, the emergency stop cause can be confirmed.
- 247 -
15.2.5 Temperature Detection

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – { { { {
L system – – – – { { { {
When overheating is detected in the control unit or the communication terminal, an overheat signal
is output at the same time as the alarm is displayed. If the system is in auto run at the time, run is
continued, but it cannot be started after reset or M02/M30 run ends. (It can be started after block
stop or feed hold.)
When the temperature falls below the specified temperature, the alarm is released and the
overheat signal is turned OFF.
The overheat alarm occurs at 80°C or more for the control unit or 70°C or more for the
communication terminal.
Communication terminal Overheat

detection
Parameter Message display
Temperature (Z53 TEMP. OVER)
alarm
(Default valid)
(70°C)
Bit device
Control unit Cooling fan

rotation
Overheat Lamp alarm
User PLC
detection Emergency stop
Others
Parameter
(Default valid)
(80°C)
(Note 1) If the parameter is used to set the temperature rise detection function to invalid,
overheating may occur, thereby disabling control and possibly resulting in the axes
running out of control, which in turn may result in machine damage and/or bodily injury or
destruction of the unit. It is for this reason that the detection function is normally left
"valid" for operation.
- 248 -
15.3 Protection
15.3 Protection
15.3.1 Stroke End (Over Travel)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When limit switches and dogs have been attached to the machine and a limit switch has kicked a
dog, the movement of the machine is stopped by the signal input from the limit switch.
At the same time, the alarm output is sent to the machine.
The stroke end state is maintained and the alarm state is released by feeding the machine in the
reverse direction in the manual mode to disengage the dog.
15.3.2 Stored Stroke Limit

The stored stroke limits I, II, IIB, IB and IC are handled as follows.
Prohibited
Type Explanation
range
•Set by the machine maker.
I Outside •When used with II, the narrow range
designated by the two types becomes
the movement valid range.
II Outside •Set by the user.
•The change or function of parameter
can be turned OFF/ON with the program
IIB Inside command.
•Select II or IIB with the parameters.
IB Inside •Set by the machine maker.
•Set by the machine maker.
IC Outside
•Can be rewritten with DDB.
- 249 -
15.3 Protection
15.3.2.1 Stored Stroke Limit I/II

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
(1) Stored Stroke Limit I

This is the stroke limit function used by the machine maker, and the area outside the set limits is
the entrance prohibited area.
The maximum and minimum values for each axis can be set by parameters. The function itself is
used together with the stored stroke limit II function described in the following section, and the
tolerable area of both functions is the movement valid range.
The setting range is –99999.999 to +99999.999mm.
The stored stroke limit I function is made valid not immediately after the controller power is turned
ON but after reference position return.
The stored stroke limit I function will be invalidated if the maximum and minimum values are set to
the same data.
Prohibited area Point 1

The values of points 1 and 2
are set using the coordinate
Machine coordinate system M values in the machine
coordinate system.
Prohibited area
Prohibited area
Machine movement
valid range
Prohibited area "+"

Point 2 "–" setting setting
Feed rate
All axes will decelerate and stop if an alarm occurs even for a single axis during automatic
operation. Only the axis for which the alarm occurs will decelerate and stop during manual
operation. The stop position must be before the prohibited area.
The value of distance "L" between the stop position and prohibited area differs according to the
feed rate and other factors.
- 250 -
15.3 Protection
(2) Stored Stroke Limit II

This is the stroke limit function which can be set by the user, and the area outside the set limits is
the prohibited area.
The maximum and minimum values for each axis can be set by parameters. The function itself is
used together with the stored stroke limit I function described in the foregoing section, and the
tolerable area of both functions is the movement valid range.
The setting range is –99999.999 to +99999.999mm.
The stored stroke limit II function will be invalidated if the maximum and minimum parameter values
are set to the same data.
Prohibited area Point 1
Point 3
The values of points 3 and 4 are set
Machine coordinate system M with the coordinate values in the
Area
machine coordinate system.
Prohibited area
prohibited
Prohibited area
by stored Machine movement

stroke valid range The area determined by points 1
limit and 2 is the prohibited area set with
function II stored stroke limit I.
Point 4
Point 2
"–" setting "+" setting
Feed rate
L
All axes will decelerate and stop if an alarm occurs even for a single axis during automatic
operation. Only the axis for which the alarm occurs will decelerate and stop during manual
operation. The stop position must be before the prohibited area.
The value of distance "L" between the stop position and prohibited area differs according to the
feed rate and other factors.
The stored stroke limit II function can also be invalidated with the parameter settings.
- 251 -
15.3 Protection
15.3.2.2 Stored Stroke Limit IB

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
Three areas where tool entry is prohibited can be set using the stored stroke limit I, stored stroke
limit II, IIB and stored stroke limit IB functions.
Stored Stroke Limit IB
Stored Stroke Limit IIB
Stored Stroke Limit I
When an attempt is made to move the tool beyond the set range, an alarm is displayed, and the
tool decelerates and stops. If the tool has entered into the prohibited area and an alarm has
occurred, it is possible to move the tool only in the opposite direction to the direction in which the
tool has just moved.
This function is an option.
Precautions
• Bear in mind that the following will occur if the same data is set for the maximum and minimum
value of the tool entry prohibited area:
1. When zero has been set for the maximum and minimum values, tool entry will be
prohibited in the whole area.
2. If a value other than zero has been set for both the maximum and minimum values, it will
be possible for the tool to move in the whole area.
- 252 -
15.3 Protection
15.3.2.3 Stored Stroke Limit IIB

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
A parameter is used to switch between this function and stored stroke limit II. With stored stroke
limit IIB, the range inside the boundaries which have been set serves as the tool entry prohibited
area.
15.3.2.4 Stored Stroke Limit IC

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
The boundary is set for each axis with the parameters. The inside of the set boundary is the
additional movement range.
This cannot be used with soft limit IB.
Point 1 The values of points 3 and 4 are

set with the coordinate values in
the machine coordinate system.
Prohibited range
Prohibited range
The area determined by points

area
area
1 and 2 is the prohibited area

Machine movement valid range
Prohibited
Prohibited
set with stored stroke limit I.
Point 3
Point 2
Additional movement
range
Point 4
- 253 -
15.3 Protection
15.3.4 Chuck/Tail Stock Barrier Check

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system { { { { { { { {
By limiting the tool nose point move range, this function prevents the tool from colliding with the
chuck or tail stock because of a programming error.
When a move command exceeding the area set in a given parameter is programmed, the tool is
stopped at the barrier boundaries.
Program format
G22 ; ..... Barrier ON
G23 ; ..... Barrier OFF (cancel)
(1) When the machine is about to exceed the area, the machine is stopped and an alarm is
displayed. To cancel the alarm, execute reset.
(2) The function is also effective when the machine is locked.
(3) This function is valid when all axes for which a barrier has been set have completed reference
position return.
(4) The chuck barrier/tail stock barrier can be set independently for part system 1 and part system
2.
(5) Chuck barrier/tail stock barrier setting
X axis X axis
P4 P4
P1
P1 (P 0) P5 (P 0) P5
P2
P2
P6 P6
P3 P3
P0 P0 Z axis
Z axis
(Form 1) (Form 2)
The chuck barrier and tail stock barrier are both set with the machine coordinate by inputting one
set of three-point data in the parameter. Points P1, P2 and P3 are the chuck barrier, and points P4,
P5 and P6 are the tail stock barrier. The X axis is set with the coordinate value (radius value) from
the workpiece center, and the Z axis is set with the basic machine coordinate system coordinate.
Point P0 is the chuck barrier and tail stock barrier's basic X coordinates, and the workpiece center
coordinate in the basic machine coordinate system is set.
The barrier area is assumed to be symmetrical for the Z axis, and if the X axis coordinate of barrier
point P_ is minus, the sign is inverted to plus and the coordinate is converted for a check.
Set the absolute values of the X axis coordinates of the barrier points as shown below:
P1 >= P2 >= P3, P4 >= P5 >= P6
(However, this need not apply to the Z axis coordinates.)
- 254 -
15.3 Protection
15.3.5 Interlock
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The machine movement will decelerate and stop as soon as the interlock signal, serving as the
external input, is turned ON.
When the interlock signal is turned OFF, the machine starts moving again.
(1) In the manual mode, only that axis for which the interlock signal is input will stop.
(2) In the automatic mode, all axes will stop when the interlock signal is input to even one axis
which coincides with the moving axis.
(3) Block start interlock
While the block start interlock signal (*BSL) is OFF (valid), the execution of the next block
during automatic operation will not be started. The block whose execution has already
commenced is executed until its end. Automatic operation is not suspended. The commands in
the next block are placed on standby, and their execution is started as soon as the signal is
turned ON.
(Note 1) This signal is valid for all blocks including internal operation blocks such as fixed cycles.
(Note 2) This signal (*BSL) is set ON (invalid) when the power is turned ON. If it is not used, there
is no need to make a program with the PLC.
(4) Cutting start interlock
While the cutting start interlock signal (*CSL) is OFF (valid), the execution of all movement
command blocks except positioning during automatic operation will not be started. The block
whose execution has already commenced is executed until its end. Automatic operation is not
suspended. The commands in the next block are placed on standby, and their execution is
started as soon as the signal is turned ON.
(Note 1) The signal is valid for all blocks including internal operation block such as fixed cycles.
(Note 2) This signal (*CSL) is set ON (invalid) when the power is turned ON. If it is not used, there
is no need to make a program with the PLC.
15.3.6 External Deceleration

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function reduces the feed rate to the deceleration speed set by the parameter when the
external deceleration input signal, which is the external input from the user PLC, has been set to
ON. External deceleration input signals are provided for each axis and for each movement
direction ("+" and "-"), and a signal is valid when the signal in the direction coinciding with the
direction of the current movement has been input. When an axis is to be returned in the opposite
direction, its speed is returned immediately to the regular speed assigned by the command.
When non-interpolation positioning is performed during manual operation or automatic operation,
only the axis for which the signal that coincides with the direction of the current movement has been
input will decelerate.
However, with interpolation during automatic operation, the feed rate of the axis will be reduced to
the deceleration rate if there is even one axis for which the signal that coincides with the direction of
current movement has been input.
The external deceleration input signal can be canceled using a parameter for the cutting feed only.
- 255 -
15.3 Protection
15.3.8 Door Interlock
15.3.8.1 Door Interlock I

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Outline of function
Under the CE marking scheme of the European safety standards (machine directive), the
opening of any protection doors while a machine is actually moving is prohibited.
When the door open signal is input from the PLC, this function first decelerates and stops all
the control axes, establishes the ready OFF status, and then shuts off the drive power inside
the servo amplifiers so that the motors are no longer driven.
When the door open signal has been input during automatic operation, the suspended
machining can be resumed by first closing the door concerned and then initiating cycle start
again.
Description of operation
When a door is open
The NC system operates as follows when the door open signal is input:
(1) It stops operations.
1. When automatic operation was underway
The machine is set to the feed hold mode, and all the axes decelerate and stop.
The spindle also stops.
2. When manual operation was underway
All the axes decelerate and stop immediately.
(2) The complete standby status is established.
(3) After all the servo axes and the spindle have stopped, the ready OFF status is
established.
(4) The door open enable signal is output.
Release the door lock using this signals at the PLC.
When a door is closed

After the PLC has confirmed that the door has been closed and locked, the NC system
operates as follows when the door open signal is set to OFF.
(5) All the axes are set to ready ON.
(6) The door open enable signal is set to OFF.
Resuming operation
(7) When automatic operation was underway
Press the AUTO START button.
Operation now resumes from the block in which machining was suspended when the
door open signal was input.
(8) When manual operation was underway
Axis movement is commenced when the axis movement signals are input again.
(9) Spindle rotation
Restore the spindle rotation by inputting the forward rotation or reverse rotation signal
again: this can be done either by operations performed by the operator or by using the
user PLC.
- 256 -
15.3 Protection
15.3.8.2 Door Interlock II

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Outline of function
Under the CE marking scheme of the European safety standards (machine directive), the
opening of any protection doors while a machine is actually moving is prohibited.
When the door open signal is input from the PLC, this function first decelerates and stops all
the control axes, establishes the ready OFF status, and then shuts off the drive power inside
the servo amplifiers so that the motors are no longer driven.
With the door interlock function established by the door open II signal, automatic start can be
enabled even when the door open signal has been input. However, the axes will be set to the
interlock status.
Description of operation
When a door is open
The NC system operates as follows when the door open II signal is input:
(1) It stops operations.
All the axes decelerate and stop.
(2) The complete standby status is established.
(3) After all the servo axes and the spindle have stopped, the ready OFF status is
established. However, the servo ready finish signal (SA) is not set to OFF.
When a door is closed

After the PLC has confirmed that the door has been closed and locked, the NC system
operates as follows when the door open signal is set to OFF.
(4) All the axes are set to ready ON.
(5) The door open enable signal is set to OFF.
Resuming operation
(6) When automatic operation was underway
The door open signal is set to OFF, and after the ready ON status has been established
for all the axes, operation is resumed.
(7) When manual operation was underway
Axis movement is commenced when the axis movement signals are input again.
(8) Spindle rotation
Restore the spindle rotation by inputting the forward rotation or reverse rotation signal
again: this can be done either by operations performed by the operator or by using the
user PLC.
(Note) Concerning the handling of an analog spindle
The signals described in this section are valid in a system with bus connections for the NC
control unit and drive units. When an analog spindle is connected, the NC system cannot
verify that the spindle has come to a complete stop. This means that the door should be
opened after the PLC has verified that the spindle has come to a complete stop. Since the
spindle may resume its rotation immediately after the door has been closed, set the forward
and reverse rotation signals to OFF when opening the door so as to ensure safety.
- 257 -
15.3 Protection
Appendix 1. Differences from door interlock I

(1) The method used to stop the machine during automatic operation is the same as with the
axis interlock function.
(2) The servo ready finish signal (SE) is not set to OFF.
(3) Automatic start is valid during door interlock. However, the interlock takes effect for the
axis movements.
(4) When this door interlock function (door open signal ON) is initiated during axis movement,
the axes decelerate and stop.
(5) When this door interlock function (door open signal) is set to OFF, the axis movement
resumes.
15.3.9 Parameter Lock

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function is used to prohibit changing the setup parameter.
15.3.10 Program Protect (Edit Lock B, C)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The edit lock function B or C inhibits machining program B or C (group with numbers) from being
edited or erased when these programs require to be protected.
Machining program A
1～ 7999
Machining program B
(User-prepared standard subprogram)
8000～ 8999 Editing is inhibited Editing is inhibited
Machining program C by edit lock B. by data protect (KEY3).
Editing is inhibited
(Machine maker customized program)
by edit lock C.
9000～ 9999
Machining program A
10000 ～99999999
- 258 -
15.3 Protection
15.3.11 Program Display Lock

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function allows the display of only a target program (label address 9000) to be invalidated for
the program display in the monitor screen, etc.
The operation search of a target program can also be invalidated.
The validity of the display is selected with the parameters. The setting will be handled as follows
according to the value.
0: Display and search are possible.

1: Display of the program details is prohibited.
2: Display and operation search of the program details are prohibited.
The program details are not displayed in the prohibited state, but the program number and
sequence number will be displayed.
- 259 -
15.4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

15.4.1 History Diagnosis
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This is a maintenance function which is useful for tracing down the history and NC operation
information and analyzing trouble, etc. This information can be output as screen displays or as files.
(1) Screen display showing operation history and event occurrence times
The times/dates (year/month/day and hour/minute/second) and messages are displayed as the
operation history data. The key histories, alarm histories and input/output signal change histories
are displayed as the messages.
(2) Outputting the data in the operation history memory
Information on the alarms occurring during NC operation and stop codes, signal information on the
changes in the PLC interface input signals and the key histories can be output through the RS-
232C interface.
15.4.2 Setup / Monitor for Servo and Spindle

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { monitor { monitor { monitor { monitor { monitor { monitor { monitor { monitor
L system { monitor { monitor { monitor { monitor { monitor { monitor { monitor { monitor
The information on the servos (NC axes), spindles, PLC axes and power supplies appears on the
setting and display unit.
Main information displayed on the monitor:
Position loop tracking deviation, motor speeds, load current, detector feedback, absolute position
detection information, drive unit alarm histories, operation times, drive unit software versions, etc.
15.4.3 Data Sampling

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Sampling of the servo and spindle data for which an alarm occurrence is a stop condition is
performed all the time. By using the waveform display function, this sampling data can be
displayed in the waveforms.
The data currently displayed can be stored on a memory card, and read out when required.
- 260 -
15.4.4 Waveform Display

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { – – { { { {
L system { { – – { { { {
The following servo data and spindle data can be displayed as waveforms. Data can be displayed
for two channels simultaneously in 1-hour increments on a continuous basis or on a one-shot basis.
Servo data Spindle data

Current feedback Motor load
Current command Motor rotation speed (speed command value)
Position deviation Position deviation
Position command Position command
Speed feedback Speed feedback (r/min)
Synchronous tap error width (µm)
Synchronous tap error angle (0.001 degree)
15.4.5 Machine Operation History Monitor

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Up to 256 past key inputs on the operation board and changes in the input signals are recorded.
The history contents can be viewed on the history screen, and the data is retained even after the
power has been turned OFF.
- 261 -
15.4.6 NC Data Backup

This function serves to back up the parameters and other data of the NC control unit.
The data can also be restored.
(1) RS-232C
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
[Backup target]
Machining programs, parameters, workpiece offset data, common variables, tool compensation
data, tool life control data
Ladders (ladder, message)
SRAM data
(2) Ethernet
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
[Backup target]
Machining programs, parameters, common variables, tool compensation data, tool life control
data
SRAM data
(3) Cassette memory
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – { { { {
L system – – – – { { { {
The memory cassette for maintenance is used to back up and restore the NC data.
Model Compatible memory cassette for maintenance

M64AS HR410/HR450
M64S HR411/HR451
M65S/M66S HR415/HR455
[Backup targets ... The following data is backed up in a batch.]
SRAM data
(4) IC card
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
[Backup target]
Machining programs, parameters, common variables, tool compensation data, tool life control
data
SRAM data
- 262 -
15.4.7 PLC I/F Diagnosis

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When the I/F DIAGN menu key is pressed, the PLC interface diagnosis screen appears.
The input and output signals for PLC control can be displayed and set on this screen.
This function can be used to check the machine sequence operations for PLC development, check
the input/output data between the control unit and PLC when trouble occurs in operation, initiate
forced definitions, and so on.
- 263 -
15.4.8 MELDASNET
15.4.8.1 Machine Builder Network System

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
With the machine builder network system, using the software for personal computer "MELDAS
remote diagnosis tool kit" which Mitsubishi Electric Corporation sells separately to machine builders,
NC is connected with the personal computer of the machine builder by the communication circuit,
and the diagnosis data file required for the service is transmitted and received.
15.4.8.2 Anshin-net
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
By means of a network that connects the CNC systems of end users all over Japan with the
Mitsubishi Electric Machine Tool Engineering (RKE) Call Center, detailed information services and
speedier maintenance support can be provided.
A separate agreement must be signed with RKE in order to receive this service.
(Note) This service is applied only in Japan.
Service menu
(1) Peace-of-mind menu
Automatic notification of Standard The Call Center is aware of the circumstances
alarms under which alarms have occurred during
automatic operation. Speedy support can be
provided even during unmanned operation.
Single-action call Standard Simply by pressing the single-action button, the
machine status information can be transmitted so
that technical support can be received from expert
engineers.
Periodical monitoring Standard Malfunctioning is prevented by monitoring and
analyzing the warning messages on a periodical
basis.
Backup Standard Speedy action is taken to deal with even the loss of
data in the memory by backing up the parameter
data on a periodical basis.
(2) Handy menu
Operator notification Standard The operator is automatically notified of the
completion of machining, error occurrence such as
operation stop, or other trouble by voice messages
to the operator's cell phone, etc.
Periodical monitoring Standard Transmission of written reports complied by
report totalizing the monitored data comes in handy for
managing and formulating production plans.
Remote monitoring Optional The operating conditions of the machine can be
ascertained at any time by simply accessing the
Call Center from the user's telephone.
Machining data sharing Optional The Call Center's servers are released to users
who can then utilize them as media for storing
programs.
- 264 -
16 Cabinet and Installation
16.1 Cabinet Construction

The configuration of the unit used by the MELDAS 60/60S series is shown below.
Refer to the Connection / Maintenance Manual for details.
Max 2 units
最大2ユニット
コミュニケーションターミナル
Communication terminal
Operation
操作パネルなど
panel etc.
最大入力：128点
Maximum inputs: 128 points
(オンボード開発)
(On-board development) (X100～X13F、R80～R81)
(X100 to X13F, R80 and R81)
最大出力：96点
Maximum outputs: 96 points
Remote
リモートI/OI/O unit
ユニット (Y100～Y11F、R180～R181)
DX1 (Y100 to Y11F, R180 and R181)
DX 1 □□
QY231
QY231
ROM inside
本体内蔵ROM
main unit
制御ユニット
Control unit (ベースI/Oユニットと
(Total number of base I/O units and remote
パーソナルリモートI/Oユニットの
I/O units sufficient for up to 8 stations)
コンピュータ
Personal computer 合計が最大8局分)
最大6ユニット
Max. 6 units
yyyyyy
・・・・・・
(Personal
(パソコン開発)computer
development)
ベースI/O
Base I/O unit Remote I/O unit 最大入力：256点
リモートI/Oユニット　(X000～X0FF)
ユニット
DX35/45 DX1
DX 1□□ (X000 to X0FF)
DX3 5□/45 □ 最大出力：256点
　(Y000～Y0FF)
センサー
Sensor (Y000 to Y0FF)
Manual pulse generator

手動パルス発生器 Machine control
機械制御信号
signals
Max. 8 channels
最大８チャンネル
(X178～X17F)
(X178 – X17F)
Max. 6 units
最大6ユニット
yyyyyy
・・・・・・
リモートI/Oユニット
Remote I/O unit 最大入力：256点
DX 1□□
DX1 　(I000～I0FF)
(I000 to I0FF)
　(J000～J0FF)
(J000 to J0FF)
- 265 -
List of configuration units

(1) Control unit
FCU6-MU011 M64 control unit set Main control card (HR113) Export Trade Control Ordinance and
FCA64A-B, FCA64-B 24V input power supply card (HR083) Foreign Trade Ordinance
system compatible unit Communication card (HR531) noncompliant unit
Case set
FCU6-MU021 M65 control unit set Main control card (HR114) Export Trade Control Ordinance and
FCA65-A, FCA65-P1 system 24V input power supply card (HR083) Foreign Trade Ordinance
compatible unit Communication card (HR171) noncompliant unit
Case set
FCU6-MU032 M64AS/64S/65S control unit Main control card (HR116) Export Trade Control Ordinance and
set 24V input power supply card (HR083) Foreign Trade Ordinance
FCA64AS/64S/65S system Communication card (HR171) noncompliant unit
compatible unit Case set M64AS is used as a set with
FCU6-HR410
M64S is used as a set with
FCU6-HR411
M65S is used as a set with
FCU6-HR415
FCU6-MA031 M66/M66S control unit set Main control card (HR146) Export Trade Control Ordinance and
FCA66-A/FCA66S system 24V input power supply card (HR083) Foreign Trade Ordinance
compatible unit Communication card (HR171) compliant unit
Case set M66S is used as a set with
FCU6-HR415
(2) Control unit options

HR513 External PLC link II (bus Control card (HR513) Dedicated for MELDAS60/60S
connection, interface) series
Mounted into control unit's Type connected to MELSEC
extension slot A1S, A N, A A, A U Series
HR571 External PLC link I (M-NET Control card (HR571) Dedicated for MELDAS60 series
interface) Type connected to MELSEC
Mounted into control unit's AJ71C22 unit (serial link)
extension slot
FCU6-EP203-1 (1) High-speed program Control card for IC card (HR831) (1) Dedicated for MELDAS64S/
server Communication card for Ethernet 65/65S/66/66S (M system)
(2) Data input/output (HR832) (2) Dedicated for MELDAS60S
Ethernet communication Connection cable series
ATA memory card interface +
IC card Ethernet interface
HR576 CC-Link card Control card (HR576) Dedicated for MELDAS60S series
(3) Communication terminal

FCU6-DUT32 10.4-type monochrome LCD 10.4-type LCD, Escutcheon Used as a set with FCUA-KB20.
FCU6-DUN33 10.4-type color LCD display 10.4-type LCD, Escutcheon Used as a set with FCUA-KB20.
unit (separated type) Control card (RX215) Control card 24VDC input
FCUA-LD100 7.2-type monochrome LCD 7.2-type LCD, Escutcheon Control card 24VDC input
liquid crystal (integrated Control card (RX213)
type) Key switches
FCUA-LD10 7.2-type monochrome LCD 7.2-type LCD, Escutcheon Used as a set with FCUA-KB20.
(integrated type, machining Key switches
(integrated type, lathe Key switches
system sheet)
- 266 -

FCUA-CR10 9-type monochrome CRT 9-type monochrome CRT, Escutcheon Used as a set with
communication terminal FCUA-KB10/KB12.
(separated type) Control card 24VDC input
CRT section 100VAC input
(separated type, machining Control card
(separated type, lathe Control card
system sheet)
(separated type, machining DUN33 or FCUA-LD10
(separated type, machining DUN33
center system sheet) KB20 with changed outline
dimensions
(separated type, lathe DUN33 or FCUA-LD10
system sheet)
(separated type, lathe DUN33
system sheet) KB30 with changed outline
dimensions
(4) Base I/O unit

FCU6-DX350 Sink input + sink output I/O card (HR325) DI/DO input/output sink input 48 points + sink
base I/O unit Aluminum panel for panel output 48 points
installation Synchronous feed encoder interface 1ch, Skip
Additional I/O card (HR211) input 8 points
Remote I/O unit interface 2ch
Servo drive unit interface 2 part systems
RS-232C device 1ch, manual pulse generator
3ch
FCU6-DX351 Source input + source I/O card (HR335) DI/DO input/output source input 48 points +
output Aluminum panel for panel source output 48 points
base I/O unit installation Synchronous feed encoder interface 1ch, Skip
3ch
FCU6-DX450 Sink input + sink output I/O card (HR327) DI/DO input/output sink input 64 points + sink
base I/O unit Aluminum panel for panel output 64 points
installation Synchronous feed encoder interface 1ch, Skip
3ch
FCU6-DX451 Source input + source I/O card (HR337) DI/DO input/output source input 64 points +
output Aluminum panel for panel source output 64 points
base I/O unit installation Synchronous feed encoder interface 1ch, Skip
3ch
FCU6-HR377 Source input + 200mA I/O card (HR377) DI/DO input/output source input 64 points +
source output Reinforcing fitting source output 64 points
base I/O unit Synchronous feed encoder interface 1ch, Skip
input 8 points
3ch
FCU6-HR378 Source input + 200mA I/O card (HR378) DI/DO input/output source input 64 points +
source output Reinforcing fitting source output 64 points
base I/O unit Synchronous feed encoder interface 1ch, Skip
Common separated, with input 8 points
output protection fuse Remote I/O unit interface 2ch
3ch
- 267 -
(5) Remote I/O unit

Type Function Configuration Details
element
FCUA-DX100 Sink/source input + sink output RX311 DI/DO = 32 points/32 points
FCUA-DX110 Sink/source input + sink output RX311 + RX321-1 DI/DO = 64 points/48 points
FCUA-DX120 Sink/source input + sink output RX311 + RX321 DI/DO = 64 points/48 points
+ analog output + analog output 1 point
+ analog input/output + analog input 4 points + analog output 1 point
FCUA-DX101 Sink/source input + source RX312 DI/DO = 32 points/32 points
output
FCUA-DX111 Sink/source input + source RX312 + RX322-1 DI/DO = 64 points/48 points
output
FCUA-DX121 Sink/source input + source RX312 + RX322 DI/DO = 64 points/48 points
output + analog output + analog output 1 point
output + analog input/output + analog input 4 points + analog output 1 point
(6) Scan I/O card

element
HR357 Scan I/O (source) HR357 Scan DI/DO = 64 points/64 points
DI/DO = 32 points /32 points
HR347 Scan I/O (sink) HR347 Scan DI/DO = 64 points /64 points
DI/DO = 32 points /32 points
(7) Extended I/O card

element
QY231 Sink/source input + source QY231 Sink/source input 64 points + source output 48
output points
- 268 -
16.2 Power Supply, Environment and Installation Conditions

! Caution
! Follow the power supply specifications (input voltage range, frequency range,
momentary power failure time range) described in this manual.
! Follow the environment conditions (ambient temperature, humidity, vibration,
ambient atmosphere) described in this manual.
(1) Environment conditions in control part

Unit name Control unit
Type FCU6-MU011/MU021/MU032/MA031
Ambient During operation 0 to 55°C
specifications General specifications
temperature During storage –20 to 60°C

Long term, to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Ambient During operation
Short term, to 95% RH (with no dew condensation) (Note 1)
humidity
During storage to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Vibration resistance 4.9m/s2 or less (during operation)
Shock resistance 29.4m/s2 or less (during operation)
Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust or oil mist
Power voltage 24VDC±5% Ripple ±5% (P-P)
Power
Instantaneous stop tolerance time Depends on the specifications of the 24VDC power supply used.
Current consumption 1.5A

Heating value 20W (Standard specification)
Mass 1.1kg
Unit size Refer to Appendix.
(Note 1) The period is within one month.
(2) Environment conditions in electric cabinet

Unit name Base I/O unit
Type FCU6-DX350/351/450/451 FCU6-HR377/378
General specifications
temperature During storage –20 to 60°C

Long term, to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Ambient During operation
humidity
Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust or oil mist
24VDC±5%
specifications
Power voltage
Ripple ±5% (P-P) 5VDC±5%
Power
24V 13A (Note 3)

24V 1.2A (Note 2)
Current consumption 5V 1.0A (when using as
24V max. 5.0A (Note 3)
second unit)
Heating value Max. 30W (Note 3) Max. 50W (Note 3)
Mass 2kg
Unit size Refer to Appendix. 195mm (W) × 280mm (H)
(Note 2) Amount consumed by control circuit
(Note 3) Differs according to the number of machine input operation points and the load and number of points
connected to the machine output. The maximum value applies when all points are ON.
- 269 -
(3) Communication terminal

Unit name Communication terminal
FCUA-CT FCUA- FCUA- FCUA-KB20/30 FCUA- FCU6-DUT32
Type 100/120 CR10 KB10/KB12 FCU6-KB021/031 LD10/ 100 FCU6-DUN33
Ambient During operation 0 to 55°C 0 to 50°C
tempe- During storage
rature –20 to 65°C –20 to 60°C

During operation Long term, to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Ambient
humidity
Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust
Power noise 1kV (P-P)
Single-phase
100 VAC to 115 VAC
Power specifications
–15% +10%
50/60Hz ±5% 24VDC±5%
Power voltage Ripple ±5% (P-P) Ripple ±5% (P-P)
24VDC
—
±5%
Instantaneous stop
20ms or less
tolerance time
100V, 0.4A
Current consumption 100V, 0.4A 24V, 0.6A — 24V, 0.9A 24V, 0.9A
24V, 0.6A
Heating value 55W 40W 15W — 20W 20W
Mass 4.8kg 4.2kg 0.7kg 0.4kg 1.2kg 1.8kg
(4) Remote I/O unit
Unit name Remote I/O unit
Type FCUA-DX10 FCUA-DX11 FCUA-DX12 FCUA-DX14
tempe- During storage
rature –20 to 65°C

During operation Long term, to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Ambient
humidity
Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust
Power noise 1kV (P-P)
24VDC±5% Ripple ±5% (P-P)
specifications
Power voltage
Power
Instantaneous stop
—
tolerance time
Current consumption 24V 0.7A (Note 2) 24V 1.5A (Note 2) 24V 0.7A (Note 2)
Heating value Max. 25W (Note 3) Max. 30W (Note 3) Max. 30W (Note 3)
Mass 470g 570g 590g 550g
(Note 2) Amount consumed by control circuit
(Note 3) Differs according to the number of machine input operation points and the load and number of points
connected to the machine output. The maximum value applies when all points are ON.
- 270 -
(5) Servo / Spindle
Refer to the following manuals for details on the servo and spindle system.
MDS-C1 Series Specification Manual (BNP-C3040)

MDS-CH Series Specification Manual (BNP-C3044)
MDS-B-SVJ2 Series Specifications and Instruction Manual (BNP-B3937)
MDS-B Series
Linear Servo System Specifications and Instruction Manual (BNP-B3977)
MDS-B-SPJ2 Series Specification Manual (BNP-B2164)
MDS-J2-CT Series Specifications and Instruction Manual (BNP-B3944)
- 271 -
17 Servo/Spindle System
17.1 Feed Axis
Refer to the following manuals for details on the servo and spindle system.
MDS-C1 Series Specification Manual (BNP-C3040)
MDS-CH Series Specification Manual (BNP-C3044)
MDS-B-SVJ2 Series Specifications and Instruction Manual (BNP-B3937)
MDS-B Series
Linear Servo System Specifications and Instruction Manual (BNP-B3977)
MDS-B-SPJ2 Series Specification Manual (BNP-B2164)
MDS-J2-CT Series Specifications and Instruction Manual (BNP-B3944)
17.1 Feed Axis

17.1.1 MDS-C1-V1/C1-V2 (200V)
(1) Servo motor: HC□□-A51/E51 (1000kp/rev)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
17.1.2 MDS-B-V14L (200V)
(1) Linear servo motor: LM-NP

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
17.1.3 MDS-CH-V1/CH-V2 (400V)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system □ □ □ □ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system □ □ □ □ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
(3) Linear servo motor: LM-NP
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
- 272 -
17.1 Feed Axis
17.1.4 MDS-B-SVJ2 (Compact and Small Capacity)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
(2) Servo motor: HC□□-A47 (100kp/rev)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
- 273 -
17.2 Spindle
17.2 Spindle
17.2.1 MDS-C1-SP/C1-SPM/B-SP (200V)
(1) Spindle motor: SJ/SJ-V

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
(2) IPM Spindle motor: SJ-PMF

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
17.2.2 MDS-CH-SP/CH-SPH (400V)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
17.2.3 MDS-B-SPJ2 (Compact and Small Capacity)
(1) Spindle motor: SJ-P/SJ-PF

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
17.3 Auxiliary Axis

17.3.1 Index/Positioning Servo: MR-J2-CT
(1) Servomotor: HC-SF/HC-RF (16kp/rev)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
(2) Servomotor: HA-FF/HC-MF (8kp/rev)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
- 274 -
17.4 Power Supply
17.4 Power Supply

17.4.1 Power Supply: MDS-C1-CV/B-CVE
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
17.4.2 AC Reactor for Power Supply

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
17.4.3 Ground Plate

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
17.4.4 Power Supply: MDS-A-CR (Resistance Regeneration)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
L system □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
- 275 -
18 Machine Support Functions
18.1 PLC

18.1 PLC
18.1.1 PLC Basic Function
18.1.1.1 Built-in PLC Basic Function

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
(1) Ladder commands
Basic commands (bit processing commands)
20 commands including LD, LDI, OR, ORI, AND, ANI, OUT, PLS, etc.
Function commands
76 commands including data transfer, 4 basic arithmetic operations, logic arithmetic
operations, large/small identification, binary/BCD conversion, branching, conditional
branching, decoding, encoding, etc.
Exclusive commands
ATC control commands, and 14 others
Tool life management
(2) Devices
The table below lists the devices which can be used by the PLC. (PLC4B)
Device Device range Unit Details Remarks
Input signal to PLC
X X0 to X4BF (1216 points) 1 bit
Machine input, etc.
Output signal from PLC
Y Y0 to Y53F (1344 points) 1 bit
Machine output, etc.
Input signal to PLC
U U0 to U17F (384 points) 1 bit
Signal used in the second part system
Output signal from PLC
W W0 to W1FF (512 points) 1 bit
Signal used in the second part system
I I0 to I3FF (1024 points) 1 bit Input signal to PLC
J J0 to J63F (1600 points) 1 bit Output signal from PLC
S0 to S1F (32 points) 1 bit Input signal to PLC
S40 to S5F (32 points) 1 bit
S S80 to S9F (32 points) 1 bit
SC0 to SDF (32 points) 1 bit
S20 to S3F (32 points) 1 bit Output signal from PLC
S
SA0 to SBF (32 points) 1 bit
SE0 to SFF (32 points) 1 bit
M M0 to M5119 (5120 points) 1 bit Temporary memory
G G0 to G3071 (3072 points) 1 bit Temporary memory
Temporary memory,
F F0 to F127 (128 points) 1 bit
Alarm message interface
L L0 to L255 (256 points) 1 bit Latch relay (backup memory)
E E0 to E127 (128 points) 1 bit Special relay
- 276 -
18.1 PLC
Device Device range Unit Details Remarks

T0 to T15 (16 points) 1 bit/16 bits 10 ms unit timer
T T16 to T95 (80 points) 1 bit/16 bits 100 ms unit timer
T96 to T103 (8 points) 1 bit/16 bits 100 ms integral timer
Q0 to Q39 (40 points) 1 bit/16 bits 10 ms unit timer (fixed timer)
Q Q40 to Q135 (96 points) 1 bit/16 bits 100 ms unit timer (fixed timer)
Q136 to Q151 (16 points) 1 bit/16 bits 100 ms integral timer (fixed timer)
C C0 to C23 (24 points) 1 bit/16 bits Counter
B B0 to B103 (104 points) 1 bit/16 bits Counter (fixed counter)
16 bits/ Data register
D D0 to D1023 (1024 points)
32 bits Register for arithmetic operations
File register
16 bits/ For interface between PLC and control
R R0 to R8191 (8192 points)
32 bits unit.
10ms timer expansion (400 points)
16 bits/
A A0, A1 (2 points) Accumulator
32 bits
Z –––– (1 point) 16 bits For D or R address indexing (for ±n)
V –––– (1 point) 16 bits For D or R address indexing (for ±n)
N N0 to N7 (8 points) ––– Master controller nesting level
Label for conditional jump and
P P0 to P255 (256 points) –––
subroutine call commands
K-32768 to K32767 ––– Decimal constant for 16-bit command
K K-2147483648
––– Decimal constant for 32-bit command
to K2147483647
Hexadecimal constant for 16-bit
H0 to HFFFF –––
command
H
Hexadecimal constant for 32-bit
H0 to HFFFFFFFF –––
command
- 277 -
18.1 PLC
Device No. when using PLC4B Device No. when using GX Developer
X0 to X4BF X0 to X4BF
U0 to U17F X4C0 to X63F
I0 to I3FF X640 to XA3F
S0 to S1F XA40 to XAFF
S40 to S5F
S80 to S9F
SC0 to SDF
S100 to S13F
Y0 to Y53F Y0 to Y53F
W0 to W1FF Y540 to Y73F
J0 to J63F Y740 to YD7F
S20 to S3F YD80 to YDFF
S60 to S7F
SA0 to SBF
SE0 to SFF
M0 to M5119 M0 to M5119
G0 to G3071 M5120 to M8191
F0 to F127 F0 to F127
L0 to L255 L0 to L255
E0 to E127 SM0 to SM127
T0 to T15 T0 to T15
Q0 to Q39 T16 to T55
T16 to T95 T56 to T135
Q40 to Q135 T136 to T231
T96 to T103 T232 to T239
Q136 to Q151 T240 to T255
C0 to C23 C0 to C23
B0 to B103 C24 to C127
D0 to D1023 D0 to D1023
R0 to R8191 R0 to R8191
A0, A1
Z Z0
V Z1
N0 to N7 N0 to N7
P0 to P255 P0 to P255
K-32768 to K32767 K-32768 to K32767
K-2147483648 to K2147483647 K-2147483648 to K2147483647
H0 to HFFFF H0 to HFFFF
H0 to HFFFFFFFF H0 to HFFFFFFFF
- 278 -
18.1 PLC
(3) External alarm messages

The contents of the alarms which have occurred during sequence (user PLC) processing can be
displayed on the setting and display unit.
Up to four alarm message displays can be displayed simultaneously on the alarm diagnosis
screen. The maximum length of one message is 32 characters.
(4) External operator messages
When a condition has arisen in which a message is to be relayed to the operator, an operator
message can be displayed separately from the alarm message.
The maximum length of an operator message on the alarm diagnosis screen is 60 characters.
The number of messages displayed at the same time is one.
(5) PLC switches
32 points of PLC switches can be set on the setting and display unit screen, and the ON/OFF
control executed. The switches can be used as part of the machine operation switches. The
switch applications can be freely determined with the sequence program, and each switch name
can be created with the PLC and displayed on the setting and display unit.
(6) Load meter display
A load meter can be displayed on the setting and display unit.
Up to two axes designated with the built-in PLC such as the spindle load and Z axis load can be
displayed as bar graphs on the screen.
(7) Timer / counter setting display
(a) PLC timer
The setting value of the timer used by the built-in PLC can be set from the screen on the
The timer types include the 10ms, 100ms and 100ms integral types.
Whether to validate the timer in the PLC program or to validate the setting value from the
screen can be selected with the parameters.
Whether to hold the integral timer when the power is turned OFF can also be selected.
(b) PLC counter
The setting value of the counter used by the built-in PLC can be set from this screen.
Whether to validate the constants in the PLC program or to validate the setting value from
the screen can be selected with the parameters.
Whether to hold the counter value when the power is turned OFF can also be selected.
(8) PLC parameter setting display
The PLC constants set with the data type and the bit selection parameters set with bit types can
be set from the screen as parameters used by the built-in PLC.
(a) PLC constants
There are PLC constants that can be set with data types as parameters used by the built-in
PLC. The set data is set in the R register of the PLC and backed up. If data is set in the R
register corresponding to the PLC constant with sequence program MOV commands, etc.,
the data will be backed up. However, the display will not change, so enter another screen,
and then select this screen again.
Up to 48 items can be set, and the setting range is ±8 digits.
(b) Bit selection parameters
There are bit selection parameters set with bit types as parameters used by the built-in PLC.
The set data is set in the R register of the PLC and backed up.
When using bit operation in the sequence program, the details of the R register are
transferred to the temporary memory (M) with the MOV command. If the data is set in the R
register corresponding to the bit selection with the MOV command, etc., the data will be
backed up. However, the display will not change, so enter another screen and then select
this screen again.
- 279 -
18.1 PLC
(9) External key input

By inputting the key data from the built-in PLC, the same operation as when the operator operates
the operation board can be done.
(10) Real spindle speed output
The real spindle speed is converted by the signals of the encoder installed on the spindle and is
output to the PLC. The output increment is 0.001r/min.
(11) Workpiece counter display
The number of workpieces can be set and displayed when continuously machining workpieces.
The M code to be count, the current number of machined workpieces and the max. machining
value is set with parameters.
This data can be read by the user PLC (when built-in PLC specifications are used), and the
number of machined workpieces can be controlled. A signal will be output to the PLC when the
counted number reaches the set max. value.
(12) High speed input/output signal
There are signals that can be input and output at a 7.1ms cycle for high-speed processing.
(a) Input signal ON time
tson tson ≥ 8ms
(b) After the signal output is set in the interface, it can be output to the machine side with a
max. 7.1ms delay. The input also appears on the interface with a 7.1ms delay.
(c) The signals used for high-speed processing are assigned with the parameters. Assignment
is possible in a continuous 16-point unit.
(13) PLC analog voltage control
(a) Analog output
When the specified data is put in the file register, the corresponding analog voltage is output
from the analog output external connector.
<Relationship between file register contents and analog output voltage>
Analog output (V)

10V
–4095
0
Contents of file register
4095
–10V
Output voltage 0 to ±10V (±5%)

Resolution Full scale (10V)/4095
Load condition 10 kΩ resistance load (standard)
Output impedance 220 Ω
(Note) The remote I/O unit DX120/DX121 is required for analog output.
- 280 -
18.1 PLC
18.1.2 Built-in PLC Processing Mode

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
An exclusive sequence program that controls the various signals between the controller and
machine to realize operation applicable to each machine must be created.
The sequence execution modes include high-speed processing and main processing.
(1) High-speed processing

This mode provides repeated execution at 7.1ms cycles. It is used to process signals
requiring high speeds.
The max. number of program steps for high-speed processing (1 period) is 150 steps when
using basic commands.
(2) Main processing
This mode provides normal sequence processing. The processing cycle depends on the
number of sequence steps.
18.1.2.1 PLC4B I/F

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function enables PLC development using the conventional PLC development tool (PLC4B) for
MELDAS systems
18.1.2.2 MELSEC Development Tool I/F
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { – – { { { {
L system { { – – { { { {
This function enables the data of the PLC contained inside the NC system to be developed and
debugged using the GX Developer installed in a personal computer (OS:Windows).
Many and varied functions of the GX Developer make it possible to reduce the PLC data
development and debugging time.
- 281 -
18.1 PLC
18.1.3 Built-in PLC Capacity (Number of Steps)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system 16000 32000 32000 32000 32000 32000 32000 32000
L system 16000 32000 32000 32000 32000 32000 32000 32000
18.1.4 Machine Contact Input/Output I/F

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
! Caution
! Follow the remote type machine contact input/output interface described in this manual.
(Connect a diode in parallel with the inductive load or connect a protective resistor in serial
with the capacitive load, etc.)
Refer to the MELDAS 60/60S Series Connection/Maintenance Manual for details.
(1) Types of remote I/O units

The remote I/O units (FCUA-DX) are shown in the remote I/O unit list according to the
types of signals that can be input/output and the number of contacts. There are 8 types, and
are serially linked (MC link B) to the control unit or communication terminal when used.
Multiple remote I/O units can be combined for use if the total of possessed channel during the
serial link connection is less than eight.
- 282 -
18.1 PLC
Max 2 units
最大2ユニット
コミュニケーションターミナル
Communication terminal
Operation
操作パネルなど
panel etc.
最大入力：128点
(On-board development)
(オンボード開発) (X100～X13F、R80～R81)
(X100 to X13F, R80 to R83)
Remote
リモートI/OI/O unit
ユニット (Y100～Y11F、R180～R181)
DX1 (Y100 to Y11F, R180 to R183)
DX 1 □□
QY231
QY231
ROM inside
本体内蔵ROM
main unit
制御ユニット
Control unit
(ベースI/Oユニットと
(Total number of base I/O units and remote
パーソナルリモートI/Oユニットの
I/O units sufficient for up to 8 stations)
コンピュータ合計が最大8局分)
Personal computer
Max. 6 units
最大6ユニット
yyyyyy
・・・・・・
(Personal
(パソコン開発) computer
development)
ベースI/O 最大入力：256点
Base I/O unit リモートI/Oユニッ
Remote I/O unit 　(X000～X0FF)
ユニット
DX35/45 ト
DX1 (X000 to X0FF)
DX3 5□/45 □ 最大出力：256点
DX 1□□ Maximum outputs: 256 points
　(Y000～Y0FF)
センサー
Sensor (Y000 to Y0FF)
Manual pulse generator

手動パルス発生器 Machine control
機械制御信号
signals
Max. 8 channels
最大８チャンネル
(X178～X17F)
(X178 – X17F)
Max. 6 units
最大6ユニット
yyyyyy
・・・・・・
リモートI/Oユニッ
Remote I/O unit 最大入力：256点
ト
DX1 　(I000～I0FF)
DX 1□□ (I000 to I0FF)
　(J000～J0FF)
(J000 to J0FF)
- 283 -
18.1 PLC
Remote I/O unit list

element
FCUA-DX100 Sink/source input + sink output RX311 DI/DO = 32 points/32 points
FCUA-DX110 Sink/source input + sink output RX311 + RX321-1 DI/DO = 64 points/48 points
+ analog output + analog output 1 point
+ analog input/output + analog input 4 points + analog output 1 point
FCUA-DX101 Sink/source input + source RX312 DI/DO = 32 points/32 points
output
FCUA-DX111 Sink/source input + source RX312 + RX322-1 DI/DO = 64 points/48 points
output
output + analog output + analog output 1 point
output + analog input/output + analog input 4 points + analog output 1 point
Operation board remote I/O unit
RIO
R Iunit
Oユニット
DX
DX□□□
Communication
ｺﾐｭﾆｹｰｼｮﾝterminal
ﾀｰﾐﾅﾙ
CT1/LD1
CT1□□/LD1□□
機械操作ボード
Machine operation board
Switches, LEDs, lamps, etc.
スイッチ、LED,ランプ等
The remote I/O unit (hereafter RIO unit) connected to the main unit can also be connected to the
remote terminal.
As when it is connected to the main unit, the numbers are allocated to the devices using the rotary
switches.
The switches are set separately and the settings are not related to the RIO unit which is used by
the main unit.
Rotary switch Device numbers which Device numbers Analog output

number are loaded which are output (AO)
0 X100 to X11F Y100 to Y11F (Y10F)
1 X120 to X13F Y120 to Y13F (Y12F)
None
2 R80, R81 R180, R181
3 R82, R83 R182, R183
The figures in parentheses denote the range of the devices when they have been installed on the
right side of the unit.
Note: Since analog outputs cannot be used, DX120/DX121 cannot be used.
- 284 -
18.1 PLC
(2) Outline of digital signal input circuit

There is a sink type and source type digital signal input circuit. The type is selected with a card
unit in each unit.
Input circuit
DI – L / DI – R
(Machine side) DI – L / DI – R
(Machine side)
2.2k 2.2k
DC24V(+) Control
0V Control
circuit circuit
DC24V(+)
0V COM COM
Source type Sink type
(3) Outline of digital signal output circuit

There is a sink type (DX10) and source type (DX11) digital signal output circuit. Use within
the range of the specifications given below.
Output circuit
DO – L / DO – R DO – L / DO – R
(Machine side)
(Machine side)
DC24V(+) DC24V(+)
RA
Control
RA
Control circuit
circuit R
PL
R
PL
Source type (DX1 1) Sink type (DX1 0)
Output conditions
Insulation method Non-insulated

Rated load voltage DC+24V
Max. output current 60 mA
Output delay time 40 µs
<Caution>
* When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode
(withstand voltage 100V or more, 100mA or more) in parallel with the load.
The diode should be inserted as close to the load (within 20cm) as possible.
* When using a capacitive load such as a lamp, connect a protective resistor
(R=150 Ω) in serial with the load to limit the rush current. (Make sure that the
current is lower than the above tolerable current, including momentary current.)
- 285 -
18.1 PLC
(4) Outline of analog signal output circuit

The analog signal output circuit can be used only with the FCUA-DX120/DX121.
Output circuit Output conditions
R Output voltage -10~ +10V (±5%)

R
220Ω Resolution 212 (1/4095)
A0 DAC Load conditions 10 kΩ load resistance
A0’ Output 220 Ω
impedance
(5) Input signal conditions

The input signals must be used within the ranges of the following conditions.
Source type <Contact common + 24V>
Input voltage at external contact ON 18 V to 25.2V
Input current at external contact ON 9 mA or more
Input voltage at external contact OFF 4 V or less
Input current at external contact OFF 2 mA or less
Tolerable chattering time 3 ms or less (Refer to T1 below)
Input signal hold time 40 ms or more (Refer to T2 below)
Input circuit operation delay time 3 ms ≤ T3 T4 ≤ 20 ms
Machine side contact capacity 30 V or more, 16 mA or more
Sink type <Contact common grounding (RG)>
Input voltage at external contact ON 6 V or less
Input current at external contact ON 9 mA or more
Input voltage at external contact OFF 20 V to 25.2V
Input current at external contact OFF 2 mA or less
Tolerable chattering time 3 ms or less (Refer to T1 below)
Input signal hold time 40 ms or more (Refer to T2 below)
Input circuit operation delay time 3 ms ≤ T3 T4 ≤ 20 ms
Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16 mA or more
T2 T2
T1 T1 T1 T1
T3 T4 T3 T4
Constantly closed contact Constantly open contact
- 286 -
18.1 PLC
18.1.5 Ladder Monitor

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function enables the operating status of the sequence circuit to be checked on the controller’s
The monitor functions include the following.
(1) Circuit monitoring

(2) Screen stop by monitor stop trigger point
(3) Entry monitoring
(4) Decimal-hexadecimal conversion present value monitoring
18.1.6 PLC Development
18.1.6.1 On-board Development

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
PLC ladders can be developed on the control unit.

PLC ladder circuits can be created, edited, etc.
18.1.6.2 MELSEC Development Tool

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The GX-Developer installed in a personal computer (OS:Windows) can be used.
18.1.6.3 PLC4B
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This is the conventional PLC development tool for MELDAS.
18.1.7 C Language Function

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
PLC subprograms prepared in C language can be called from PLC ladders.
- 287 -
18.1 PLC
18.1.8 PLC Protect

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ – – – – – –
L system ∆ ∆ – – – – – –
The user PLC protect function is configured as follows.
(1) PLC protect

The dedicated option protect release cassette must be installed in CBUS#1 if the following
operations are to be performed when the PLC protect option is enabled. (For CBUS#1 and
CBUS#2, refer to the figure below.)
<Operations requiring option protect release cassette>
• PLC editing operations using on-board editing tool (write, insert, delete, change)
• Ladder input/output
(2) Version upgrade cassette preparation

The version upgrade cassette is prepared by writing the M64 format ladders into the ROM
cassette. The versions of the ladders for other M64 systems can then be upgraded using this
cassette.
(3) PLC version upgrading

By installing the version upgrade cassette in CBUS#2 and turning the power back on, the PLC
ladders inside the version upgrade cassette are transferred inside the CNC system and written
into the F-ROM.
Example: Transplanting the PLC ladders of system A to system B
Version upgrade cassette preparation PLC version upgrading

M64 system A M64 system B
CBUS#1 CBUS#2 CBUS#1 CBUS#2
7-segment LED 7-segment LED
↑ Rotary switch=0
↑ Rotary switch=0
Version upgrade cassette
Option protect release cassette
Version upgrade cassette
- 288 -
18.1 PLC
18.1.9 PLC Password Lock

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
This function makes it possible to use a code number to prohibit user PLC editing and input/output
in order to prevent the illegal writing by the end users of the user PLC data prepared by the
machine tool builder.
This function can be used when the ladder type is the PLC4B type.
User PLC protection using code number

On-board PLC file writing, editing operations (write, insert, delete, change) for PLC circuits and PLC
file input/output operations are enabled by inputting the code number.
The operations which are prohibited during user PLC protection by the code number are listed in
the table below.
List of operations
Code number No code number
Operation Remarks
input input
Ladder circuits Readout Possible Possible
Write Possible Impossible
Insert Possible Impossible
Delete Possible Impossible
Change Possible Impossible
Monitor Possible Possible
PLC files RUN/STOP Possible Possible
Write Possible Impossible
Input/output Possible Impossible
External alarm
Input/output Possible Impossible
messages
- 289 -
18.1 PLC
18.1.12 GOT Connection
18.1.12.2 CC-Link Connection (Remote Device)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
The GOT can be connected as a CC-Link remote device.

Note that the devices that can be used with GOT are limited as remote devices.
NC unit
(master station)
GOT
(remote device station)
HR576
- 290 -
18.1 PLC
18.1.13 PLC Message
18.1.13.1 Japanese
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
18.1.13.2 English
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
18.1.13.3 German
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
18.1.13.4 Italian
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
18.1.13.5 French
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
18.1.13.6 Spanish
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
18.1.13.9 Portuguese
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
- 291 -
18.1 PLC
18.1.13.10 Hungarian
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
18.1.13.11 Dutch
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
18.1.13.12 Swedish
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
- 292 -
18.2 Machine Construction

18.2.1 Servo OFF
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
When the servo OFF signal (per axis) is input, the corresponding axis is set in the servo OFF state.
When the moving axis is mechanically clamped, this function is designed to prevent the
servomotor from being overloaded by the clamping force.
Even if the motor shaft should move for some reason or other in the servo OFF state, the
movement amount will be compensated in the next servo ON state by one of the following two
methods. (You can select the compensation method using a parameter.)
(1) The counter is corrected according to the movement amount (follow up function).
(2) The motor is moved according to the counter and compensated.
When follow up is designated, the movement amount will be compensated even in the emergency
stop state.
The axis is simultaneously set with servo OFF to the interlock state.
Mechanical handle
Even if the servo OFF axis is moved with the mechanical handle with the application of the servo
OFF function and follow up function, the position data can be constantly read in and the machine
position updated. Thus, even if the axis is moved with the mechanical handle, the coordinate value
display will not deviate.
- 293 -
18.2.2 Axis Detach

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
This function enables the control axis to be freed from control. Conversely, an axis which has
been freed from control can be returned to the control status.
This function enables the rotary table or attachments to be removed and replaced.
Automatic operation is disabled until the axis for which the axis detach command has been released
completes its dog-type reference position return.
This shows the configuration of a

machine for which switching
between the C axis and turning
table is performed. When the
spindle motor is connected, the C
axis is placed in the detached
C-axis/turning table status.
As a result, the position feedback
of the detector is ignored.
Rotary magnetic scale (Position feedback)
(OFF with C-axis control )
C-axis
Spindle motor
motor
(Coupled with C-axis control)
Spindle C-axis
amplifier amplifier
POSITION The detached status > < is indicated on the right of the current
value display on the POSITION screen and at the same time the
X 123.456 servo ready for the controller output signal is set to OFF.
Z 0 . 0 0 0 #1 The current position counter retains the value applying when
C 3 4 5 . 6 7 8 >< detach was assigned.
(Note) Axis detach can be executed even for the absolute position detection specifications axis,
but when the axis is reinstalled, the zero point must be set.
- 294 -
18.2.3 Synchronous Control
18.2.3.1 Position Tandem

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – ∆ ∆ ∆ – ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – – – – –
The synchronous control is a control method that both master and slave axes are controlled with
the same movement command by designated the movement command for the master axis also to
the slave axis. This function is assumed to be used in the large machine tool, etc. which drives
one axis with two servo motors.
The axis for the base of the synchronization is called the master axis, and the axis according to
the master axis is called the slave axis.
The axis detach function can not be added to the axes used in the synchronous control.
• The slave axis is controlled with the movement command for the master axis.
• One slave axis can be set to one master axis.
• Two sets are applied for the master and slave axes
Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous

control control mode operation method
Correction mode Independent

operation method
Z
Z
Y V
(Master axis) (Slave axis)
- 295 -
(1) Synchronous control mode

The following two operation methods are available in the synchronous control mode.
(a) Synchronous operation

This is a method that both master and slave axes are moved simultaneously with the
movement command for the master axis.
CNC system Axis motor
X X axis control Servo control X
Machining program Y Y axis control Servo control Y

S
V axis control Servo control V
V
M
Z Z axis control Servo control Z
NC control section Position control section

Calculation of movement Reference position return
directions, movement Backlash compensation
amount
Calculation of feed rate
There is a function that checks the correlation between the positions of the master axis and
slave axis at all times while the synchronous operation method is selected to stop the feed
as alarm when the allowable synchronization error value set in the parameter is exceeded.
However, when the zero point is not established, the synchronous error is not checked.
(b) Independent operation

This is a method that either the master or slave axis is moved with the movement
command for the master axis.
CNC system Axis motor
X X axis control Servo control X
Machining program Y Y axis control Servo control Y

S
V axis control Servo control V
V
M
Z Z axis control Servo control Z
NC control section Position control section

Calculation of movement Reference position return
directions, movement Backlash compensation
amount
Calculation of feed rate
(2) Correction mode

The synchronization is temporary canceled to adjust the balance of the master and slave axes
during the synchronous control mode in the machine adjustment. Each axis can be moved
separately with the manual handle feed or the arbitrary feed in manual mode. If the operation
mode other than the manual handle feed and arbitrary feed in manual mode is applied during
the correction mode, the operation error will occur.
- 296 -
18.2.4 Inclined Axis Control

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – – – – –
L system – ∆ (*) ∆ (*) ∆ (*) ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
Even when the control axes configuring that machine are mounted at an angle other than 90
degrees, this function enables it to be programmed and controlled in the same way as with an
orthogonal axis.
The inclination angle is set using a parameter, and axes are controlled using the movement
amounts of the axes which are obtained through conversion and offset using this angle.
<Example of use> When the X axis serves as the basic axis and the Y axis serves as the inclined
axis
X
X: Actual X axis
Y: Actual Y axis
y: Programmed Y axis
Yp*tan θ Xa θ: Inclination angle
θ Yp
y
θ
Yp/cosθ
Ya
Y
The Y-axis position and Yp on the programmed coordinates (on the orthogonal coordinates) are
respectively the Xa and Ya positions produced by combining the X axis and Y axis along which the
machine actually moves.
Therefore, the Y-axis (inclined axis) movement amount is expressed by the following formula:
Ya = Yp/cosθ (1)
The X-axis (basic axis) movement amount is offset by the inclined movement of the Y axis, and it is
expressed as follows:
Xa = Xp - Yp x tanθ (2)
The Y-axis (inclined axis) speed is as follows:
Fa = Fp/cosθ
Xa, Ya and Fa are the actual movement amounts and speed.

Xp, Yp and Fp are the movement amounts and speed on the program coordinates.
(Note) (*) indicates that X axis (fixed) is used as the inclined axis.
- 297 -
18.2.5 Index Table Indexing

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The indexing of the index table can be performed by setting the index axes. Programming is
facilitated because, in terms of the index commands, only the indexing angle need to be designated
using the address of the programmed axis serving as the index setting axis, and there is no need to
designate special M codes for clamping and unclamping the table.
The following operations are performed for the index table indexing function.
(1) The "index axis selection" parameter (#2076) for the axis along which the indexing table is to
be indexed is set to "1."
(2) Designate the programmed commands (absolute or incremental) for moving the selected axis.
(3) The unclamp command signal is now output prior to the axis movement.
(4) When the axes are unclamped, the unclamp finish signal is set (ladder used for processing).
(5) After checking the unclamp finish signal, the designated axis starts moving.
(6) Upon completion of the movement, the unclamp command signal is set to OFF.
(7) Clamp the axes and set the unclamp finish signal to OFF (ladder used for processing).
(8) After checking that the unclamp finish signal is OFF, processing of the next block is initiated.
Operation timing chart
Programmed command G0 B90.;
Unclamp command
Unclamp finish
B-axis movement
T10 Standing by for completion 0800 T10 Standing by for completion 0800
- 298 -
18.2.6 NSK Table Connection Control

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
By assigning commands to the control unit from the 2nd miscellaneous function and the PLC and
pulse train input, this function transmits commands by serial communication (RS-232C
specification) to the dedicated drive unit of the NSK mega-torque motor.
Command designation method
By setting the command for the prescribed R register and the numerical value command following
address B designated by the 2nd miscellaneous function as signed binary numbers using the PLC,
the control unit prepares the positioning commands from this command and numerical value
command, and it sends them to the drive unit by serial communication (RS-232C specification).
Furthermore, by setting ON the handle mode of the prescribed R register using the PLC, the pulse
train input based on the handle is sent as the movement command to the drive unit.
Designate the commands with the number of mega-torque motor axes connected already set in the
parameter and with the settings for the input/output basic parameters used for communication
already set. Up to 16 axes can be connected as the mega-torque motor axes.
The numerical value command in angle increments is prepared by setting the numerical value
following address B of the 2nd miscellaneous function as a signed binary number in the prescribed
R register using the PLC.
- 299 -
18.2.7 Auxiliary Axis Control

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
The MR-J2-CT drive unit for positioning and indexing can be connected for auxiliary axis control.
The drive unit is a single-axis control unit, and the control is performed from the PLC. It comes with
the following functions, and is suited to controlling a peripheral device of the machine.
(1) Feed functions

(a) Four different feed rates can be set and selected using parameter settings.
(b) Constant inclination acceleration/deceleration, linear acceleration/deceleration or soft
acceleration/deceleration can be selected.
(c) When rotary axis is used, automatic short-cut discrimination and rotary direction can be
assigned by commands.
(2) Command methods

(a) Station method
Any point (station) obtained when the rotary axis has been divided into equal parts can be
selected by a command, and the axis can be positioned at that point. The maximum
number of divisions is 360.
(b) Arbitrary coordinate designation method
The arbitrary coordinates (absolute position as referenced to the zero point) can be
commanded from the PLC and the axis can be positioned at these coordinates.
(3) Operation functions

(a) JOG mode
In this mode, the axis is rotated at a constant speed in the designated direction while the
start signal is ON.
(b) Automatic mode
In this mode, the axis is positioned at the designated station number by the start signal.
(c) Manual mode
In this mode, the axis is rotated at a constant speed in the designated direction while the
start signal is ON. When the start signal is set to OFF, the axis is positioned at the nearest
station position.
(d) Arbitrary coordinate mode
In this mode, the axis is positioned at the arbitrary coordinates designated with the PLC by
the start signal. When the start signal is set to OFF prior to the completion of the
positioning, the axis immediately decelerates and stops.
(e) Manual handle mode
In this mode, axis travel is carried out by the pulse command (manual handle command)
sent from the PLC.
(f) Reference position return mode
In this mode, the axis is positioned at the coordinate reference position. Two methods are
used: one method is based on a dog switch and the other method is to carry out
positioning to the reference position which is stored in the memory.
(g) Press-fit-and-positioning mode
In this mode, the axis is positioned while it is pressed against the machine end, etc.
- 300 -
18.3 PLC Operation
18.3 PLC Operation

18.3.1 Arbitrary Feed in Manual Mode
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
This function enables the feed directions and feed rates of the control axes to be controlled using
commands from the user PLC.
The arbitrary feed function controls the movement of the axes at the specified rates while the start
signal is output from the PLC to the NC system.
PLC operations can be performed even during manual operation or automatic operation, but they
cannot be performed when an axis for which arbitrary feed has been assigned is executing a
command from the NC system (that is, while the axis is moving).
- 301 -
18.3 PLC Operation
18.3.3 PLC Axis Control

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
Over and above the NC control axes, this function enables axes to be controlled independently by
commands based on the PLC.
PLC
ATC
PLC axis control
DDB function
Item Description
Number of control axes Max. 2 axes
Simultaneously PLC control axis is controlled independently from NC control axes.
controlled axes A multiple number of PLC axes can be started simultaneously.
Command increment Least command increment 0.001mm (0.0001 inch)
0.0001mm (0.00001 inch)
(Same as command increment for NC control axes)

Feed rate Least command increment: 0.001mm
Rapid traverse 0 to 1000000 mm/min (0 to 100000 inch/min)
Cutting feed 0 to 1000000 mm/min (0 to 100000 inch/min)
Least command increment: 0.0001mm
Rapid traverse 0 to 100000 mm/min (0 to 10000 inch/min)
Cutting feed 0 to 100000 mm/min (0 to 10000 inch/min)
Movement commands Incremental commands from current position
Absolute commands for machine coordinate system
0 to ±99999999 (0.001mm/0.0001 inch)
Operation modes Rapid traverse, cutting feed, jog feed (+) (–), reference position return
feed (+) (–), handle feed
Acceleration/deceleration Rapid traverse, jog feed, reference position return feed
..... Linear acceleration/deceleration
Cutting feed ..... Exponential function acceleration/deceleration
Handle feed .......Step
Backlash compensation Available
Stroke end None
Soft limit Available
Rotary axis command Available
For absolute commands: amount within 1 rotation
(rotation by amount remaining after
division into 360)
For incremental commands: rotation by assigned amount
Inch/mm changeover None
Set to the command that corresponds to the feedback unit.
Position detector Encoder (Absolute position can also be detected.)
- 302 -
18.4 PLC Interface
18.4 PLC Interface

18.4.1 CNC Control Signal
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
Control commands to the CNC system are assigned from the PLC. Input signals with an A/D
conversion function and skip inputs that respond at high speed can also be used.
(1) Control signals
• Control signals for operations in automatic operation mode
• Control signals for operations in manual operation mode
• Control signals for program execution
• Control signals for interrupt operations
• Control signals for servo
• Control signals for spindle
• Control signals for mode selection
• Control signals for axis selection
• Control signals for feed rates
(2) Analog voltage control [M system]
When an analog voltage is input to an external connector used to connect CNC analog inputs, the
data corresponding to the input voltage can be read out in the prescribed file register. This data
can be used for load meter displays, thermal deformation compensation, etc. (Maximum 8 points)
(3) Skip signals
When signals are input to the skip input interface, they are processed by interrupt processing.
This enables functions requiring a high response speed to be implemented. (Maximum 4 points)
For further details, refer to the PLC Interface Manual.
- 303 -
18.4 PLC Interface
18.4.2 CNC Status Signal

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system { { { { { { { {
L system { { { { { { { {
The status signals are output from the CNC system. They can be utilized by referencing them from
the PLC.
These signals can also be output as analog data by setting the data from the PLC in the R register.
Status output functions

(1) Controller operation ready
When the controller power is turned ON and the controller enters the operation ready status, the
"Ready" signal is output to the machine.
Refer to the PLC Interface Manual for details of the sequences from when the controller power is
supplied to when the controller ready status is entered.
(2) Servo operation ready
When the controller power is turned ON and the servo system enters the operation ready status,
the "Servo ready" signal is output to the machine.
Refer to the PLC Interface Manual for details of the sequences from when the power is supplied to
when the "Servo ready" signal is turned ON.
(3) In automatic operation
Generally, if the "cycle start" switch is turned ON in the automatic operation mode (memory, MDI),
this signal is output until the reset state or emergency stop state is entered by the M02, M30
execution or the reset & rewind input to the controller using the reset button.
(4) In automatic start
The signal that denotes that the controller is operating in the automatic mode is output from the
time when the cycle start button is pressed in the memory or MDI mode and the automatic start
status has been entered until the time when the automatic operation is terminated in the automatic
operation pause status entered by the "feed hold" function, block completion stop entered by the
block stop function or resetting.
(5) In automatic pause
An automatic operation pause occurs and this signal is output during automatic operation from
when the automatic pause switch is pressed ON until the automatic start switch is pressed ON, or
during automatic operation when the mode select switch is changed from the automatic mode to
the manual mode.
(6) In rapid traverse
The "In rapid traverse" signal is output when the command now being executed is moving an axis
by rapid traverse during automatic operation.
(7) In cutting feed
The "In cutting feed" signal is output when the command now being executed is moving an axis by
cutting feed during automatic operation.
(8) In tapping
The "In tapping" signal is output when the command now being executed is in a tap modal which
means that one of the statuses below is entered during automatic operation.
(a) G84 (fixed cycle: tapping cycle)
(b) G74 (fixed cycle: reverse tapping cycle)
(c) G63 (tapping mode)
- 304 -
18.4 PLC Interface
(9) In thread cutting

The "In thread cutting" signal is output when the command now being executed is moving an axis
by thread cutting feed during automatic operation.
(10) In rewinding
The "In rewinding" signal is output when the reset & rewind signal is input by M02/M30, etc.,
during memory operation and the program currently being executed is being indexed.
The rewinding time is short, so there may be cases when it cannot be confirmed with the
sequence program (ladder).
(11) Axis selection output
The "Axis selection output" signal for each axis is output to the machine during machine axis
movement.
(a) Automatic mode
The signal is output in the movement command of each axis. It is output until the machine
stops during stop based on feed hold or block stop.
(b) Manual mode (including incremental feed)
The signal is output while the axis is moving from the time when the jog feed signal is
turned ON until the time when it is turned OFF and the machine feed stops.
(c) Handle feed mode
The signal is output at all times when the axis selection input is on.
(12) Axis movement direction
This output signal denotes the direction of the axis now moving, and for each axis a "+" (plus)
signal and a "–" (minus) signal are output respectively.
(13) Alarm
This signal indicates the various alarm statuses that arise during controller operation. It is divided
into the following types and output.
(a) System errors
(b) Servo alarms
(c) Program errors
(d) Operation errors
(14) In resetting
The "Reset" signal is output during the reset process when the reset & rewind command is input
to the controller with the "reset" button on the setting and display unit is pressed or when the
"Reset" signal is input from the machine operation panel, etc.
This signal will also be output when the controller READY status is OFF, when the Emergency
stop signal is input or when a servo alarm is occurring, etc.
(15) Movement command finish
In the memory or MDI automatic operation, the "Movement command finish" signal is output when
the command block in the machining program features a movement command and when that
block command has been completed.
When the movement command and M, S, T or B command have been assigned in the same
block, then the movement command signal can be used as a sync signal for either executing the
processing of the M, S, T or B command at the same time as the command or executing it upon
completion of the movement command.
- 305 -
18.4 PLC Interface
18.4.5 DDB
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
The DDB (direct data bus) provides the function for PLC to directly read/write controller data. PLC
can read the specified data into a buffer and set (write) the specified data into the controller by
setting information required for read/write in the buffer and calling the DDB function. Generally,
data is read/written for each data piece, but data related to control axes is processed in batch for
as many axes as the specified number of axes.
The feature of the DDB function is the capability of referencing read data or write data in the next
step just after a DDBA instruction is executed.
- 306 -
18.5 Machine Contact I / O
18.5 Machine Contact I / O

DI:48/DO:48
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system
L system
DI:64/DO:64
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system
L system
Additional DI/DO (DI:64/DO:48)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system
L system
Additional DI/DO(DI:32/DO:32)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system
L system
Operation board IO (DI:32/DO:32)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system
L system
Operation board IO DI:64/DO:48

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system
L system
Remote IO 32/32
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
Remote IO 64/48
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
- 307 -
18.6 External PLC Link

18.6.1 External PLC link I (M-NET)
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ – – – –
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ – – – –
This function enables a serial link to be established using RS-422 as another machine interface in
addition to the existing remote I/O.
In addition to the 9.6, 19.2 and 38.4 kbps baud rates, baud rates of 14.4, 28.8 and 57.5 kbps are
supported.
This function enables the serial link to be established by adding the HR571 dedicated interface card.
Basic specifications of serial link

Item Basic specification
Number of Max. number of inputs: 256 points (max. 128 points per station when
input/output points MELSEC is connected)
Max. number of outputs: 256 points (max. 128 points per station when
MELSEC is connected)
(Inputs and outputs can be set in 8-point increments.)
Serial connection RS-422 standard satisfied, 1 channel
Baud rates 9.6, 19.2 and 38.4 kbps/14.4, 28.8 and 57.5 kbps
Connecting MELSEC-A (A1CPU, A2CPU, A3CPU) + AJ71C22/AJ71C22S1 (max. 38.4
sequencer kbps) or equivalent product made by another company
Transmission Refer to AJ71C22 transmission specifications.
specifications
Connections between the equipment

The following figure shows how the equipment is connected in a serial connection format.
Machine side
機械側 M60
Ｍ 60 series
シリーズ
Serial input/output
シリアル入出力ＨＲ５７１
HR571 serial link
シリアルリンク
option card
オプションカード
手動ハンドル
Manual handle
ＲＩＯ
RIO
EMG/OT/etc
EMG/OT/etc ＤＸ１１０／１２０
SA/etc
SA/etc DX110/120
- 308 -
Cable connections
MELSEC-A
MELSEC-AMain
親局station M64 Substation:
M64 子局第ｎ局station No. "n" M64 Substation:
M64 子局最終局 last station
AJ71C22 HR571 HR571
AJ71C22 HR571 HR571
SDA １１　　 RDSA
SDB ２２　　 RDSB

ツイストペア線
Twisted pair
SDA ３３　　　SG
ツイストペア線
Twisted pair
RDB ４４　　　FG
SG
外被シールド
External cable ＦＧ
FG
FG shield
External
外被シールド cable ＦＧ
FG
shield
Cable length: max.100m

ケーブル長　max. 100 meters
- 309 -
18.6.2 External PLC Link II (Bus connection)
18.6.2.1 MELSEC-A, QnA Series

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
Connection with an external PLC (Mitsubishi MELSEC-A/QnA Series) is possible with a bus.
Item Basic specifications
Number of input/output Bit data input: max. 256 points, output: max. 256 points
points Numerical data input: max. 96 words, output: max. 128 words
Combined use with remote I/O unit is possible.
Connection sequence MELSEC-A/QnA Series
Number of connectable A maximum of four NC units can be connected to one MELSEC unit.
units
(Note 1) A maximum of four units can be connected, but the total length should be 6m or less.
(Note 2) The Number of NC units that can be connected will differ according the max No. of
input/output points on the MELSEC-CPU.
(Note 3) The input signals for the hardware OT and reference position return near-point detection
are connected to the remote I/O unit.
(1) Software process
• The signal interface is determined between the MELDAS and MELSEC.
• The MELDAS side executes sequence processing with the built-in PLC to the interface
exclusive for bus connection.
• After reading in the data with the FROM command and processing the sequence, the
MELSEC side will send the data to MELDAS with the TO command.
(2) List of CPUs that can be bus connected to MELSEC
(One NC unit is regarded as one special unit.)
MELSEC CPU Max. No. of IO points Basic base No. of expandable steps
A1NCPU A**B 4 steps (Note)
A1SCPU 256 points
A1S**B 1 step
A1SJCPU
A2NCPU
A2ACPU A**B 4 steps (Note)
512 points
A2UCPU
A2USCPU A1S**B 1 step
A2USHCPU-S1 A1S**B 1 step
A2NCPU-S1
1024 points
A2ACPU-S1
A2UCPU-S1
A3NCPU A**B 4 steps (Note)
A3ACPU 2048 points
A3UCPU
A4USPU 4096 points
(Note) The number of expandable steps, which is 7 steps when using only MELSEC, is limited
to 4 units (4 steps) that is the number of connectable units for MELDAS.
MELSEC CPU Max. No. of IO points Basic base No. of expandable steps
Q2ACPU 512 points
Q2ACPU-S1 1024 points A**B 4 steps
Q3ACPU 2048 points
Q4ACPU 4096 points
- 310 -
18.6.3 IO Link
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
Introduction
This function enables data to be sent and received between several numerical controllers by means
of packet communications using the HDLC function.
It uses a different communication channel from the conventional communication between numerical
controllers and operation board.
It enables communication between one master numerical NC and up to four slave NC stations.
System configuration
As shown in the figure below, the second channel of the expansion card in the control unit is used.
Operation board
Master station
Control unit Slave station #1
Operation board
Expansion card Expansion card
HDLC
Channel 1 communication Channel 1
Channel 2 Channel 2
Slave station #2
Operation board
Expansion card
Channel 1
Channel 2
Slave station #4
Operation board
Expansion card
Channel 1
Channel 2
System configuration
Precautions
(1) One master station must always be provided for these communications. Data cannot be
communicated between slave stations.
- 311 -
18.6.4 CC-Link
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system – – – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
NC unit can be directly connected to the network to serve as the master/local station of the
MELSEC CC-Link. To enable this connection, the CC-Link master/local units (HR576) must be
installed in the expansion slots. When using this function, the user PLC ladder type must be the GX
developer type. The transient command of the MELSEC A series using this function cannot be
used. In connecting with the GOT, set the GOT as the remote device station. (Cannot set as
intelligent station)
(1) Outline of CC-Link

• Distributing and installing each unit to the equipments such as conveyor line and mechanical
device and so on can simplify the wiring of the whole system.
• The ON/OFF data and numerical data such as input/output treated by each unit anc be
communicated easily and at high speed.
• The simple distributed system can be established by connecting several sequencer CPUs or
NCs.
• Connecting the device equipments made by the partner maker can flexibly support various
systems.
(2) Outline drawing

Master station or Master station
(NC unit)
Sequencer
CPU
Remote I/O station

HR576
Remote device station

Partner maker product
CC-Link
Remote I/O station

Local station or Local station
Sequencer
CPU
Master station This station controls the remote I/O station, remote device station
and local station.
Local station This station has the CPU and can communicate with the master
station and the other local station.
Remote I/O station Remote station that treats only the ON/OFF data
Remote device station Remote station that treats the ON/OFF data and numerical value
- 312 -
(3) Performance specifications

Item CC-Link master/local unit (HR576)
Baud rates 156kbps/625kbps/2.5Mbps/5Mbps/10Mbps can be selected.
The followings are obtained by the baud rate described
Max. transmission distance above.
1200m/600m/200m/150m•110m/100m•80m•50m
64 units
Note that the following two conditions must be satisfied.
Condition 1:
{(1 × a)+(2 × b)+(3 × c)+(4 × d)} ≤ 64
a: Number of units that occupy station 1
b: Number of units that occupy station 2
c: Number of units that occupy station 3
Max. number of connection d: Number of units that occupy station 4
units
Condition 2:
{(16 × A)+(54 × B)+(88 × C)} ≤ 2304
A: Number of remote I/O stations ≤ 64 units
B: Number of remote device stations ≤ 42 units
C: Local station, Standby master station, ≤ 26 units
Number of intelligent device stations
Number of stations
Number of occupied Station 1 to station 4 (Changing over with DIP switch)
stations
(Number of local stations)
Remote input/output (RX, RY) : Input/output each 2048
points
(Note 1)
Remote register (RWw) : 256 points (Master station →
Max. number of link points
remote/local station)
per one system
Remote register (RWr) : 256 points (Remote/local
station → master station)
Remote input/output (RX, RY) : 32points (Local station is 30
points) (Note 2)
Number of link points per
Remote register (RWw) : 4 points (Mater station →
one remote station/local
remote/local station)
station
Remote register (RWr) : 4 points (Remote/local
station → master station)
Communication method Polling method
Synchronization method Flame synchronization method
Encode method NRZI method
Transmission path method Bus (RS485)
Transmission format HDLC standard satisfied
Illegal control method CRC (X16 + X12 +X5 + 1)
Connection cable Twist pair cable with shield
• Automatic link refresh function
RAS function • Sub-station isolation function
• Link special relay/error detection by register
Number of Input/output 32 points
occupied points
(Note 1) If the points which can be reserved as the device for the CC-Link in the NC side does not
satisfied 2048 points, the number of points which can be reserved is the max. number of
link points per one system.
The remote register (RWw, RWr) is also in the same manner.
(Note 2) The last station of each local station is 30 points.
Example: When the number of occupied station is the station 4,
Number of link points= 32 × 3 + 30 = 126 points
- 313 -
(4) Usable functions

In the CC-Link functions, the ones listed in the table below can be used by the NC.
Function item MELSEC NC unit
Master Local Master Local
station station station station
Communication between master station
O × O ×
and remote I/O station
O × O ×
and remote device station
O O O O
and local station
Mixed system communication O O O O
Reserved station function O × O ×
Error cancel station function O × O ×
Setting of data link status when trouble
O O O O
occurs in CPU of master station
Registration of parameters in EEPROM O × × (Note 1) × (Note 1)
Setting of input data status from data link
O O O O
trouble station
Unit resetting by sequence program O O O O
Data link stop/restart O O O O
16-point display
LED diagnosis status 16-point display
(A1SJ61QBT11)
Station number setting Setting switches on
Baud rate setting Unit front panel card
Mode setting switch switches Card front panel
Condition setting switches
Automatic link refresh function O O O O
Sub-station isolation function O × O ×
Data link status check (SB/SW) O O O O
Off-line test O O O O
On-line test O O O O
Monitor diagnosis O O × ×
Parameter registration function O O O (Note 1) O (Note 1)
Automatic refresh function O O O O
Synchronous
O × O ×
Scan synchronization mode
function Asynchronous
O O O O
mode
Standby master function (Note 2) O × × ×
Temporary error cancel station
O × O ×
designation function
Special-purpose instruction O O ∆ (Note 3) ∆ (Note 3)
(Note 1) The parameter for the CC-Link is set with the GX Developer.
When setting the CC-Link parameter, the format of the NC’s ladder area is required in
installing the HR576. Formatting is carried out with the GX Developer.
(Note 2) The special-purpose instruction (transient command) is corresponding to the RIRD
command/RIWT command.
- 314 -
(5) Communication data flow
The flow of data communicated by the CC-Link’s link scan is as follows.
(The master station and local station of MELSEC CPU can be also mixed.)
Built-in PLC NC (Master station) NC (Local station) Built-in PLC
Local station Remote device Remote I/O

Devices station station Devices
X device, etc. RX RY RY Y device, etc.
RX RX
: : : : :
Y device, etc. RY RX RY RY RX X device, etc.
: : : : :
- 315 -
R register, etc. RWr RWw RWw R register, etc.
RWr
: : : : :
R register, etc. RWw RWr RWw RWr R register, etc.

: : : : :
<Flow of data>
Transmission data Lisk scan
Automatic refresh
(When master station/local station is NC,)
18.7 Installing S/W for Machine Tools
18.7 Installing S/W for Machine Tools

Software other than the built-in PLC can be installed in order to implement the machine tool
builder's own functions (customized release). The customized release function consists of the
following items.
(1) Screen release interface function : Change of CNC standard screen, preparation of
inherent screen
(2) DDB interface function : Read/write CNC data
(3) Machine control interface function : Set/reset PLC device
(4) File release interface function : Preparation, modification, registration, etc. of user
files using file system of CNC system
18.7.1 APLC
Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S
M system ∆ ∆ – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
L system ∆ ∆ – – ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
The screens are released by pressing the "F0" function key (nothing is displayed on the screen of
the NC unit). This enables the machine tool builder to display its own screens from its customized
software.
Using the APLC libraries, the customized software enables screen displays (characters, graphics),
key loading, file read/write, NC unit internal information read/write, and exchanges of R register and
other information with PLC ladders.
Customized software is described using C language and developed using a commercial compiler.
- 316 -
Function code Subject Setting and Stored Punch-out output
Control unit CRT
to parity display unit in Internal NC system function
EIA ISO recognition display EIA ISO
V count key-in memory
0~9 0~9 Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored 0~9 0~9 Numerical data
A~Z A~Z Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored A~Z A~Z Addresses
+ + Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored + + Sign, variable operator (+)
– – Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored – – Sign, variable operator (–)
. . Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored . . Decimal point
, , Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored , ,
/ / Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored / / Block delete (optional block skip), variable operator (÷)
No key-in
Displayed End of record (tape storage end),
EOR % Yes Counted (automatically Stored EOR %
(%) rewind start & stop during tape search
inserted)
EOB/CR LF/NL Yes Counted Displayed (;) Key-in, ;/EOB Stored EOB LF End of block
2+4+5 ( Yes Counted Displayed Key-in, ;/EOB Stored 2+4+5 ( Control out (comment start)
2+4+7 ) Yes Counted Displayed Key-in, ;/EOB Stored 2+4+7 ) Control in (comment end)
: Yes Counted Displayed No Key-in Stored : Program number address (instead of O, ISO only)
Appendix 1. List of Specifications
# Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored # Variable number
- 317 -
* Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored * Variable operator (×)
= Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored = Variable definition
[ Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored [ Variable operator
] Yes Counted Displayed Key-in Stored ] Variable operator
BS BS No Counted Blank No key-in Stored
TAB HT No Counted Blank No key-in Stored
Appendix 1. List of Specifications
SP (T-V automatic SP (T-V automatic SPs starting with EOB and ending when first character or
SP SP No Counted Blank Key-in Stored
adjustment) adjustment) number code appears are not subject to parity V count.
CR No Counted Blank No key-in Stored
DEL DEL No Not counted Not displayed No key-in Not stored
All space NULL No Not counted Not displayed No key-in Not stored
All mark (DEL) No Not counted Not displayed No key-in Not stored
Any other Any other No Counted (Note 3) No key-in Stored
(Note 1) indicates that corresponding code pattern can be set by parameter.

(Note 2) Codes not listed above are stored on tape but an error will result during operation if they are not comments.
(Note 3) This denotes characters (including blanks) which are stored inside the controller and which correspond to the command codes. @ is not displayed.
Appendix 2. Outline and installation dimension drawings of units
Appendix 2. Outline and Installation Dimension Drawings of Units

Appendix 2.1 Outline Drawing of Control Unit
Appendix 2.1.1 M64A/M64 Control Unit Outline Drawing
Hole f or 4-M5 screw
6
CBUS 1 CBUS 2
OPEN
156
168
DC IN
DC OUT
PS EMG ENC2
BAT ALM F0 1
B CDE
2
34 56
A
78 9
WD NC NC NC CF11
6
ER LED SYS RST CF10
6 208 6
220
DC IN
CF01EMGCF02
95
- 318 -
Appendix 2.1.2 M64AS/64S/65/65S/66/66S Control Unit Outline Drawing
Protrusion of fan cover

Hole for 4-M5 screw
60
100 60
5
6
CBUS 1 CBUS 2
OPEN
156
168
NCNO SW2 AUX1
F0 1
CDE
2
34 56
AB
DC IN
78 9
DC OUT TFG AUX2

PS EMG ENC2
BAT ALM F 1
0
B CDE
2
3456
A
78 9
WD NC NC NC CF11
6
ER LED SYS RST CF10
6 208 6
220
DC IN
CF01EMGCF02
85
- 319 -
9 382 (square hole) 9
9
55
MITSU BISHI
180
182 (square hole)

Appendix 2.2.1 FCUA-CT100/CT120
9
55
8 - ø4 hole (for M3 screw)
130 130 130
- 320 -
250
5 5
260 140
8-M3 screw
382 (square hole dimensions)
Appendix 2.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing
190 ±0.2
182
(square hole
dimensions)
130±0.2 130 ±0.2 130 ±0.2
Panel cut drawing

9 242 (square hole) 9
9
10
5
MITSU BISHI
Appendix 2.2.2 FCUA-CR10
180
200
180
182 (square hole)

5
9
10
5
6 - ø4 hole (for M3 screw)
130 120
- 321 -
250
5 5
260
6-M3 screw
242 (square hole dimensions)
Square hole
182
190 ±0.2
(Square hole
dimensions)
130 ±0.2 120 ±0.2
Panel cut drawing

9 382 (Square hole) 9
5
10
5
MITSUBISHI
180
Appendix 2.2.3 FCUA-LD100
180
CR02
10
8 - 4 hole (for M3 screw) 5
130 130 70
130
5 5 10
- 322 -
260 140
2.3
(square hole
8- M3 screw
382 dimensions)
CR02 connector
+
Square hole 190 0.2
182
dimensions)
(Square hole
+ + +
130 0.2 130 0.2 130 0.2
SH21 cable
Panel cut drawing

(FCUA-R000)
Appendix 2.2.4 FCUA-LD10
SH21 cable
CR02 connector (FCUA-R000)
70
CR02
2.3
10
Panel cut drawing

5
6 - 4 hole (for M3 screw)
120
190 0.2
1
120 0.2
248 dimensions)
(square hole
+
Square hole
260
130 0.2
+
130
MITSUBISHI
dimensions)
1
(Square hole
182
6- M3 screw
4 4
5
10 180 10
5 190 5
200
- 323 -
Escutcheon
M3 8 screw (Note)
If a screw longer than 8mm is
(10.4-type Protective cover used, the liquid crystal could
monochrome LCD) be damaged.
210
Appendix 2.2.5 FCU6-DUT32
270 Menu keys
RX215
- 324 -
4
10
45
20 50
(Wiring allowance)
Square hole
190+0.3
182+0.3
Panel cut drawing
4
10
1 248 1
+
6- 4 hole
+
10 130 0.3 120 0.3 10
Escutcheon
M3 8 screw
Control card
Inverter power supply installation plate
Inverter power supply for backlight

(10.4-type color LCD)
210
(Note)
Appendix 2.2.6 FCU6-DUT33
If a screw longer than 8mm is

used, the liquid crystal could
be damaged.
270 Menu keys
4
10
- 325 -
20 100 (Wiring allowance)
Square hole
+
+
190 0.3
182 0.3
Panel cut drawing
4
10
1 248 1
+ +
10 130 0.3 120 0.3 10 6- 4 hole
10
CR02
Reference drawing for combination with FCUA-LD10
180
190
200
CR02 connector
CR02
Appendix 2.2.7 FCUA-KB20/KB30
SH21 cable
(FCUA-R000)
10 (70)
- 326 -
5
130
10
2.3 5 5
Dimensions when combined 140 10 34.5
with FCUA-LD10, etc.
2.3
132
4- M3 screw (square hole
dimensions)
4
0.2
+
Square hole
182
190
(Square hole
dimensions)
+
130 0.2 Panel cut drawing
1 1
M3 10 screw
(Note) If a screw longer than 10mm
is used, the liquid crystal
could be damaged.
Panel cut drawing
(5)
(9)
READY
Appendix 2.2.8 FCU6-KB021/KB031
TOOL EDIT DIAGN

MONITOR PARAM MDI IN/OUT SFG F0
O N G 7 8 9$
A B C
Square hole
X Y Z 4 5 6
U V W
- 327 -
F D H 1 2 3
E L !
+
P Q R
200 0.3
- 0 ･,
182 (Square hole)

I J K + SP
132 (Square hole)
210
210 (keyboard outline)

M S T EOB = /
( ) 〔〕 # *
DELETE C･B
e ? INS CAN
h ol
4 SHIFT
4-
9
RESET INPUT
1 + (1) CALC
5
5 130 0.3
140 (keyboard outline)
140 20 34.5
* The key layout for the FCU6-KB021 is shown in this drawing.

5
10
200
190
180
Appendix 2.2.9 FCUA-KB10/KB12
5
10
5 130 5
10 40 80 (Wiring allowance)
140
- 328 -
2.3
(square hole dimensions)
132
4 - M3 screw
4
+
Square hole
182
190 0.2
(Square hole
dimensions)
+
130 0.2 Panel cut drawing
1 1
Appendix 2.2.10 Key Arrangement

(1) Appearance of CT100/LD100/separate type FCUA-CR10 + KB10/KB12
Alphabetic character,
numer ical character,
READY L ED and sym bol keys
Setting keys Function selection keys
MITSUBISHI READY
MONI- TOOL EDIT DIAGN

TOR PARAM IN/OUT SFG F0
MDI
ＯＮＧ７８９
A B C
ＸＹＺ５
４６
U V W
ＦＤＨ１３
２
E L !
ＰＱＲ－０
I J K ＋ SP ，
ＭＳＴ EOB ＝／
( ) [ ] ＃＊
? DELET CB
INS CAN
SHIFT
RESET INPUT
CALC
Cu rsor key
Shift key
Reset key
Menu keys
Data correction keys
Page keys
Input key (calculation)
(2) Appearance of CT120/separate type FCUA-LD10 + FCUA-KB30
MITSUBISHI READY
MONI- TOOL EDIT DIAGN SFG F0
TOR PARAM MDI IN/OUT
ＯＮＧ７８９
A B C
Ｘ Z F ４５６
Y H E
U W M １２３
V P Q
I
J
K
L
S
[
－
＋０
SP
，
R D Ｔ EOB ＝／＊
( ) [ ] ＃
DELET CB
? INS CAN
SHIFT
RESET INPUT
CALC
(Note) To input the alphabetic characters or symbols on the lower of the alphabetic character and
symbol keys, press SHIFT key, then press the corresponding key.
(Example) "A" is input by pressing SHIFT , O
A .
- 329 -
Appendix 2.3 Base I/O Unit Outline Drawing
4-M5 screw hole
(6)
2 3 45 2 3 45
SKIP
D E0F1
D E0F1
678
678
ENC1 9A C
B
9A C
B
SV2 SV1
CR31
CF31 CF32
156
168
CF33 CF34 CF11
RI02 RI01 DCIN

RS232C
HANDLE
HR211A
80
(6) 208 6 6
220
100
- 330 -
Appendix 2.4 Remote I/O Unit Outline Drawing

Top
Heat dissipation
allowance
100
135
168
6
40
Heat dissipation,
wiring allowance
70
150
Wiring allowance
Bottom
Installation hole
135
2-M5-0.8 screw
6
DX
156
6
34 6
- 331 -
Revision History
Date of revision Manual No. Revision details
Sep. 2001 BNP-B2210B • The contents are changed according to the M64AS/M64S/M65S/M66S.
• Mistakes are corrected.
• Design of the cover and the back cover were changed.
• MODEL, MODEL CODE, and Manual No. were added on the back cover.
• The title of manual is changed to “MELDAS 60/60S Series Specifications Manual”
Apr. 2002 BNP-B2210C • The contents are revised in accordance with the M60S system software version B2.
Jul. 2002 BNP-B2210D • 4.2.3 Inverse Time Feed

M64/65/66S ∆Æ
• 9.1.3 Tool Compensation for 3rd / 4th Axis
M64/65/66(L) –Æ{ M64/65/66S(L) – Æ {
• 14.2.1.3 Manual Skip
M64/65/66S ∆Æ
• 18.6.1 External PLC link I (M-NET)
M64/65/66S Æ–
Mar. 2003 BNP-B2210E • The contents are revised in accordance with the M60S system software version B3.
Mar. 2004 BNP-B2210F • The following sections were deleted:

3.3.1, 3.3.4, 4.2.3, 4.2.5, 4.5.5, 4.5.7, 4.7.2, 6.4, 8.1.3.5, 9.3.1.4, 11.4.12, 12.1.8.4,
12.1.8.8, 14.2.1.3, 14.3.1.1, 14.3.1.2, 15.3.3, 15.3.7, Appendix 2
• The following section numbers were changed:
5.2.5 to 6 Æ 15.3.10 to 11, 6.3.9 to 12 Æ 6.3.10 to 13, 11.1.2 Æ 11.1.3, 12.1.2.4.8 to
9 Æ 12.1.2.4.9 to 10, Appendix 3 Æ Appendix 2
• The following sections were added:
6.3.9, 11.4.14, 12.1.2.2.1, 12.1.2.4.8, 12.1.7.1.7, 12.1.7.2.1, 12.1.8.9, 15.3.10,
15.3.11, 18.1.1.1, 18.1.12, 18.1.13, 18.2.3.1, 18.6.2.1
• The specification names and details were reviewed.
• Mistakes were corrected.
• M60S System software Version C0, C1 compliance
Notice
Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the
contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some
unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible.
Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments
regarding the use of this product.
Duplication Prohibited
This instruction manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without
written permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
© 1998-2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
HEAD OFFICE : MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG., 2-2-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
MODEL M60/60S Series

MODEL
CODE 008-197
Manual No. BNP-B2210F(ENG)

Specifications subject to change without notice.
(0403) MEE Printed in Japan on recycled paper.

Operação M64

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operação M64

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operação M64

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CNC

This manual describes the specifications of MELDAS 60/60S Series.

Details described in this manual

When there is a great risk that the user could be subject to

When the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries

When the user could be subject to injuries or when physical

2 Input Command .................................................................................................................. 5

3 Positioning / Interpolation ................................................................................................. 17

5 Program Memory / Editing................................................................................................. 58

6 Operation and Display ....................................................................................................... 63

7 Input / Output Functions and Devices ............................................................................. 71

8 Spindle, Tool and Miscellaneous Functions ................................................................... 74

9 Tool Compensation ............................................................................................................ 89

10 Coordinate System...................................................................................................... 103

12 Program Support Functions...................................................................................... 139

14 Automation Support Functions ...................................................................................... 226

15 Safety and Maintenance .................................................................................................. 245

16 Cabinet and Installation ................................................................................................... 265

17 Servo/Spindle System...................................................................................................... 272

18 Machine Support Functions............................................................................................ 276

Appendix 1 List of Specifications........................................................................................ 317

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

Connection specifications of NC axis, PLC axis, spindle and auxiliary axis

Auxiliary axis (J2-CT) : They can be connected with the channel 2.

Max. number of axes (NC axes + spindles + PLC axes)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

Max number of servo axes (NC axes + PLC axes)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

Max. number of spindles

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

Max. number of PLC axes

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

Max. number of auxiliary axes

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

1.1.3 Number of Simultaneous Contouring Control Axes

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

1.1.4 Max. Number of NC Axes in a Part System

1.2 Control Part System

1.2.2 Max. Number of Part Systems

For actual use, the machine maker specification will apply.

1.3 Control Axes and Operation Modes

1.3.2 Memory Mode

1.3.3 MDI Mode

1.3.4 High-Speed Program Server Mode

1.3.5 IC Card Mode

1.3.5.1 IC Card in Control Unit

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

Least command increment: 0.1 µm

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

Least command increment: 0.01 µm (10nm)

Model M64/65/66 M64/65/66S

Metric unit system Inch unit system

2.2 Unit System

2.2.1 Inch/Metric Changeover

Unit system Length data Meaning

2.3 Program Format

2.3.2 Program Format

2.3.2.1 Format 1 for Lathe

The G-code of L system is selected by parameter.